DES-3028 3028P 3052 3052P UG.1st draft - D-Link
Contents
1. T 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 e 10M 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 2 30 31 32 e 10M 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 e 10 100M 49 50 51 52 D Link a E E E E E E E E E E E E EE eiom 217 Hig E E E E E E m Wn Wa 8 ei00m Y 33 B E m a E Hoy E E B43 E m a E 1000M Combo1 49 M n m Managed Switch 5 mH pu Pa qu pu Pu ru Mp ear A GEB T xq LP WI TP pz SER a ne ep cp WT Weg PF DEO Link Act S peed yrs PoE Power n Console E dieses Se eor eb Ter be ell ae EA o A she Mh i Lh b h udz he cwx heut hob Ry dh dh o RO dg hg d Loo Lo 10 o T rs SE DES 3052P 2 4 6 8 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 Link act Combo2 50 52 gt 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 12 B 14 15 16 Som 1 20 21 2 23 24 25 26 28 2 30 31 32 eim 33 34 35 36 3 38 39 40 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 s amp 410400M 49 50 51 82 D Link E E E E E HH mE E H H HBH H m EC o Eye mE E E E E 7H 7 8 H E HN E Sopy Hgm m BOM gy WB H H H 8H H H B H om Combo1 49 W M HW m Managed Switch cues cq Me a ges Ap og CES Le l P d A P od P d po P d cepe vn air 4 dud i a Foe ae Pa rT a2. ye el A hog hog A e A d A AAA A A AAA Ls he ed hz Leld A A ud todo kd 48 uu 2 52 Link s Act Combo2 50 Figure 1 6 Front Panel of the DES 3052P DES 3052 DES 3028G e Twenty four 10 100Mbps BASE T ports e Four Combo 1000BASE T SFP ports located to the right e One female DCE RS 232 DB 9 console port e LEDs for Power Console Link Act Speed for each port Combo3 D Link Managed Switch FE Port E S 10M GE Port E S 1000M S Link Ena 13 17 2 25 Ho E 18 o a 19 a nu 5 E 6 a 7 a 8 L LI Console m _DES 3028G 16 20 m m Figure 1 7 Front Panel of the DES 3028G ERIS Rear Panel Description e The rear panel of the Switch contains an AC power connector The AC power connector is a standard three pronged connector that supports the power cord Plug in the female connector of the provided power cord into this socket and the male side of the cord into a power outlet The Switch automatically adjusts its power setting to any supply voltage in the range from 100 240 VAC at 50 60 Hz The rear panel of the DES 3052 DES 3052P contains one female DCE RS 232 DB 9 console port AC LINE 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 2 9A MAX AC LINE 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 5A MAX AC LINE 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 0 5A MAX AC LINE O 0 100 240 V
3. HMAC SHAI Enabled HM AC MID5 Enabled M HMAC RSA Enabled v HMAC DSA Enabled Figure 10 11 Encryption Algorithm window 195 The following algorithms may be set Parameter Description SSH Authentication Mode and Algorithm Settings Password This parameter may be enabled if the administrator wishes to use a locally configured password for authentication on the Switch The default is Enabled Public Key This parameter may be enabled if the administrator wishes to use a public key configuration set on a SSH server for authentication on the Switch The default is Enabled Host based This parameter may be enabled if the administrator wishes to use a host computer for authentication This parameter is intended for Linux users requiring SSH authentication techniques and the host computer is running the Linux operating system with a SSH program previously installed The default is Enabled Encryption Algorithm 3DES CBC Use the pull down to enable or disable the Triple Data Encryption Standard encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining The default is Enabled Blow fish CBC Use the pull down to enable or disable the Blowfish encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining The default is Enabled AES128 CBC Use the pull down to enable or disable the Ad
4. VLAN Name default Auto Config State Disabled v Figure 6 2 IP Address Settings window To manually assign the Switch s IP address subnet mask and default gateway address 1 Select Manual from the Get IP From drop down menu 28 2 Enter the appropriate IP Address and Subnet Mask 3 If you want to access the Switch from a different subnet from the one it is installed on enter the IP address of the Default Gateway If you will manage the Switch from the subnet on which it is installed you can leave the default address 0 0 0 0 in this field 4 Ifno VLANs have been previously configured on the Switch you can use the default VLAN Name The default VLAN contains all of the Switch ports as members If VLANs have been previously configured on the Switch you will need to enter the VLAN Name of the VLAN that contains the port connected to the management station that will access the Switch The Switch will allow management access from stations in the same VLAN subnet mask of 255 0 0 0 and a default gateway of 0 0 0 0 m lj NOTE The Switch s factory default IP address is 10 90 90 90 with a To use the BOOTP or DHCP protocols to assign the Switch an IP address subnet mask and default gateway address Use the Get IP From pull down menu to choose from BOOTP or DHCP This selects how the Switch will be assigned an IP address on the next re
5. E 255 VOIE De Cer 256 Port Access COMO cited 256 ISADIUS AUtMmentcaton untar tattoo tor lc 256 RADIUS Nee SITO TR capado iia 258 A A 259 omi TEN 260 AVEC NAN GOS e M 260 TE ONG cine hon rein edita dita dui ac 261 Technical Specifications me ct 262 SY SCOTT LOS ENITICS mb M 268 Sandad Tap EIN EO eo OU 278 propicia Diap Di betont uto an ax LN e IE UIN IM I LM MD EET 279 Proprietary Trap List project Ge pendent sisse ns 279 Cable Eeno ths er cadeusesesedisedssdowessosssstscadeasessaceestdioss 281 Password Recovery PEOGCOUHLFEO coiere eiae c oe cota e eeu eco toot ae etus OA din acacia 282 COS Sab ya c P 284 ARP Packet Content A Clan Oda 286 Marranties ResistEAtIOli aiiis sevi eoe doaa i nean Dente EE a 296 Tech SuDDOEE S i i ERREUR EQUES cs NEEERASNU E EE URSI NERA E I QUSS NER RAN HN 305 vii Preface The DES 3028 DES 3028P DES 3028G DES 3052 DES 3052P User Manual is divided into sections that describe the system installation and operating instructions with examples Section 1 Introduction Describes the Switch and its features Section 2 Installation Helps you get started with the basic installation of the Switch and also describes the front panel rear panel side panels and
6. Offset 16 31 Offset 48 63 Offset 64 79 show All CPU Interface Filtering Table Entries Figure 9 19 CPU Interface Filtering Configuration window Packet Content This window will aid the user in configuring the Switch to mask packet headers beginning with the offset value specified The following fields are used to configure the Packet Content Mask Parameter Description Profile ID 1 3 Type in a unique identifier number for this profile set This value can be set from 1 to 3 Type Select profile based on Ethernet MAC Address P address or Packet Content Mask This will change the window according to the requirements for the type of profile Select Ethernet to instruct the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header Select P to instruct the Switch to examine the IP address in each frame s header Select Packet Content Mask to specify a mask to hide the content of the packet header This field will instruct the Switch to mask the packet header beginning with the offset value specifie
7. Force Auth SUCCESS Authorized Force Auth SUCCESS both Authorized Force Auth SUCCESS both Authorized Force Auth SUCCESS both Authorized Force Auth SUCCESS both Authorized Force Auth SUCCESS both Authorized Force Auth SUCCESS both Authorized Figure 10 30 Reauthenticate Port and Reauthenticate Port Table window This window displays the following information Parameter Description Port The port number of the reauthenticated port Auth State The Authenticator State will display one of the following nitialize Disconnected Connecting Authenticating Authenticated Aborting Held ForceAuth ForceUnauth and N A BackendState The Backend State will display one of the following Request Response Success Fail Timeout Idle Initialize and N A OperDir The status of the administrative controlled direction either n or Both NOTE The user must first globally enable 802 1X in the DES 30xx Web Management Tool window before initializing ports Information in the Initialize Ports Table cannot be viewed before enabling 802 1X 217 Reauthenticate Port s for Host based 802 1X To reauthenticate ports for the Host side of 802 1X the user must first enable 802 1X by MAC address in the DES 30xx Web Management Tool window Click Security gt 802 1X gt Reauthenticate Port s to open the following window Mac Address oo Figure
8. To YLAWN Name Protocol Identify E E Port ID Port VLAN ID Enabled Protocol VLAN ID Enabled VLAN Name Enabled Protocol Identity 1 Disable MONE NONE NONE 2 Disable NONE NONE NONE 3 Disable NONE NONE NONE 4 Disable NONE NONE NOME 5 Disable NONE NONE NONE 6 Disable NONE NONE NONE 7 Disable NONE NONE NONE z Disable NONE NONE NONE 9 Disable NOME NOME NOME 10 Disable NOME NOME NOME 11 Disable NOME NOME NOME 12 Disable MONE NONE NONE 13 Disable NONE NONE NONE 14 Disable MONE NONE NONE 15 Disable NONE NONE NONE 16 Disable NONE NONE NONE 17 Disable NONE NONE NONE 18 Disable NONE NONE NONE 19 Disable MONE NONE NONE 20 Disable NONE NONE NONE 2 Disable NONE NONE NONE 22 Disable NONE NONE NONE 23 Disable NONE NONE NONE 24 Disable NONE NONE NONE 25 Disable NONE NONE NONE 26 Disable NONE NONE NONE 27 Disable NONE NONE NONE 28 Disable NONE NONE NONE 135 Figure 7 49 802 1 Extension LLDP Port Settings Table window The following parameters can be set or displayed Parameter Description From To Select a port or group of ports using the pull down menus Port VLAN ID Use the drop down menu to toggle Port VLAN ID between Enabled and Disabled VLAN Name Use the drop down menu to toggle among VLAN ID VLAN Name and All Use the drop down menu to
9. 35 3 2 Wm Y 2 2 25 n 3 y 2 d Fol RR Or S Lal 28 30 32 2 Rubber Feet Figure 2 1 Prepare Switch for installation on a desktop or shelf Installing the Switch in a Rack The Switch can be mounted in a standard 19 rack Use the following diagrams to guide you i i 3 i m RR d 85 T Fam Wo 3 y 33 ES 2 39 4 4 2 3 4 MTM A EE AO CE JNE mx s 4 2 2 v a z RR J Fe Cr EE z 2 x E E yey 19 20 2 CT 2 a am gt z 40M 100M Figure 2 2 Fasten mounting brackets to Switch Fasten the mounting brackets to the Switch using the screws provided With the brackets attached securely users can mount the Switch in a standard rack as shown in the next figure 10 Mounting the Switch in a Standard 19 Rack CAUTION Installing systems in a rack without the front and side stabilizers installed could cause the rack to tip over potentially resulting in bodily injury under certain circumstances Therefore always install the stabilizers before installing components in the rack After installing components in a rack do not pull more than one component out of the rack on its slide assemblies at one time The weight of more than one extended component could cause the rack to tip over and may result in injury
10. Port 1 m Authenticator To view this window click Security gt 802 1X gt 802 1X Capability Settings Capability Hone None None None None None None None None None None None Hone None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None Figure 10 26 802 1X Capability Settings window Configure 802 1X Guest VLAN In order to configure a Guest 802 1X VLAN the user must first configure a normal VLAN which can be enabled here for Guest VLAN status To configure these settings click Security gt 802 1X gt Configure 802 1X Guest VLAN the following window will be displayed 209 VLAN Name accounting E Delete Operation EOE ISNEE 00 To Port Guest VLAN Name accountng Guest VLAN Ports 14 16 Figure 10 27 Configure 802 1X Guest VLAN window The following fields may be modified to enable the guest 802 1X VLAN Parameter Description VLAN Name Enter the pre configured VLAN name to create as a Guest 802 1X VLAN Operation The user has two choices in configuring the Guest 802 1X VLAN which are Enabled Selecting this option will enable ports listed in the Port List below as part of the Guest VLAN Be sure that these ports are configured for this VLAN or users will be prompted with an error message Disabled Selecting this option will disable ports listed in the
11. Access Right Admin v Show 41 User Account Entries Figure 6 12 User Account Modify Table window Add a new user by typing in a User Name and New Password and retype the same password in the Confirm New Password Choose the level of privilege Admin or User from the Access Right drop down menu To return to the User Account Table click the hyperlinked Show All User Account Entries NOTE In case of lost passwords or password corruption please refer to the D Link website and the White Paper entitled Password Recovery Procedure which will guide you through the steps necessary to resolve this issue To modify or delete an existing user click on the Modify button for that user 40 User Name Old Password New Password Confirm New Password Access Right dran rypt Default v show All User Account Entries Figure 6 13 User Account Modify Table window Modify or delete an existing user account in the User Account Modify Table To delete the user account click on the Delete button To change the password type in the New Password and retype it in the Confirm New Password entry field The level of privilege Admin or User can be viewed in the Access Right field 4 Cable Diagnostics The following window is used to test the cables connecting to the Switch This feature is used to determine if there are a
12. ORB PURE SSRRRS BI AERE VCC TO DEE CRETA AA RARO CORRE SR CUN SLR MEET tr nET OIC SSeS A LEARN ET Fiber Optic Ports Optical Safety The following safety warnings apply to all optical devices used in equipment that are removable or directly installed in an I O module or chassis system Such devices include but are not limited to gigabit interface converters GBICs small form factor pluggable SFP modules or mini GBICs XENPAK transceivers and XFP laser optic modules WARNING Laser optic modules become very hot after prolonged use Be careful when removing a laser optic module from the chassis or option card If the laser optic module is too hot to touch disengage the laser optic module and allow it to cool before removing it completely WARNING When working with laser optic modules always take the following precautions to avoid exposure to hazardous radiation Never look at the transmit LED laser through a magnifying device while it is powered on Never look directly at a fiber port on the switch or at the ends of a fiber cable when they are powered on Invisible laser radiation can occur when the connectors are open Avoid direct eye exposure to the beam when optical connections are unplugged Never alter modify or change an optical device in any way other than suggested in this document SFP Mini GBIC XENPAK and XFP Regulatory Compliance Networks pluggable optical modules meet the following regulatory re
13. The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets 1024 1518 The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Show Hide Check whether or not to display 64 65 127 128 255 256 511 512 1023 and 1024 1518 packets received Clicking this button clears all statistics counters on this window View Table Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a table rather than a line graph View Line Chart Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a line graph rather than a table 246 MAC Address This allows the Switch s dynamic MAC address forwarding table to be viewed When the Switch learns an association between a MAC address and a port number it makes an entry into its forwarding table These entries are then used to forward packets through the Switch To view the MAC Address forwarding table click Monitoring gt MAC Address YLAN Name MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 VLAN Name MLAC Address Port 1 default 00 00 00 00 01 01 Dynamic Add 1 default DO 00 D00 65 32 22 5 Dynarnic Add 1 detault 00 00 5E
14. Replace The option 82 field will be replaced if the option 82 field already exists in the packet received from the DHCP client Drop The packet will be dropped if the option 82 field already exists in the packet received from the DHCP client Keep The option 82 field will be retained if the option 82 field already exists in the packet received from the DHCP client This field specifies the feature which allows the user to configure the Remote ID as any specific string When the Remote ID state is set to Default the switch s system MAC address is used as the Remote ID When the Remote ID state is configured to be user defined the user defined string is used as the Remote ID Note The maximum number of characters that can be used is 32 Click Apply to implement any changes that have been made NOTE If the Switch receives a packet that contains the option 82 field from a DHCP client and the E information checking feature is enabled the switch drops the packet because it is invalid However in a some instances you might configure a client with the option 82 field In this situation you should ly disable the information check feature so that the switch does not remove the option 82 field from the packet You can configure the action that the switch takes when it receives a packet with existing option 82 information by configuring the DHCP Agent Information Option 82 Policy 36 The Implementation of DHCP Information O
15. under the Delete heading To display the current settings for an existing SNMP Group Table entry click the hyperlinked Group Name which will show the following window Read View Name Community View Write View Name Notify View Name Community View security Model SMP y 1 security Level No4uhHNoPrer show All SNMP Group Table Entries Figure 6 37 SNMP Group Table Display window To add a new entry to the Switch s SNMP Group Table click the Add button in the upper left hand corner of the SNMP Group Table window This will open the SNMP Group Table Configuration window as shown below 61 Group Name Read View Name Write View Name Notify View Name Security Model SNMPVT vw J security Level show All SNMP Group Table Entries Figure 6 38 SNMP Group Table Configuration window The following parameters can set Parameter Description Group Name Type an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters This is used to identify the new SNMP group of SNMP users Read View Name This field specifies the SNMP view to which the users in the group can read from Write View Name This field specifies the SNMP view to which the users in the group can write to Notify View Name This field specifies the SNMP view to which the users in the group can access notifications Security Model SNMPv1 Specifies that SNMP version 1
16. 101 ROUTE AAPP 0099259500040 0 5 09 o II e dado Da 29d IO 2e edo eE 103 Is ie Rc T 105 Dynamic TP M lticast Learning ecien A A ea cecseicaenoueaticeneraneen ECL dU eeraaae E NOU Ud RUE 107 PSE WIGAN SOON eomm cec lut ot ote ainda ta doa cto tuti es tha acacia gs pum circa Cin tat anm oL 108 IP N lticast ilter Profle Senos a tt tadas 110 Loet Milic ande SEUS Sil io 111 Max Multicast Group Seti eS a AN A A AAA wa AAA AS ed asus 113 WEE bEi ngu rm 114 MIED Snoopines Sell Siero ou Ete Nb Rs 114 MED Snooping Router Port Seti Si voto eset aca vo eet ce ura Lose ia 116 JOD Pa Bu ost 117 Sie bid lA sod studiato sata ossa aa ssa ELO tA cM cc S OIL DIM cA Lc Cop OEC PR IA Sone auto anaes 120 DLP POTIS uso a De A a oue 123 1V MS T Connora nom TdenttETC ao ea ra 125 ST Pag IS S SIE TIENI T A II II a A 197 MoI PPO AO a oc ett On Os 128 Loopback Detection Setos oio ee rene ette delatae e E Evae ee M aene ane ved sschaceceecusswasedenedescuesessecncsedsesbeestendeeees 130 CUDASS esee 131 B BIS CIUS RS iT TONO 131 Base D D DP POR oi andina leida Dti apa 133 S02 I Extension LD POS o re sell e e e e 134 S02 r Extension LLDP POr SEUS A biu t edet ave epu Uu edes dee opea o eue de ave 136 LLDP Management Address Settings anne 138 DIE SIS Sees acest eat ce ds essc oM Le nre cM ence uiu du As dee ed 139 INES NS 140 LL DP Local Port Tale A A o 140 LT DARemote Port Tabla
17. D Link Building Networks for People User Manual PRODUCT MODEL DES 3028 DES 3028P DE8 3028G DES 3052 DES 3052P MANAGED 10 100MBPS FAST ETHERNET SWITCH RELEASE 2 COPYRIGHT 2009 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Information in this document is subject to change without notice 2009 D Link Corporation All rights reserved Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of D Link Computer Corporation is strictly forbidden Trademarks used in this text D Link and the D LINK logo are trademarks of D Link Computer Corporation Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products D Link Computer Corporation disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own January 2009 P N 651ES3028025G COPYRIGHT 2009 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Table of Contents A M viii intended Reader e ix Eypographical Conventions nooo Quse odo ooa e econ Eee AO IA dees ddancceusseventussesscedased dees dcanscesseevensasdestees ix Notes NOTICES and CAUTIONS ui eto esae Pieve eei ae eed ie eod ias ix Safety Instructions ars I LO E ds II Hn ecce ISI IE X Safety C aHPIOTS ua esto coded D tet te foil a Sato end ve ttt o ese fosa bab X Ge
18. Enter a list of e mail addresses so recipients can receive e mail messages regarding Switch functions Up to 8 e mail addresses can be added per Switch Do delete these addresses from the Switch click its corresponding X under the Delete heading in the Mail Receiver Address Table Click Apply to implement changes made SMTP Service The following window is used to send test messages to all mail recipients configured on the Switch thus testing the configurations set and the reliability of the SMTP server To access the following window click Administration gt SMTP Service gt SMTP Service 83 Figure 6 69 SMTP Service window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description Subject Enter the subject of the test e mail Enter the content of the test e mail Once your message is ready click Send to send this mail to all recipients configured on the Switch for SMTP 84 L2 Features VLAN QinQ Trunking IGMP Snooping MLD Snooping Spanning Tree Loopback Detection LLDP VLANs A Virtual Local Area Network VLAN is a network topology configured according to a logical scheme rather than the physical layout VLANs can be used to combine any collection of LAN segments into an autonomous user group that appears as a single LAN VLANs also logically segment the network into different broadcast domains so that packets are forwarded only between ports within the VLAN Typically a VLAN corr
19. S v Pot Y Disabled v DeleteOnTimenut Y A NE Learning Addr Lock Address Vode Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled wu OD 9 Ln f ou DB G 10 11 E EE EST O EU E en ne ee ee ERE l Figure 10 2 Port Security window Delete On Time out Delete nTime out Delete nTime out Delete nTime out Delete nTime out Delete nTime out Delete nTime out Delete nTime out Delete ln Time out Delete ln Timeout Delete nTime out Delete nTime out Delete nTime out Delete nTime out Delete n Time out Delete nTime out Delete nTime out Delete nTime out Delete nTime out Delete nTime out Delete nTime out Delete nTime out Delete nTime out Delete nTime out Delete nTime out Delete nTime out Delete nTime out Delete nTime out A consecutive group of ports may be configured starting with the selected port Admin State This pull down menu allows users to enable or disable Port Security locked MAC address table for the selected ports Max Learning Addr 0 16 The number of MAC addresses that will be in the MAC address forwarding table for the selected switch and group of ports This pull down menu allows you to select how the MAC address table locking will be implemented on the Switch
20. Time Range Show All Access Eule Entries Figure 9 8 Access Rule Display window IP To configure the Access Rule for Ethernet open the Access Profile Table and click Modify for an Ethernet entry If no entry exists only the Add button will be displayed however when an entry already exists a corresponding Modify button will also be displayed This will open the following window Profile TD l y Ferrut Ethernet l View show All Access Profile Entries Figure 9 9 Access Rule Table window Ethernet The user may display a particular Access ID entry by clicking the corresponding View button To remove a previously created rule select it and click the button To add a new Access Rule click the Add button 164 1 Permit Deny Rx Rate No Limit 0 kbps Auto Assign Ethernet replace priority VLAN Name source WAC Destination MAC Time Range Show All Access Rule Entries Figure 9 10 Access Rule Configuration window Ethernet To set the Access Rule for Ethernet adjust the following parameters and click Apply Parameters Description Profile ID This is the identifier number for this profile set Select Permit to specify that the Switch according to any additional rule forwards the
21. VLAN Egress Egress 3 Untagged Untagged Figure 7 4 Asymmetric VLANs Example In order to accomplish an Asymmetric VLAN configuration the user must do a three part configuration 1 Enable Asymmetric VLANs using the Advanced Settings window located in the Configuration folder Overlapping VLANs cannot be configured unless this function is enabled p Configure the VLAN settings The example above uses ports 1 8 to hold the devices to be shared on the network such as shared servers and shared printers Therefore this group of ports is to be included for all VLANs VLAN V2 is then configured to include ports 1 8 shared VLAN ports and the set of ports to be separated from the other subsetted VLANs ports 9 16 VLAN V3 is then configured to include ports 1 8 shared ports and the set of ports to be separated from the other subsetted VLANs 17 24 Therefore we have two VLANs who both share ports and have ports that are separated from each other and thus cannot communicate with each other Configure the PVID settings for the Switch through the GVRP function located in the VLANs folder The user is to set the shared set of ports as PVID 1 the other separated groups of ports as PVID 2 and PVID 3 UY After completing the previous configuration the user is now able to share the network resources set on the shared group of ports nominated as PVID 1 with both smaller subsets of VLANs nominated PVID 2 and PVID 3 Yet VLAN V1 and V
22. VLAN Name Allows the entry of a name for a previously configured VLAN Source IP Enter an IP Address mask for the source IP address Destination IP Enter an IP Address mask for the destination IP address Dscp 0 63 This field allows the user to enter a DSCP value in the space provided which will instruct the Switch to examine the DiffServ Code part of each packet header and use this as the or part of the criterion for forwarding The user may choose a value between 0 and 63 The CPU Access Rule may be configured on a per port basis by entering the port number of the Switch Time Range Click the check box and enter the name of the Time Range settings that has been previously configured in the Time Range window This will set specific times when this CPU access rule will be implemented on the Switch 177 To view the settings of a previously correctly configured rule click View in the Access Rule Table to view the following window Fort Time Range show All CPU Interface Filterma Kule Entries Figure 9 26 CPU Interface Filtering Entry Display window IP The following window is the CPU Interface Filtering Rule Table for Packet Content Packet 3 rtr vera Content i View show All CFU Interface Filtering Entries Figure 9 27 CPU Interface Filtering Rule Table window Packet Content To remove a previously created rule select it and click the button To add a new CPU Access Rule click the Add button
23. default local Figure 10 42 Login Method Lists Settings window The Switch contains one Method List that is set and cannot be removed yet can be modified To delete a Login Method List defined by the user click the under the Delete heading corresponding to the entry desired to be deleted To modify a Login Method List click on its hyperlinked Method List Name To configure a new Method List click the Add button Both actions will result in the same window to configure Method List Name default Ma 6 00 Method 3 Method 4 Show All Authentication Login Method List Entries Figure 10 43 Login Method List Edit window default 221 Show All Authentication Loam Method List Entries Figure 10 44 Login Method List Add window To define a Login Method List set the following parameters and click Apply Parameter Description Method List Name Enter a method list name defined by the user of up to 15 characters Method 1 2 3 4 The user may add one or a combination of up to four of the following authentication methods to this method list Enable Method Lists tacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the TACACS protocol from a remote TACACS server xtacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the XTACACS protocol from a remote XTACACS server tacacs Adding this paramete
24. iii ROE SV EM CON Ui Onda ais 65 POE WOU Outil SU ALO ME ETE D ET EE T I IT 66 CU AA 68 SR O M o dut dE E cd Dc aD D N 69 besar M 71 OOM Nb I A A A 73 ASUS PP A eade cea Me cedo uic 74 Monu Bai TI PP X 76 Dnibwalc DDSLddeeuusesesi teu Hon UA MIU LLL LM Nu I E E E E IE qu conneuration Backup Restofe sunset SE U eeu m sce estu se Taam hasten alae 71 Upload EOP ai a ll Lm 78 POP War ine amp aliouiipum m a 78 Unicast Forw ardin oec s cheatin ceasasacons cd 78 Multicast Forward urinaria oca 79 Multicast Exterme Mode statio cet dadas 8l VhiM eraut rec e nese usecsecacssuuuee chest cutee cesuacaubuschaceseceatewussuasaucasuecs 82 SMTP SOE Cle Se Ui 5 MP KT 83 EN c g et Same nee A E rer ent Dd te pre dni dM MM du E n E eee 83 LZ CA GUN OSs fesse PA 85 IV TAIN M 85 State Y LAN En stores id RAE A AS AAN AA AAN RAS etre oan M Sea es 90 EV REO MO a O dto 92 NEAN Tnk Setas sn id 94 QDO H 96 all pue M 98 DE TA Ree ANON oodd O coude tod D UE aS 99 PACF BOLSOS tail 99 IGMP SNOODING
25. 1 e 3 4 Destination Address 6 octets Source Address 6 octets EtherType GxeI00 Tag Contr Information ver moi ert VEAN TE DNZ 3 bits 1 bit 12 bits Figure 7 2 IEEE 802 1Q Tag The EtherType and VLAN ID are inserted after the MAC source address but before the original EtherType Length or Logical Link Control Because the packet is now a bit longer than it was originally the Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC must be recalculated Adding an IEEE 602 103 Tag Figure 7 3 Adding an IEEE 802 1Q Tag Tagging and Untagging Every port on an 802 1Q compliant switch can be configured as tagging or untagging Ports with tagging enabled will put the VID number priority and other VLAN information into the header of all packets that flow into and out of it If a packet has previously been tagged the port will not alter the packet thus keeping the VLAN information intact The VLAN information in the tag can then be used by other 802 1Q compliant devices on the network to make packet for warding decisions Ports with untagging enabled will strip the 802 1Q tag from all packets that flow out of those ports If the packet doesn t have an 802 1Q VLAN tag the port will alter the packet Thus all packets received by and forwarded by an untagging port will have 802 1Q VLAN information Remember that the PVID is only used internally within the Switch Untagging is used to send packets from an 802 1Q compliant network device to a non co
26. 10 100 Mbps Connection 10 100 Mbps Connection 10 100 Mbps Connection es es at End Station Clients Figure 7 11 Example of Port Trunk Group The Switch treats all ports in a trunk group as a single port Data transmitted to a specific host destination address will always be transmitted over the same port in a trunk group This allows packets in a data stream to arrive in the same order they were sent NOTE If any ports within the trunk group become disconnected packets intended for the disconnected port will be load shared among the other uplinked ports of the link aggregation group Link aggregation allows several ports to be grouped together and to act as a single link This gives a bandwidth that is a multiple of a single link s bandwidth Link aggregation is most commonly used to link a bandwidth intensive network device or devices such as a server to the backbone of a network The Switch allows the creation of up to six link aggregation groups each group consisting of 2 to 8 links ports All of the ports in the group must be members of the same VLAN and their STP status static multicast traffic control traffic segmentation and 802 1p default priority configurations must be identical Port locking port mirroring and 802 1 X must not be enabled on the trunk group Further the aggregated links must all be of the same speed and should be configured as full duplex The Master Port of the group is to be configured by the user
27. 2 s E E z Figure 7 6 802 1Q Static VLANs window Add To return to the Current 802 1Q Static VLANs Entries window click the Show All Static VLAN Entries link To change an existing 802 1Q VLAN entry click the Modify button of the corresponding entry you wish to modify A new window will appear to configure the port settings and to assign a unique name and number to the new VLAN See the table below for a description of the parameters in the new window The following fields can then be set in either the Add or Modify 802 1Q Static VLANs windows 90 Parameter Description VID Allows the entry of a VLAN ID in the Add dialog box or displays the VLAN ID of an existing VLAN in the Modify dialog box VLANs can be identified by either the VID or the VLAN name VLAN Name Allows the entry of a name for the new VLAN in the Add dialog box or for editing the VLAN name in the Modify dialog box Advertisement Use the pull down menu to Enable or Disable the Advertisement broadcast on the VLAN Port Settings Allows an individual port to be specified as member of a VLAN Tag Specifies the port as either 802 1Q tagging or 802 1Q untagged Checking the box will desig nate the port as Tagged None Allows an individual port to be specified as a non VLAN member Select this to specify the port as a static member of the VLAN Egress member ports are ports that will be transmitting traffic for the VLAN These ports can be either tagged or untagge
28. 60 DoS TCP SYN SrcPort less 1024 Prevention window Summary window 231 Monitoring CPU Utilization Port Utilization Packets Packet Errors Packet Size MAC Address Switch Log IGMP Snooping Group Browse Router Port VLAN Status MLD Snooping Group Browse MLD Snooping Router Port Static ARP Settings ARP FDB Gratuitous ARP Settings Session Table Port Access Control CPU Utilization The CPU Utilization displays the percentage of the CPU being used expressed as an integer percentage and calculated as a simple average by time interval To view the CPU Utilization window click Monitoring CPU Utilization 232 Utilization CF Five Mins Uniti Time Interval s Record Number 200 ShowHide Iw Five Secs Iw One Min Iw Five Mins Figure 11 1 CPU Utilization graph The window will automatically refresh with new updated statistics The information is described as follows Parameter Description Time Interval Select the desired setting between 7s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second Record Number Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200 The default value is 200 Show Hide Check whether to display Five Secs One Min and or Five Mins Clicking this button clears all statistics counters on this window Port Utilization The Port Utilization page displays the percentage of the total available bandwidth being used on the port
29. 7 DHCP Snooping Entries window MAC Block List This table is used to view unauthorized devices that have been blocked by IP MAC binding restrictions To find an unauthorized device that has been blocked by the IP MAC binding restrictions enter the VLAN Name and MAC Address in the appropriate fields and click Find To delete an entry click the delete button next to the entry s port To delete all the entries in the MAC Block List window click Clear All To view this window click Security gt IP MAC Port Binding gt MAC Block List VLAN Name MAC Address i Total Entries 0 Figure 10 8 MAC Blocked List window 190 SSL Secure Sockets Layer or SSL is a security feature that will provide a secure communication path between a host and client through the use of authentication digital signatures and encryption These security functions are implemented through the use of a ciphersuite which is a security string that determines the exact cryptographic parameters specific encryption algorithms and key sizes to be used for an authentication session and consists of three levels 1 Key Exchange The first part of the ciphersuite string specifies the public key algorithm to be used This switch utilizes the Rivest Shamir Adleman RSA public key algorithm and the Digital Signature Algorithm DSA specified here as the DHE DSS Diffie Hellman DHE public key algorithm This is the first authentication
30. 802 Ip 202 Ip 802 Ip 802 Ip 802 Ip 802 Ip 802 Ip 802 Ip 802 Ip Figure 8 7 Priority Settings window Ethernet Priority 152 oft olt of off of off otf oft olt otf off off off of ott olt ol off otf off of oft olt ott of of off of Configure the following Priority Setting parameters Parameter Description From To Users may select a port or group of ports to assign ToS priority settings based on the following Main Select field Select the general priority settings for the ports previously stated using the pull down menu Priority option include None Choosing this option will clear the selected ports form having CoS priority settings Port Mapping Choosing this option will assign ports to map CoS priorities to individual ports 802 1p Choosing this option will assign ports to map CoS priorities to 802 1p priorities This is the default setting for all ports MAC Base Choosing this option will assign ports to map CoS priorities to MAC addresses TOS Choosing this option will assign ports to map CoS priorities to ToS priorities DSCP Choosing this option will assign ports to map CoS priorities to DSCP priorities Click Apply to implement changes made TOS Priority Settings When using the TOS DSCP priority mechanism the packet is classified based on the TOS DSCP field in the IP header If the tag is present the packet is assigned to a programmable egress queue base
31. PortControl This allows you to control the port authorization state Select forceAuthorized to disable 802 1X and cause the port to transition to the authorized state without any authentication exchange required This means the port transmits and receives normal traffic without 802 1X based authentication of the client If forceUnauthorized is selected the port will remain in the unauthorized state ignoring all attempts by the client to authenticate The Switch cannot provide authentication services to the client through the interface If Auto is selected it will enable 802 1X and cause the port to begin in the unauthorized state allowing only EAPOL frames to be sent and received through the port The authentication process begins when the link state of the port transitions from down to up or when an EAPOL start frame is received The Switch then requests the identity of the client and begins relaying authentication messages between the client and the authentication Server The default setting is Auto TxPeriod This sets the TxPeriod of time for the authenticator PAE state machine This value determines the period of an EAP Request Identity packet transmitted to the client The default setting is 30 seconds QuietPeriod This allows you to set the number of seconds that the Switch remains in the quiet state following a failed authentication exchange with the client The default setting is 60 seconds 206 SuppTimeout This value deter
32. Refer to the following figure for an illustrated example Suppose you want to create VLAN groups 1 and 2 V1 and V2 on devices A and B Without a VLAN Trunk you must first configure VLAN groups 1 and 2 on all intermediary switches C D and E otherwise they will drop frames with unknown VLAN group tags However with VLAN Trunk enabled on a port s in each intermediary switch you only need to create VLAN groups in the end devices A and B C D and E automatically allow frames with VLAN group tags 1 and 2 VLAN groups that are unknown to those switches to pass through their VLAN trunking port s Switch C ms Switch D SwitchA Switch B V1 V2 V1 V2 This window is used to combine a number of VLAN ports together to create VLAN trunks To create Vlan Trunk Port settings on the Switch enter the ports to be configured change the state to Enabled and click Apply the new settings will appear in the Vlan Trunk Port Settings Table below To view this window click L2 Features gt VLAN gt VLAN Trunk Settings 94 Ports e g 1 5 7 12 Wlember Ports Figure 7 9 VLAN Trunk Port Settings window 95 QinQ This function allows the user to enable or disable the QinQ function QinQ is designed for service providers to carry traffic from multiple users across a network QinQ is used to maintain customer specific VLAN and Layer 2 protocol configurations even when the same VLAN ID is being us
33. Severity This drop down menu allows you to select the level of messages that will be sent The options are Warning Informational and All Facility some of the operating system daemons and processes have been assigned Facility values Processes and daemons that have not been explicitly assigned a Facility may use any of the local use facilities or they may use the user level Facility Those Facilities that have been designated are shown in the following Bold font indicates the facility values that the Switch is currently employing Numerical Facility Code 45 kernel messages user level messages mail system system daemons security authorization messages messages generated internally by syslog line printer subsystem network news subsystem UUCP subsystem clock daemon security authorization messages FTP daemon NTP subsystem log audit log alert clock daemon local use 0 local0 local use 1 local1 local use 2 local2 local use 3 local3 local use 4 local4 local use 5 local5 local use 6 local6 local use 7 local7 CON OF WN OQ UDP Port 514 or 6000 65535 1 103 25 severity Warming he Facility cLocall UDP Port 514 or 6000 65535 514 status Disabled v Chow All System Los Servers Figure 6 18 System Log Host Add Edit window To set the System L
34. and all configuration options including the VLAN configuration that can be applied to the Master Port are applied to the entire link aggregation group Load balancing is automatically applied to the ports in the aggregated group and a link failure within the group causes the network traffic to be directed to the remaining links in the group The Spanning Tree Protocol will treat a link aggregation group as a single link on the switch level On the port level the STP will use the port parameters of the Master Port in the calculation of port cost and in determining the state of the link aggregation group If two redundant link aggregation groups are configured on the Switch STP will block one entire group in the same way STP will block a single port that has a redundant link 98 Link Aggregation To configure port trunking click L2 Features gt Trunking gt Link Aggregation to bring up the following window Add New Link Aggregation Group Group ID Type state Modify Figure 7 12 Link Aggregation window To configure port trunk groups click the Add button to add a new trunk group and use the Port Trunking Configuration menu see example below to set up trunk groups To modify a port trunk group click the hyperlinked group number corresponding to the entry you wish to alter To delete a port trunk group click the corresponding 9 under the Delete heading in the Link Aggregation Group Entries table at the bottom of the Link Aggr
35. and never operate the product in a wet environment If the system gets wet see the appropriate section in your troubleshooting guide or contact your trained service provider e Do not push any objects into the openings of your system Doing so can cause fire or electric shock by shorting out interior components e Use the product only with approved equipment e Allow the product to cool before removing covers or touching internal components e Operate the product only from the type of external power source indicated on the electrical ratings label If you are not sure of the type of power source required consult your service provider or local power company e To help avoid damaging your system be sure the voltage on the power supply is set to match the power available at your location 115 volts V 60 hertz Hz in most of North and South America and some Far Eastern countries such as South Korea and Taiwan 100 V 50 Hz in eastern Japan and 100 V 60 Hz in western Japan 230 V 50 Hz in most of Europe the Middle East and the Far East e Also be sure that attached devices are electrically rated to operate with the power available in your location e Use only approved power cable s If you have not been provided with a power cable for your system or for any AC powered option intended for your system purchase a power cable that is approved for use in your country The power cable must be rated for the product and for the voltage
36. each logical Port being independently controlled from the point of view of EAPOL exchanges and authorization state The Switch learns each attached devices individual MAC addresses and effectively creates a logical Port that the attached device can then use to communicate with the LAN via the Switch y NOTE To enable Host based 802 1X select the MAC based option in the Switch 802 1X field in the Device Information window RADIUS Attributes Assignment To assign Ingress Egress bandwidth by RADIUS server the proper parameters should be configured on the RADIUS Server The tables below show the parameters for bandwidth and default priority The parameters of the Vendor Specific attribute are Vendor Specific attribute Description Value Usage Vendor ID Defines the vendor 171 DLINK Vendor Type The definition of this 2 for ingress bandwidth Required attribute 3 for egress bandwidth 202 Attribute Specific field Used to assign the Unit Kbits bandwidth of the port Required If the user has configured the bandwidth attribute of the RADIUS server for example ingress bandwidth 1000Kbps and the 802 1 X authentication is successful the device will assign the correct bandwidth according to the RADIUS server to the port However if the user does not configure the bandwidth attribute but authenticates successfully the device will not assign bandwidth to the port When the bandwidth attribute is configured on
37. lt ipaddr gt MAC lt macaddr gt Password change activity Password was changed by Informational Username username 276 IP lt ipaddr gt MAC lt macaddr gt Safeguard Engine enters NORMAL mode i cus Safeguard Engine enters sega Engine is in exhausted mode EXHAUSTED mode Warning Packet Storm Port lt portNum gt Broadcast storm E Broadcast strom occurrence Warning is occurring Broadcast storm cleared A O ON Informational has cleared O uiia storm occurrence ren POr MU ARESTOS Warning occurring Multicast storm cleared POTES POTEN UMI MUIGAS SLON Informational has cleared Port shutdown due to a packet storm PON SPONA SY Warning shutdown due to a packet storm IP Mac port Binding Unathenticated IP MAC address Unauthentiucated IP address discarded and discarded by ip mac port Warning by IP mac port binding binding IP lt ipaddr gt MAC lt macaddr gt Port lt portNum gt Gratuitous ARP Conflict IP was detected with this device IP lt ipaddr gt MAC lt macaddr gt Port lt portNum gt Interface lt interface gt Safeguard Engine Safeguard Engine is in normal mode Informational Conflict IP was detected with this device Informational Radius server r lt server_ip gt assigned VID VLAN ID to Port lt portNum gt Account lt user_account gt Radius server assigned VID to port Informational Radius server r lt server_ip gt assigned ingress bandwith lt bandwidth_value gt Kbits to
38. media speed of the interface value 1 200000000 Selecting this parameter with a value in the range of 1 to 200000000 will set the quickest route when a loop occurs A lower Internal cost represents a quicker transmission Priority Enter a value between 0 and 240 to set the priority for the port interface A higher priority will designate the interface to forward packets first A lower number denotes a higher priority Click Apply to implement changes made 129 Loopback Detection Settings The Loopback Detection function is used to detect the Loopback Detection Global Settings 2 2 OOOO O loop created by a specific port This feature is used to Miguel Disabled v temporarily shutdown a port on the Switch when a CTP IE neti Ee o Configuration Testing Protocol packet has been looped RENE EP RTT back to the switch When the Switch detects CTP packets are received from a port it signifies a loop on the network The Switch will automatically block the port and send an alert to the administrator The Loopback Detection port will restart change to discarding state when the Loopback Detection Recover Time times out The Loopback Detection function can be implemented on a range of ports at a time The user may enable or disable this function using the pull down menu To view this window click L2 Features Loopback Detection Settings a Loopdetect Loop State Status Disable Normal Disable
39. packets that match the access profile added see below Select Deny to specify that packets that match the access profile are not forwarded by the Switch and will be filtered Rx Rate No Limit 0 Enter an Rx Rate in kbps Access ID 1 65535 Type in a unique identifier number for this access This value can be set from 1 65535 Auto Assign Checking this field will instruct the Switch to automatically assign an Access ID for the rule being created Selected profile based on Ethernet MAC Address IP address or Packet Content Mask E Ethernet instructs the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header IP instructs the Switch to examine the IP address in each frame s header Packet Content Mask instructs the Switch to examine the packet header Priority 0 7 This parameter is specified if you want to re write the 802 1p default priority previously set in the Switch which is used to determine the CoS queue to which packets are forwarded to Once this field is specified packets accepted by the Switch that match this priority are forwarded to the CoS queue specified previously by the user When replace priority is selected the Switch will rewrite the 802 1p default priority of a packet to the value entered into the priority field This value will meet the criteria specified before being forwarded on to a specified CoS queue Otherwise a packet will have its incoming 802 1p user priority re written to its original value be
40. username IP lt ipaddr gt MAC lt macaddr gt Configuration saved to flash by console Configuration saved to flash by Informational console Username lt username gt System log saved to flash System log saved to flash Informational Username username IP lt ipaddr gt MAC lt macaddr gt system log saved to flash by console System log saved to flash by Informational console Username lt username gt Configuration and log saved to flash Configuration and log saved to Informational flash Username username IP lt ipaddr gt MAC lt macaddr gt Configuration and log saved to flash by Configuration and log saved to Informational console flash by console Username lt username gt Firmware upgraded successfully Firmware upgraded successfully Informational Username username IP lt ipaddr gt Firmware upgraded by console Firmware upgraded by console Informational successfully successfully Username lt username gt Firmware upgrade was unsuccessful Firmware upgrade was unsuccessful Username username IP lt ipaddr gt Firmware upgrade by console was Firmware upgrade by console was Warning unsuccessful unsuccessful Username lt username gt Configuration successfully downloaded Configuration successfully Informational downloaded Username username IP lt ipaddr gt Configuration successfully downloaded by Configuration successfully Information
41. was unsuccessful Username lt username gt Successful login through Console Username lt username gt Successful login through Web Username username IP lt ipaddr gt Login failed through Web Username username IP lt ipaddr gt Warning Informational Informational Informational Port link up Port portNum link up lt link Informational state Port portNum link down Informational Informational Login failed through Console Login failed through Console Warning Username lt username gt Logout through Console Logout through Console Informational Username lt username gt Console session timed out Console session timed out Informational Username lt username gt Informational Logout through Web Logout through Web Username Informational username IP lt ipaddr gt Successful login through Web SSL Successful login through Web Informational SSL Username username IP lt ipaddr gt Login failed through Web SSL Login failed through Web SSL Username username IP lt ipaddr gt Logout through Web SSL Logout through Web SSL Informational Username username IP lt ipaddr gt Web SSL session timed out Web SSL session timed out Informational Username username IP lt ipaddr gt Successful login through Telnet Successful login through Telnet Informational Username username IP lt ipaddr gt Login f
42. 00 01 5F 3 LDvnamic Add 1 default DO 00 1 00 00 01 5 Dynamic Add 1 default 00 00 81 94 F2 E4 4 Dynamic Add 1 default DO 00 E2 2F 44 EC E Dinamic Add 1 default D0 01 06 30 00 00 5 Dynamic Add 1 default Q0 01 6C CE 62 E0 5 Dynamic Add 1 default Q0 01 5C E4 13 11 5 Dynamic Add 1 default Q0 02 A5 FD 66 97 5 Dynamic Add l default 00 03 09 18 10 01 5 Dynamic Add 1 default O0 Q5 1B 58 DF 71 j Dynamic Add 1 default DO 03 Es D00 09 E9 E LDvnamic Add 1 default 00 04 00 00 00 00 5 Dynamic Add 1 default 00 04 38 PP Es E0 5 Dinamic Add 1 default O0 04 96 1D 00 71 5 Dynamic Add 1 default Ou 05 5D 04 D6 44 5 Dynarnic Add 1 default o0 05 5D 08 08 UF 3 LDvnamic Add 1 default 00 05 5D 6 4 44 20 5 Dynamic Add 1 default 00 05 5D 6B C 7 28 4 Dynamic Add Total Entries 333 Figure 11 15 MAC Address window 247 The following fields can be viewed or set Parameter Description MAC Address Enter a MAC address by which to browse the forwarding table Select the port by using the corresponding pull down menu Allows the user to move to a sector of the database corresponding to a user defined port VLAN or MAC address The VLAN ID of the VLAN of which the MAC address above corresponds MAC Address The MAC address entered into the address table The port to which the MAC address corresponds Describes the method which the Switch discovered the MAC address The possible entries are Dynamic Self DeleteOnReset and Permanent Click
43. 000000 Figure 2 3 Installing Switch in a rack Power on AC Power Plug one end of the AC power cord into the power connector of the Switch and the other end into the local power source outlet After the Switch is powered on the LED indicators will momentarily blink This blinking of the LED indicators represents a reset of the system Power Failure For AC power supply units as a precaution in the event of a power failure unplug the Switch When power has resumed plug the Switch back in CAUTION Installing systems in a rack without the front and side stabilizers installed could cause the rack to tip over potentially resulting in bodily injury under certain circumstances Therefore always install the stabilizers before installing components in the rack After installing components in a rack do not pull more than one component out of the rack on its slide assemblies at one time The weight of more than one extended component could cause the rack to tip over and may result in injury 11 Connecting the Switch Switch to End Node Switch to Hub or Switch Connecting to Network Backbone or Server Es NOTE All 10 100 1000Mbps NWay Ethernet ports can support both MDI ls Il and MDI X connections Switch to End Node End nodes include PCs outfitted with a 10 100 or 1000 Mbps RJ 45 Ethernet Fast Ethernet Network Interface Card NIC and most routers An end node can be connected to the Switch via a t
44. 16711450 sec Querier State Disabled Quener Router Behavior Non Querier veim OOOO OSO chow All MLD Snooping Entries Figure 7 31 MLD Snooping Settings Edit window The following parameters may be viewed or modified Parameter Description VLAN ID This is the VLAN ID that along with the VLAN Name identifies the VLAN for which to modify the MLD Snooping Settings VLAN Name This is the VLAN Name that along with the VLAN ID identifies the VLAN for which to modify the MLD Snooping Settings Query Interval 1 65535 sec The Query Interval field is used to set the time in seconds between transmitting MLD queries Entries between 7 and 65535 seconds are allowed Default 125 Max Response Time 1 25 This determines the maximum amount of time in seconds allowed to wait for a sec response for MLD port listeners The Max Response Time field allows an entry between 7 and 25 seconds Default 70 Robustness Variable 1 255 Provides fine tuning to allow for expected packet loss on a subnet The user may choose a value between 7 and 255 with a default setting of 2 If a subnet is expected to be lossy the user may wish to increase this interval Last Listener Query Interval T
45. 195 SSH User AUN MICA OMA Mv C ase 197 802 b Qu 198 BOD PME EMCEE ALOR SE ERUIT UN ea 205 EER EE E r AN deco LE M M I UM Lc io 208 SOZ NODI ES EI o E o UTE UT 209 CODIDUTE s02 1X Giest oou tur estates entes e ietess UP Edo teach cent tete t tala ceste t stent Eolo Rat DR NE cEUS 209 Initializine Ports TOt Port Based S02 IA sette a a a a desint 210 Initializine Ports tor Host Based 502 DX oie estt deu iot A AA 211 Reauthenticate Ports for Port Based 802 LX ui A dE d vp EPOR UE pP Ai A 212 Reauthenticate Port s for Host based 802 1 Xo ccc cccseccccssecccesseccceeccccuseccccuseccccueccseuecsceusecsseecsseuecsseeeecsseuecssseneceseueeseees 213 RADIUS SO roD 213 juicio m 214 ACCESS Authentication CODIUOL i eee ioi ene sao aa Coto pav bad uua Ue zou eoa ue ea nass ue eve bua vau eosa e E NN eaae deu Pe VE ENDURO 215 Authentication Policy and Parameter Sete Saisie 1o CE Quen Seed LUE QU vERI id 216 Application AUtBenticattoti S CULL SS uacua A ata dada a o dtc fout ita ai 216 Authentication SCV er OO Deseos OA 0 908 T 24 45 00 40 0 0 900 0 0 02 0 90 09 060 0065 217 Authentication Server Fl OSE oii Se eae aaa tata ae ae arenes ied te Sui teeta ea od ee im E dan
46. 3052 25 5W DES 3028G 15 6W DES 3028P 217W DES 3052P 395W DC Fans DES 3028 DES 3052 DES 3028G None DES 3028P one 8 5cm fan and one 17cm fan DES 3052P one 5cm fan one 8 3cm fan and one 17cm fan Operating Temperature 0 40 C Storage Temperature 40 70 C Humidity 5 95 non condensing DES 3028 DES 3028G 441 W x 207 D x 44 H mm DES 3028P 3052 3052P 441 W x 309 D x 44 H mm DES 3028 2 36kg 5 20lbs DES 3028G 2 42kg 5 33lbs DES 3028P 4 5kg 9 9lbs DES 3052 3 85kg 8 48lbs DES 3052P 5 70kg 12 56lbs CE Class A FCC Class A C Tick VCCI Safety CB Report UL Performance Transmission Method Store and forward Packet Buffer 512 KB per device Packet Filtering 14 881 pps 10M port Forwarding Rate 148 810 pps 100M port 1 488 100 pps 1Gbps port MAC Address Learning Automatic update Supports 8K MAC address Priority Queues 4 Priority Queues per port Forwarding Table Age Max age 10 1000000 seconds Default 300 Time 263 PoE Features DES 3028P Random 12 ports PoE Capable Ports DES 3052P Random 24 ports Max 15 4W per port DES 3028P Per port gt 15 4W Default Output capacity for DES 3028P 185W DES 3052P Per port gt 15 4W Default Output capacity for DES 3052P gt 370W Power feeding for PoE Supplies power to PD device up to 15 4W per port meeting IEEE802 3af standards and more sufficiently is able to provide power to PD dev
47. 40 cbr iie 42 A iisdem doo itc de rteieccu Leodii o iot ocu dois 44 System Log dirum m 45 Log SENO C M 47 DIN uer niii et M M 48 MITE SCCM TP sass 48 Time Zone and DS I scchscsios e 49 MAC Notification AAA e po abe a vaUR Geb beabe E eee VEU Ce SO oe Leda 51 AN A wussessacvesuasesusncnausceucenesecsuandecesuasesusnchaneceuensesessebeusabeesueseusanssustesnassesese 52 Multiple nace Services unida A NA E 53 Firmware Ire WEIN ccc pcc 53 conte Hiri ud P uc na p oe naan cates 53 Pino OSE c 54 DS ANC OU AIC Ulp e 54 AAA 57 SNMP SEUS MH 57 A II A anata Smee 58 SNME BE M Ere TL 58 SNMP Ses Pape st Dites oops ome Tees A SU Re arc Uc oc LM SEDE a I er ee ec oo DU D S ECOL P nee 60 SNMP eco od Bre 0 RR T o e o rU NH 61 SINMP Coirnmuntity Tables Contre uratiOl stent ules ne duode Ai 62 SB uiae I H 63 SNMERE EnS me p TT 64 POE SV ci Mun 9 65
48. 60 30 3n 2 S600 no 20 both auto 30 60 30 30 2 3600 fo EA both auto 3n on 30 3n d S600 no EN both auto 30 e 30 30 d S600 fo 2a both auto 30 Tu 30 30 B 3600 fo 24 both auto 30 60 3 30 2 S600 fo ET both auto 30 Tu 3 30 S600 fo 26 both auto 30 60 30 30 n S600 fo ex both auto 30 Tu 3 30 3600 fo 26 both auto 30 60 30 30 2 S600 fo Figure 10 23 802 1X Authenticator Settings window To configure the settings by port click on its corresponding Ports link which will display the following table to configure 205 AdmDir Control a ot kn Supp Timeout 4 a rer Limeout t e 1 i k r AuthFeriod 3600 Auth Disabled how Authenticators setting Figure 10 24 802 1X Authenticator Settings window Modify En m This window allows users to set the following features Parameter Description From To Enter the port or ports to be set AdmDir Sets the administrative controlled direction to either n or Both If In is selected control is only exerted over incoming traffic through the port you selected in the first field lf Both are selected control is exerted over both incoming and outgoing traffic through the controlled port selected in the first field
49. 9 00 alle ore 19 00 con orario continuato Telefono 199400057 http www dlink it support Technical Support Tech Support for customers within the Netherlands 0900 501 2007 www dlink nl 0 15ppm anytime Tech Support for customers within Belgium 070 66 06 40 www dlink be 0 175ppm peak 0 0875ppm off peak Tech Support for customers within Luxemburg 32 70 66 06 40 www dlink be Pomoc techniczna Telefoniczna pomoc techniczna firmy D Link 0 801 022 021 Pomoc techniczna firmy D Link Swiadczona przez Internet URL http www dlink pl e mail serwis dlink pl Technicka podpora Web http www dlink cz suppport E mail support dlink cz Telefon 225 281 553 Telefonicka podpora je v provozu PO PA od 09 00 do 17 00 Land Line 1 78 CZK min Mobile 5 40 CZK min Technikai Tamogatas Tel 06 1 461 3001 Fax 06 1 461 3004 Land Line 14 99 HUG min Mobile 49 99 HUF min email support dlink hu URL http www dlink hu Teknisk Support D Link Teknisk telefon Support 820 00 755 Hverdager 08 00 20 00 D Link Teknisk Support over Internett http www dlink no Teknisk Support D Link teknisk support over telefonen TIf 7026 9040 Abningstider kl 08 00 20 00 D Link teknisk support pa Internettet http www dlink dk Teknista tukea asiakkaille Suomessa Arkisin klo 9 21 numerosta 06001 5557 Internetin kautta http www dlink fi Teknisk Support D Link Teknisk Support via
50. Address Resolution 65535 Protocol ARP entry can remain in the Switch s ARP table without being accessed before it is dropped from the table The value may be set in the range of 0 to 65535 minutes with a default setting of 20 minutes Password Encryption Use this pull down menu to Enable or Disable Password Encryption on the Switch Password encryption allows the user to encrypt a password for additional security Select enable to change the password into encrypted form When password encryption is disabled the user can specify that the password be in plain text form or in encrypted form If the password has been converted to encrypted form the password will stay in encrypted form and cannot be reverted back to plaintext form DoS Attack Prevention Use this pull down menu to Enable or Disable DoS Attack Prevention Trap Log on the Switch Trap Log Click Apply to implement changes made IP Address The IP address may initially be set using the console interface prior to connecting to it through the Ethernet If the Switch IP address has not yet been changed read the introduction of the DES 3028 28P 28G 52 52P CLI Manual or return to Section 4 of this manual for more information To change IP settings using the web manager click Administration gt IP Address the following window will be displayed To configure the Switch s IP address Get IP From Manual IP Address 10 73 21 11 subnet IV ask 255000 0 0 0
51. Algorithm trunk group is defined by this definition Choose MAC Source MAC Destination MAC Src amp Dest See the Link Aggregation section of this manual Switch 802 1X MAC Address can be enabled by port or by the Switch s 802 1X function the default is Disabled This field must be enabled to view and configure certain windows for 802 1X More information regarding 802 1X its functions and implementation can be found later in this manual under Monitoring gt Port Access Control Port Based 802 1X specifies that ports configured for 802 1X are initialized based on the port number only and are subject to any authorization parameters configured MAC based 802 1X specifies Host based authentication with which the ports configured for 802 1X are initialized based on the MAC address of the computer being authenticated 27 JE s y NOTE If you want to configure Host based 802 1X please select MAC based 802 1X instead Auth Protocol The 802 1X authentication protocol on the Switch is set to RADIUS Eap and cannot be altered Syslog Status Syslog Status Enables or disables Enables or disables Syslog State default is Disabled State default is Enables or disables Syslog State default is Disable Port Security Trap Log Toggle this setting to enable or disable the port security trap log feature The default is Disabled ARP Aging Time 0 The user may globally set the maximum amount of time in minutes an
52. DHCP request packets from Client to Server To enable and configure DHCP Local Relay Global Settings on the Switch click Administration gt DHCP BOOTP Relay gt DHCP Local Relay Settings 38 DHCP BOOTP Local Relay Operation State VLAN Name UOO ma DHCP BOOTP Local Relay VID LIST Figure 6 10 DHCP Local Relay Settings window 39 The following parameters may be configured or viewed Parameter Description DHCP BOOTP Local Used to Enable or Disable the DHCP BOOTP Local Relay Operation State Relay Operation State VLAN Name This is the VLAN Name that identifies the VLAN the user wishes to apply the DHCP BOOTP Local Relay Operation VID List This is the VLAN ID that identifies the VLAN list the user wishes to apply the DHCP BOOTP Local Relay Operation Enable or Disable the DHCP BOOTP Local Relay Settings state Click Apply to implement changes made User Accounts Use the User Account Management window to control user privileges To view existing User Accounts open the Administration folder and click on the User Accounts link This will open the User Account Management window as shown below UserName AcesRig e RG Admin _Modify Figure 6 11 User Accounts window To add a new user click on the Add button UserName CIEN 0 0 Confirm New Password
53. Informational Port lt portNum gt Account lt user_account gt Radius server assigned ingress bandwith Kbits to port Radius server r lt server_ip gt Radius server assigned ingress bandwith assigned ingress bandwith no limit no limit to port to Port lt portNum gt Account user account Informational Radius server lt server_ip gt assigned egress bandwidth bandwidth value Kbits to Port Informational lt portNum gt Account lt user_account gt Radius server assigned egress bandwidth Kbits to port Radius server lt server_ip gt Radius server assigned egress bandwith assigned egress bandwith no limit no limit to Port to Port lt portNum gt Account user account Informational Radius serverr lt server_ip gt Radius server assigned 802 1p default assigned 802 1p default priority priority to Port lt portNum gt to Port lt portNum gt Informational Account user account ZI 802 1x Authentication failure 802 1x Authentication failure for the radius server 802 1x Authentication failure for the 802 1X client session timeout 802 1x Authentication success risingAlarm 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 0 1 fallingAlarm 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 0 2 LidpRemTablesChange 1 0 8802 1 1 2 0 0 1 coldStart 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 1 warmStart 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 2 authenticationFailure 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 5 linkDown 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 3 802 1x Authentication failure from Username lt user_ac
54. MAC Port Binding gt IMP Entry Settings B 9 All Ports Total Entries O Figure 10 6 IMP Entry Settings window The following fields can be set or modified Parameter Description IP Address Enter the IP address to bind to the MAC address set below MAC Address Enter the MAC address to bind to the IP Address set above Specify the switch ports for which to configure this IP MAC binding entry IP Address MAC Address Click the All check box to configure this entry for all ports on the Switch The user may set the IP MAC Binding Mode here by using the pull down menu The choices are ARP Choosing this selection will set a normal IP Mac Binding entry for the IP address and MAC address entered If the system is in ARP mode the arp mode will be effective Click Add for implement changes click Find to search for an entry click View All for the table to display all entries and click Delete to remove an entry 189 DHCP Snooping Entries This table is used to view dynamic entries on specific ports To view particular port settings enter the port number and click Find To view all entries click View All and to delete an entry click Clear To view this window click Security IP MAC Port Binding DHCP Snooping Entries Ports e g 1 5 7 12 if Total Entries 0 IP Address MAC Address Lease Time secs Figure 10
55. Normal Disable Normal Disable Normal Disable Normal Disable Normal Disable Normal Disable Normal Disable Normal Disable Normal Disable Normal Disable Normal Disable Normal Disable Normal Disable Normal Disable Hermal Disable Normal Disable Normal Disable Normal Disable Normal Disable Normal Disable Normal Disable Normal Disable Hermal Disable Normal Disable Normal Disable Normal Disable Hermal 1 2 3 4 5 z 7 5 5 Figure 7 46 Loopback Detection Settings window Parameter Description Loopdetect Status Use the drop down menu to enable or disable loopback detection The default is Disabled Mode Displays the mode Port Based for the Loopback detection global settings 130 Interval 1 32767 Set a Loopdetect Interval between 7 and 32767 seconds The default is 10 seconds Recover Time Time allowed in seconds for recovery when a Loopback is detected The Loopdetect 0 or 60 1000000 Recover Time can be set at O seconds or 60 to 1000000 seconds Entering O will disable the Loopdetect Recover Time The default is 60 seconds Use the drop down menu to select a beginning port number Use the drop down menu to select an ending port number State Use the drop down menu to toggle between Enabled and Disabled Click Apply to implement changes made LLDP The Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP allows stations attached to a LAN to advertise to other stations attached to the same LAN segment the connecti
56. Password Recovery Mode The switch is currently in Password Recovery Mode gt 3 In the Password Recovery Mode only the following commands can be used Command Parameters reset config The reset config command resets the whole configuration will be back to the default value reboot The reboot command exits the Reset Password Recovery Mode and restarts the switch A confirmation message will be displayed to allow the user to save the current settings reset account The reset account command deletes all the previously created 282 Command Parameters reset password The reset password command resets the password of the specified lt username gt user If a username is not specified the password of all users will be reset show account The show account command displays all previously created accounts 283 Appendix E Glossary 1000BASE SX A short laser wavelength on multimode fiber optic cable for a maximum length of 2000 meters 1000BASE LX A long wavelength for a long haul fiber optic cable for a maximum length of 10 kilometers 100BASE FX 100Mbps Ethernet implementation over fiber 100BASE TX 100Mbps Ethernet implementation over Category 5 and Type 1 Twisted Pair cabling 10BASE T The IEEE 802 3 specification for Ethernet over Unshielded Twisted Pair UTP cabling aging The automatic removal of dynamic entries from the Switch Database which have timed out and are no longer valid ATM Asynchronous T
57. SNMP community members using the community string created can read from and write to the contents of the MIBs on the Switch To implement the new settings click Apply To delete an entry from the SNMP Community Table click the corresponding under the Delete heading SNMP Host Table Use the SNMP Host Table window to set up SNMP trap recipients To view this window click Administration gt SNMP Manager gt SNMP Host Table This will open the SNMP Host Table window as shown to the right To delete an existing SNMP Host Table entry click the corresponding X under the Delete heading To display the current settings for an existing SNMP Host Table entry click the blue link for the entry under the Host IP Address heading To add a new entry to the Switch s SNMP Host Table click the Add button in the upper left hand corner of the window This will open the SNMP Host Table Configuration window as shown to the right Total Entries 0 Note It is allowed insert 10 entries mto the table only Host IP Address SNMP Version ommani IS User Name Figure 6 40 SNMP Host Table window SNMP Host Table Configuration Host IP Address 0 0 0 0 SNMP Version M1 Community String SNMPv3 User Name chow AL SNMP Host Table Entries Figure 6 41 SNMP Host Table Configuration window 63 The following parameters can set Parameter Description Host IP Address Type the IP address of the remote management station tha
58. Settings SNTP Settings MAC Notification Settings TFTP Services Multiple Image Services Ping Test Safeguard Engine SNMP Manager PoE System Single IP Settings Forwarding amp Filtering and SMTP Service Layer 2 Features Contains windows concerning Layer 2 features of the Switch including VLAN QinQ Trunking IGMP Snooping MLD Snooping Spanning Tree Loopback Detection and LLDP CoS Contains windows concerning Port Bandwidth 802 1P Default Priority 802 1P User Priority CoS Scheduling Mechanism CoS Output Scheduling Priority Settings TOS Priority Settings DSCP Priority Settings Port Mapping Priority Settings and MAC Priority ACL Contains the windows for Time Range Access Profile Table and CPU Interface Filtering Security Contains windows for Traffic Control Port Security Port Lock Entries IP MAC Port Binging SSL SSH 802 1X Trusted Host Access Authentication Control Traffic Segmentation and DoS Attack Prevention Monitoring Contains windows for including CPU Utilization Port Utilization Packets Packet Errors Packet Size MAC Address Switch Log IGMP Snooping Group Browse Router Port VLAN Status MLD Snooping Group Browse MLD Snooping Router Port Static ARP Settings ARP FDB Gratuitous ARP Settings Session Table and Port Access Control Switch Maintenance Contains information regarding Reset Reboot System Save Changes and Logout Accounts window before connecting the Switch to the
59. Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP globally on the Switch TX Hold Count 1 10 Used to set the maximum number of Hello packets transmitted per interval The count can be specified from 7 to 70 The default is 6 Forwarding BPDU This field can be Enabled or Disabled When Enabled it allows the forwarding of STP BPDU packets from other network devices The default is Enabled Loopback Detection This feature is used to temporarily block STP on the Switch when a BPDU packet has been looped back to the switch When the Switch detects its own BPDU packet coming back it signifies a loop on the network STP will automatically be blocked and an alert will be sent to the administrator The LBD STP port will restart change to discarding state when the Loopback Detection Recover Time times out The user may enable or disable this function using the pull down menu LBD Recover Time This field will set the time the STP port will wait before recovering the STP state set 0 0 Disable will denote that the LBD will never time out or restart until the administrator personally changes it The user may also set a time between 60 and 1000000 seconds The default is 60 seconds Click Apply to implement changes made NOTE The Hello Time cannot be longer than the Max Age Otherwise a configuration error will occur Observe the following formulas when setting the above parameters Max Age lt 2 x Forward Delay 1 second Max Age 2 2 x Hello Time 1
60. Speed 1000Mbps connected port mode for SFP Green Amber When there is a secure ports Solid Amber 100Mbps connection or link at any of the ports When there is reception or transmission i e Activity e AET Act of data occurring at the ports Light off Front Panel Description DES 3028 DES 3028P e Twenty four 10 100Mbps BASE T ports e Two Combo 1000BASE T SFP ports located to the right e Two 1000BASE T ports located to the right e One female DCE RS 232 DB 9 console port e LEDs for Power Console PoE Link Act Speed for each port D Link Managed Switch H HoB B8 m au WoN NHoNo S DES 3028 D Link Managed Switch Pzwc Link z Saccr a mo ph E Da Sg 32 10V FF ot e 7 7 itty 2 43 47 Comoe pee LY a a DES 3028P 5 GE Pot CS 1000M 10 100M gt 25 26 27 28 GF Pore MM si ink Se Act D Link a Act c mbo 1 M Combo2 mm E Iss Combo 25 x Combo2e 26 n Figure 1 5 Front Panel of the DES 3028 DES 3028P DES 3052P DES 3052 e Forty eight 10 100Mbps BASE T ports e Two Combo 1000BASE T SFP ports located to the right e Two 1000BASE T ports located to the right e One female DCE RS 232 DB 9 console port e LEDs for Power Console PoE Link Act Speed for each port
61. Successful login through Telnet Informational authenticated by AAA local method from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA local method Username lt username gt Login failed through Telnet authenticated Login failed through Telnet from by AAA local method lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA local method Username lt username gt 271 Successful login through SSH Successful login through SSH from Informational authenticated by AAA local method lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA local method Username lt username gt Login failed through SSH authenticated by Login failed through SSH from Warning AAA local method lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA local method Username lt username gt Successful login through Console Successful login through Console Informational authenticated by AAA none method authenticated by AAA none method Username lt username gt Successful login through Web Successful login through Web from Informational authenticated by AAA none method lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA none method Username lt username gt Successful login through Web SSL Successful login through Web Informational authenticated by AAA none method SSL from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA none method Username lt username gt Successful login through Telnet Successful login through Telnet Informational authenticated by AAA none method from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA none method
62. The Spanning Tree Protocol STP operates on two levels 1 On the switch level the settings are globally implemented 2 Onthe port level the settings are implemented on a per user defined group of ports basis STP LoopBack Prevention When connected to other switches STP is an important configuration in consistency for delivering packets to ports and can greatly improve the throughput of your switch Yet even this function can malfunction with the emergence of STP BPDU packets that occasionally loopback to the Switch such as BPDU packets looped back from an unmanaged switch connected to the DES 3028P To maintain the consistency of the throughput the DES 3028P now implements the STP LoopBack prevention function When the STP LoopBack Detection function is enabled the Switch will be protected against a loop occurring between switches Once a BPDU packet returns to the Switch this function will detect that there is an anomaly occurring and will place the receiving port in an error disabled state Consequentially a message will be placed in the Switch s Syslog and will be defined there as BPDU Loop Back on Port Setting the LoopBack Timer The LoopBack timer plays a key role in the next step the switch will take to resolve this problem Choosing a non zero value on the timer will enable the Auto Recovery Mechanism When the timer expires the Switch will again look for its returning BPDU packet on the same port If no returning pac
63. To create a new rule set for an access profile click the Add button A new window is displayed To remove a previously created rule click the corresponding button The following window is used for the CPU IP Rule configuration 176 VLAN Name source IP Destination IP DSCP 0 63 Porthst Time Range show All CPU Interface Filtering Eule Entries Figure 9 25 CPU Interface Filtering Rule Configuration window IP Configure the following Access Rule Configuration settings for IP Parameter Description Profile ID This is the identifier number for this profile set Select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the Switch according to any additional rule added see below Select Deny to specify that packets that do not match the access profile are not forwarded by the Switch and will be filtered Type in a unique identifier number for this access and priority This value can be set from 7 to 5 Selected profile based on Ethernet MAC Address P address or Packet Content Ethernet instructs the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header IP instructs the Switch to examine the IP address in each frame s header Packet Content Mask instructs the Switch to examine the packet header
64. To view the port utilization click Monitoring gt Port Utilization 233 Poeti wj Utilization Port Port 1 100 Utilization om 910 T 143 36 Unite Time Interval 15 Record Mumber 200 show Hide if Litilizatian Figure 11 2 Port Utilization window The user may use the real time graphic of the Switch at the top of the web page to view utilization statistics per port by clicking on a port Click Apply to implement changes made The following field can be set Parameter Description Time Interval Select the desired setting between 7s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second Record Number Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200 The default value is 200 Show Hide Check whether to display Utilization Clicking this button clears all statistics counters on this window Packets The Web Manager allows various packet statistics to be viewed as either a line graph or a table Six windows are offered 234 Received RX The following graph displays packets received by the Switch To select a port to view these statistics for use the Port pull down menu The user may also use the real time graphic of the Switch at the top of the web page by simply clicking on a port To view this window click Monitoring gt Packets gt Received RX Poni v Uu pase Rx Packets Analysis Port 1 1000 900 aut roo 600 500 400 200 100 Unit
65. Username lt username gt Successful login through SSH Successful login through SSH from Informational authenticated by AAA none method lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA none method Username lt username gt Successful login through Console Successful login through Console Informational authenticated by AAA server authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt Login failed through Console Login failed through Console Warning authenticated by AAA server authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt Login failed through Console due to AAA Login failed through Console due Warning server timeout or improper configuration to AAA server timeout or improper configuration Username lt username gt Successful login through Web Successful login through Web from Informational authenticated by AAA server lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt Login failed through Web authenticated by Login failed through Web from Warning lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt 212 Login failed through Web due to AAA server timeout or improper configuration Successful login through Web SSL authenticated by AAA server Login failed through Web SSL authenticated by AAA server Login failed through Web SSL due to AAA server timeout or improper configuration Successful login thro
66. VLANs use the IGMP Snooping window located in the IGMP Snooping folder contained in the L2 Features folder Multicast Router Only This field specifies that the Switch should only forward all multicast traffic to a multicast enabled router if enabled Otherwise the Switch will forward all multicast traffic to any IP router The default is Disabled MLD Snooping This field specifies the status of MLD Snooping on the Switch MLD Snooping is used to discover ports on a VLAN that are requesting multicast data instead of flooding all ports on a selected VLAN with multicast traffic The default is Disabled Telnet Status Telnet configuration is Enabled by default If you do not want to allow configuration of the system through Telnet choose Disabled Telnet TCP Port The TCP port number TCP ports are numbered between 7 and 65535 The well known TCP Number 1 65535 port for the Telnet protocol is 23 Web based management is Enabled by default If you choose to disable this by selecting Disabled you will lose the ability to configure the system through the web interface as soon as these settings are applied Web TCP Port Number The TCP port number TCP ports are numbered between 7 and 65535 The well known TCP 1 65535 port for the Web is 80 Remote monitoring RMON of the Switch is Enabled or Disabled here Link Aggregation The algorithm that the Switch uses to balance the load across the ports that make up the port
67. accomplished using community strings which function like passwords The remote user SNMP application and the Switch SNMP must use the same community string SNMP packets from any station that has not been authenticated are ignored dropped The default community strings for the Switch used for SNMP v 1 and v 2 management access are public Allows authorized management stations to retrieve MIB objects private Allows authorized management stations to retrieve and modify MIB objects SNMP v 3 uses a more sophisticated authentication process that is separated into two parts The first part is to maintain a list of users and their attributes that are allowed to act as SNMP managers The second part describes what each user on that list can do as an SNMP manager The Switch allows groups of users to be listed and configured with a shared set of privileges The SNMP version may also be set for a listed group of SNMP managers Thus you may create a group of SNMP managers that are allowed to view read only 17 information or receive traps using SNMP v 1 while assigning a higher level of security to another group granting read write privi leges using SNMP v 3 Using SNMP v 3 individual users or groups of SNMP managers can be allowed to perform or be restricted from performing specific SNMP management functions The functions allowed or restricted are defined using the Object Identifier OID associated with a specific MIB An additional laye
68. be modified revealing the following window to configure IF Interface Name ovystetm Gratuitous ARP Periodical Send Interval 0 65535 Show All Gratuitous ARP Entries Figure 11 27 Gratuitous ARP Table Edit window The following fields can be set or viewed Parameter Description Send on IPIF status This is used to enable disable the sending of gratuitous ARP request packets while an IPIF interface comes up This is used to automatically announce the interface s IP address to other nodes By default the state is Enabled and only one ARP packet will be broadcast Send on This is used to enable disable the sending of gratuitous ARP request packets while a duplicate Duplicate IP IP is detected By default the state is Enabled Duplicate IP detected means that the system _Detected received an ARP request packet that is sent by an IP address that matches the system s own IP address Gratuitous ARP This is used to enable disable updating ARP cache based on the received gratuitous ARP Learning packet If a switch receives a gratuitous ARP packet and the sender s IP address in its ARP table it should update the ARP entry This is Enabled by default Gratuitous ARP The switch can trap and log IP conflict events to inform the administrator By default trap is Trap amp Log Disabled and event log is Enabled Gratuitous ARP This is used to configure the int
69. below Web based User Interface The user interface provides access to various Switch configuration and management windows allows you to view performance statistics and permits you to graphically monitor the system status Areas of the User Interface The figure below shows the user interface The user interface 1s divided ito three distinct areas as described in the table 22 FE Port ce 10M GE port 10 100M Ling gt D Link ort E 180 GE Port L S Ibo Link Set 1 3 5 7 39 11 i13 35 17 19 21 23 comboi 25 27 1 oe 1 5 9 13 7 21 25 al nn E Power 2 6 10 14 18 22 26 k j u a Console b DES 3029 2x Mb 5b 8510 de 14 16 18 20 22 24 Combo2 26 28 Ea L4 D Lin Refresh Interval 30 secs v Apply Building Networks for People 8 Web Management Tool ation Device Information Device Type 5 025 Fast Ethernet Switch MAC Address 001558502215 Boot PROM Version Firmware Version Hardware Version Serial Number P483173000019 Arai MA RCM System Contact MAC Notification Disabled Detail settings Pore Miror BEEN Single IP Management Disabled Detail settings su EN Q Detail settings st A Detail settings 300 Disabled Disabled v MLD Snooping Disabled RMON Status Disabled v Link Aggregation Algorithm MAC Source v Switch 802 1X Disabled Port Security Trap Log Disabled ARP Aging Time 0 65535 20 Asymmetric VLAN Disabled Password Encryption Disabled Do
70. but is more restrictive It provides a method of directing traffic that does not increase the overhead of the Master switch CPU Click Security gt Traffic Segmentation to view the window shown below Port Map 1 1 28 2 1 28 4 1 28 A 1 28 1 28 5 1 28 P 1 28 E 1 28 t 1 28 10 1 28 11 1 28 123 1 28 13 1 28 14 1 28 15 1 28 16 1 28 l7 1 28 le 1 28 1 1 28 AU 1 28 EN 1 28 fe 1 28 me 1 28 e 1 28 25 1 28 2b 1 28 ae 1 28 26 1 28 Figure 10 51 Traffic Segmentation window Click on the Setup button to open the Setup Forwarding ports window as shown below 226 HEEFEBEDEEEEISE EIE EESEIES Forward Port View settings of All Ports Figure 10 52 Setup Forwarding ports window This window allows the user to determine which port on a given switch will be allowed to forward packets to other ports on that switch To configure traffic segmentation specify a port from that switch using the Port pull down menu Click Apply to enter the settings into the Switch s Traffic Segmentation table DoS Attack Prevention A DoS Denial of Service is a malicious attack against a network This attack is designed to stop a network from functioning by flooding it with useless traffic Symptoms of a malicious attack include the inability to access any web site or a particular web site being unavailable and network performance slowing down Common DoS attacks are Land attack Blat attack Teardrop attack TCP SYN at
71. computer network packets such as Multicast packets and Broadcast packets continually flood the network as normal procedure At times this traffic may increase due to a malicious endstation on the network or a malfunctioning device such as a faulty network card Thus switch throughput problems will arise and consequently affect the overall performance of the switch network To help rectify this packet storm the Switch will monitor and control the situation The packet storm is monitored to determine if too many packets are flooding the network based on the threshold level provided by the user Once a packet storm has been detected the Switch will drop packets coming into the Switch until the storm has subsided This method can be utilized by selecting the Drop option of the Action field in the window below The Switch will also scan and monitor packets coming into the Switch by monitoring the Switch s chip counter This method is only viable for Unicast Broadcast and Multicast storms because the chip only has counters for these three types of packets Once a storm has been detected that 1s once the packet threshold set below has been exceeded the Switch will shutdown the port to all incoming traffic with the exception of STP BPDU packets for a time period specified using the CountDown field To view this window click Security gt Traffic Control 181 Traffic Trap 1 Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop E E Disabled Disabled D
72. configuration file stored in its base directory when the request is received from the Switch Consult the DHCP server and or TFTP server software instructions for information on loading a configuration file for use by a client If the Switch is unable to complete the autoconfiguration process the previously saved 29 configuration file present in Switch memory will be loaded Click Apply to allow changes to take effect Setting the Swith s IP Address using the Console Interface Each Switch must be assigned its own IP Address which is used for communication with an SNMP network manager or other TCP IP application for example BOOTP TFTP The Switch s default IP address is 10 90 90 90 You can change the default Switch IP address to meet the specification of your networking address scheme The IP address for the Switch must be set before it can be managed with the Web based manager The Switch IP address can be automatically set using BOOTP or DHCP protocols in which case the actual address assigned to the Switch must be known The IP address may be set using the Command Line Interface CLI over the console serial port as follows Starting at the command line prompt enter the commands config ipif System ipaddress xxx xxx xxx xxx yyy vyy vyy YyYy where the x s represent the IP address to be assigned to the IP interface named System and the y s represent the corresponding subnet mask Alternatively you can enter config ipif
73. configure the Access Rule for Packet Content Mask open the Access Profile Table and click Modify for a Packet Content Mask entry This will display the Access Rule Table 166 Add Profle TD 4 Ferrut Packet l g X Content Show All Access Profile Entries Figure 9 12 Access Rule Table window Packet Content Mask The user may search for the settings of a particular Access ID by entering that ID into the Access ID field above and clicking Find The user may display all Access ID entries by clicking the View All Entry button To remove a previously created rule select it and click the button Access rules are indexed using the Access ID number To locate a specific Access Rule in the table enter the Access ID and click Find To display all rules in the table click the View All Entries button To add a new Access Rule click the Add button above the Access Rule Table window to view the Access Rule Packet Content Configuration window Permit O Deny Rx Rate No Limit0 kbps Auto Assign iud priority ontent Item oo Value Content Item Value Content Item3 Value ontent ltemd P Content Item Value Time Range show All Access Rule Entries Figure 9 13 Access Rule Packet Content Configuration window To set the Access Rule for the Packet Content Mask adjust the following parameters and click Apply Parameter Descript
74. costs Operational adjustments covered in the operating manual for the product and normal maintenance Damage that occurs in shipment due to act of God failures due to power surge and cosmetic damage and Any hardware software firmware or other products or services provided by anyone other than D Link Disclaimer of Other Warranties EXCEPT FOR THE LIMITED WARRANTY SPECIFIED HEREIN THE PRODUCT IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY OF ANY KIND INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT IF ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY CANNOT BE DISCLAIMED IN ANY TERRITORY WHERE A PRODUCT IS SOLD THE DURATION OF SUCH IMPLIED WARRANTY SHALL BE LIMITED TO NINETY 90 DAYS EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY COVERED UNDER THE LIMITED WARRANTY PROVIDED HEREIN THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY SELECTION AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT IS WITH THE PURCHASER OF THE PRODUCT Limitation of Liability TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW D LINK IS NOT LIABLE UNDER ANY CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHER LEGAL OR EQUITABLE THEORY FOR ANY LOSS OF USE OF THE PRODUCT INCONVENIENCE OR DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER WHETHER DIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL WORK STOPPAGE COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION LOSS OF INFORMATION OR DATA CONTAINED IN STORED ON OR INTEGRATED WITH ANY PRODUCT RETURNED TO D LINK FOR WARRANTY SERVIC
75. crossed MIB Management Information Base Stores a device s management characteristics and parameters MIBs are used by the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP to contain attributes of their managed systems The Switch contains its own internal MIB multicast Single packets copied to a specific subset of network addresses These addresses are specified in the destination address field of the packet protocol A set of rules for communication between devices on a network The rules dictate format timing sequencing and error control resilient link A pair of ports that can be configured so that one will take over data transmission should the other fail See also main port and standby port RJ 45 Standard 8 wire connectors for IEEE 802 3 10BASE T networks RMON Remote Monitoring A subset of SNMP MIB II that allows monitoring and management capabilities by addressing up to ten different groups of information RPS Redundant Power System A device that provides a backup source of power when connected to the Switch server farm A cluster of servers in a centralized location serving a large user population SLIP Serial Line Internet Protocol A protocol which allows IP to run over a serial line connection SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol A protocol originally designed to be used in managing TCP IP internets SNMP is presently implemented on a wide range of computers and networking equipment and may be used to manage m
76. destination IP address Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the DiffServ Code part of each packet header and use this as the or part of the criterion for forwarding Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the protocol type value in each frame s header You must then specify what protocol s to include according to the following guidelines Select CMP to instruct the Switch to examine the Internet Control Messages Protocol ICMP field in each frame s header Select GMP to instruct the Switch to examine the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP field in each frame s header Select TCP to use the TCP port number contained in an incoming packet as the forwarding criterion Selecting TCP requires that you specify a source port mask and or a destination port mask The user may also identify which flag bits to deny Flag bits are parts of a packet that determine what to do with the packet The user may deny packets by denying certain flag bits within the packets by checking the boxes corresponding to the flag bits of the TCP field The user may choose between urg urgent ack acknowledgement psh push rst reset syn synchronize fin finish src port mask Specify a TCP port mask for the source port in hex form hex 0x0 Oxffff which you wish to deny dest port mask Specify a TCP port mask for the destination port in hex form hex Ox0 Oxffff which you wish to deny select UDP to use
77. di ali 142 S 143 Port Bandwidth iced oe I Eaa caet uto efe des adeu e do vete devia ds 146 302 1p Default Priority ione cepe Eh Ec po ne r pio it nici Hsec 147 SOZ AD User A ees esea E aE aE e aaa E aE ENEAS 149 Cos eirca 149 Cos Output SChedulll9 oido toe o Did Dodo o Dopo ae eec Yea A ON 150 Priory SECOS LN 151 TOS Priority S CUMGS ert sap suiaseipenscacseesvanaswesdeaebusadesdageoseacevessesainesGeucnnea 153 DSCP Priority SONOS A A AAA EE eE EEr aeS 154 Port Mappme Priority Set AAA PT 155 MAC Priority enii M 156 O E A 157 Time RANTE ii 157 Access Frome Table iiec uo recess eneses eai oneee ae ea ea oaeeo a anuo loa eo ds 157 CPU Interface ulum a ae a E 169 CPU Interface Pire Slate ista decile 169 CPU Interface Filtering Pronile T4ble aaa OEE E E A 169 A RETI 181 Traic Gir 181 Port SSO CUE ICY ee rr M 185 Fort EoCk EMUries rre 186 IP MAC POLCDBIBOHI iones 187 SISSE IR TRI 187 IMP Port Settings REM 187 ESTER 189 IDHCP SnoOpme EMEC ada Fur oer bo Les id MO 190 MAC TIO GaU E 190 O 191 Dowild90 Cote A EA eta Pe tra Pen 191 CTPMECES UICC m H n 191 DSS A E E E A E E E E 194 uineis eH OMS IUIS NETT T UIN UU MT 194 SSH Authentication Modeand Algorithmi Settings oso eo DEDE Sy eE ae nance Nee ale ee eS RU ees
78. displays UMB cast packets received by the Switch To select a port to view these statistics for use the Port pull down menu The user may also use the real time graphic of the Switch at the top of the web page by simply clicking on a port To view this window click Monitoring gt Packets gt UMB Cast RX Pott Apply Clear Je Table Rx Packets Analysis Port Port 1 1000 m Unicast a ann Multicast Do FOU Broadcast KOU 500 400 200 100 Dnitisec Time Interval 15 Record Number 200 ShowHide if Unicast iv hulticast if Broadcast Figure 11 5 Rx Packets Analysis window line graph for Unicast Multicast and Broadcast Packets To view the UMB Cast Table click the View Table link which will show the following table 237 Packet Analysis of Port Port 1 jis Bytes Packets Unicast Multicast Broadcast chiles Packets Figure 11 6 Rx Packets Analysis window table for Unicast Multicast and Broadcast Packets The following fields may be set or viewed Parameter Description Time Interval Select the desired setting between 7s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second Record Number Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200 The default value is 200 Counts the total number of good packets that were received by a unicast address Counts the total number of good packets that were received by a multicast address Broadcast Count
79. each of the possible 4096 VLANs supported by the Switch for a given instance To utilize the MSTP function on the Switch three steps need to be taken 1 The Switch must be set to the MSTP setting found in the STP Bridge Global Settings window in the STP Version field 2 The correct spanning tree priority for the MSTP instance must be entered defined here as a Priority in the MST Configuration Table window when configuring an MSTI ID settings 3 VLANs that will be shared must be added to the MSTP Instance ID defined here as a VID List in the MST Configuration Table window when configuring an MSTI ID settings 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree The Switch implements two versions of the Spanning Tree Protocol the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP as defined by the IEEE 802 1w specification and a version compatible with the IEEE 802 1d STP RSTP can operate with legacy equipment implementing IEEE 802 1d however the advantages of using RSTP will be lost The IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP evolved from the 802 1d STP standard RSTP was developed in order to overcome some limitations of STP that impede the function of some recent switching innovations in particular certain Layer 3 functions that are increasingly handled by Ethernet switches The basic function and much of the terminology is the same as STP Most of the settings configured for STP are also used for RSTP This section introduces some new Spanning Tree concepts and
80. following window 108 IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN Settings OOOO VLANName sd ID 2 4094 3 TOME dotes Member Ports Tagged Member Ports eplace Source 1P chow IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN Entries Figure 7 23 IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN Settings Add window modified Both the Add and Modify windows of the IGMP Multicast VLAN Settings have the following configurable fields Parameter Description VLAN Name Enter the name of the new Multicast VLAN to be created This name can be up to 32 characters in length This field will display the pre created name of a Multicast VLAN in the Modify window VID Add or edit the corresponding VLAN ID of the Multicast VLAN Users may enter a value between 2 and 4094 Ste Use the pull down menu to enable or disable the selected Multicast VLAN Member Port Enter a port or list of ports to be added to the Multicast VLAN Member ports shall be the untagged members of the multicast VLAN Tagged Member Enter a port or list of ports that will become tagged members of the Multicast VLAN Port Source Port Enter a port or list of ports to be added to the Multicast VLAN Source ports shall be the tagged members of the multicast VLAN Replace Source This field is used to replac
81. for the selected group of ports The options are Lock Address Mode Permanent The locked addresses will not age out after the aging timer expires DeleteOnTimeout The locked addresses will age out after the aging timer expires DeleteOnReset The locked addresses will not age out until the Switch has been reset Click Apply to implement changes made 185 Port Lock Entries The Port Lock Entries Table window is used to remove an entry from the port security entries learned by the Switch and entered into the forwarding database To view the following window click Security gt Port Lock Entries Figure 10 3 Port Lock Entries window This function is only operable if the Mode in the Port Security window is selected as Permanent or DeleteOnReset or in other words only addresses that are permanently learned by the Switch can be deleted Once the entry has been defined by entering the correct information into the window above click the under the Delete heading of the corresponding MAC address to be deleted Only entries marked Secured Permanent can be deleted Click the Next button to view the next page of entries listed in this table This window displays the following information Parameter Description VID The VLAN ID of the entry in the forwarding database table that has been permanently learned by the Switch VLAN Name The VLAN Name of the entry in the forwarding database table that has been permanently lear
82. for the source MAC address Destination Enter a MAC Address mask for the destination MAC address MAC 802 1P 0 7 Enter a value from 0 7 to specify that the access profile will apply only to packets with this 802 1p priority value Ethernet Type Specifies that the access profile will apply only to packets with this hexadecimal 802 1Q Ethernet type value hex Ox0 Oxffff in the packet header The Ethernet type value may be set in the form hex OxO Oxffff which means the user may choose any combination of letters and numbers ranging from a f and from 0 9 175 The CPU Access Rule may be configured on a per port basis by entering the port number of the Switch configured in the Time Range window This will set specific times when this CPU access rule will be implemented on the Switch Click the check box and enter the name of the Time Range settings that have been previously To view the settings of a previously configured rule click Vier in the Access Rule Table to view the following window 1 1 Permit Ethernet VLAN Name source MAC Destination MAC Ethernet Type Time Range show Al CPU Interface Filtering Eule Entries Figure 9 23 CPU Interface Filtering Entry Display window Ethernet The following window is the CPU Interface Filtering Rule Table for IP Add Profile TD IP 1 X 2 Perrmt View Chow All CPO Interface Filtering Entries Figure 9 24 CPU Interface Filtering Rule Table window IP
83. greater network i d lj NOTE Be sure to configure the user name and password in the User 24 Administration IP Address Port Configuration DHCP BOOTP Relay User Accounts Cable Diagnostics Port Mirroring System Log Settings Log Settings SNTP Settings MAC Notification Settings TFTP Services Multiple Image Services Ping Test Safeguard Engine SNMP Manager PoE System Single IP Settings Forwarding amp Filtering SMTP Service 25 Device Information This window contains the main settings for all major PI functions of the Switch and appears automatically when Device Type DES 3028 Fast Ethernet Switch you log on To return to the Device Information window C Address 00 19 5B EC 32 15 ame MAC Ad click the DES 30xx Web Management Tool folder The Device Information window shows the Switch s MAC pe tures sc ne a Address assigned by the factory and unchangeable the MESES default Boot PROM Firmware Version Hardware Version TAS ET 255 0 0 0 M bos m is prin ded Default Gateway track O and firmware updates and to obtain the Switch s MAC address for entry into another network paper pore verse ee device s address table if necessary The user may also Firmware Version I 2 00 B26 enter a System Name System Location and System Hardware Version B Contact to aid in defining the Switch In addition this window displays the status of functions on the Switch to quickly assess their current global st
84. gt Multiple Image Services Firmware Information This window is used to view boot up firmware images To view this window click Administration gt Multiple Image Services gt Firmware Information I 200 B24 1663336 OOO0 00 00 00 06 06 10 73 21 10 CONSOLE Anonymous 2 100 Bs2 1533156 Q Q 00 l 02 56 56 10 10 0 CONSOLE Icy Boot up firmware Firmware update through 55H Firmware update through WEB Firmware update through Single IP Management Firmware update through SNMP Firmware update through TELNET CONSOLE Firmware update through CONSOLE Figure 6 24 Firmware Information window Config Firmware Image The following window is used to determine which of the two firmware images will be used as the default boot file You can also delete either of the two images To view this window click Administration gt Multiple Image Services gt Config Firmware Image P gm rM m HUN PF IT n a q TM EA i I a Bl m a waht um a 7 wae la 1 rit Mil ji a 7 E Ti T iaf F Wi 1 A xul lani tm I age a ee gt Figure 6 25 Config Firmware Image window 53 Ping Test Ping is a small program that sends ICMP Echo packets to the IP address you specify The destination node then responds to or echoes the packets sent from the Switch This is very useful to verify connectivity between the Switch and other nodes on the network To view this window click Adminis
85. how to set up Multicast Forwarding on the Switch To view this window click Administration gt Forwarding amp Filtering gt Multicast Forwarding Add new Multicast Forwarding Settings Figure 6 65 Multicast Forwarding Settings window The Static Multicast Forwarding Settings window displays all of the entries made into the Switch s static multicast forwarding table Click the Add button to open the Setup Static Multicast Forwarding Table window as shown below 79 Multicast MAC Address u 00 00 00 00 00 00 ST CIO 6 0 A CO o O O O O O O O O O O O To 0 9 O Egress LIEU MENU E ML ML MEL EL EL MEL ML ML LL EL show All Multicast Forvarding Entries Figure 6 66 Setup Static Multicast Forwarding Table window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description VID The VLAN ID of the VLAN to which the corresponding MAC address belongs Multicast MAC The MAC address of the static source of multicast packets This must be a multicast MAC Address address Port Settings Allows the selection of ports that will be members of the static multicast group The options are None When None is chosen the port will not be a member of the Static Multicast Group Egress The port is a static member of the multicast group Click Apply to implement the changes made To delete an entry in the Static Multicast Forwarding Ta
86. implement changes made To configure the settings for the CIST click on its hyperlinked name in the MST Configuration Identification window which will reveal the following window to configure MSTIID o mw show MET Co aton Table Figure 7 40 Instance ID Settings window CIST modify The user may configure the following parameters to configure the CIST on the Switch Parameter Description MSTI ID The MSTI ID of the CIST is 0 and cannot be altered Type This field allows the user to choose a desired method for altering the MSTI settings The user has 2 choices e Add VID Select this parameter to add VIDs to the MSTI ID in conjunction with the VID List parameter Remove VID Select this parameter to remove VIDs from the MSTI ID in con junction with the VID List parameter VID List 1 4094 This field is used to specify the VID range from configured VLANs set on the Switch Supported VIDs on the Switch range from ID number 1 to 4094 This field is inoperable when configuring the CIST Click Apply to implement changes made To configure the parameters for a previously set MSTI click on its hyperlinked MSTI ID number which will reveal the following window for configuration 126 Add VID Figure 7 41 Instance ID Settings window modify The us
87. is only operable when V3 is selected in the SNMP Version field and the Encryption field has been checked This field will require the user to enter a password between 8 and 16 alphanumeric characters 59 To implement changes made click Apply To return to the SNMP User Table click the Show All SNMP User Table Entries link SNMP View Table This window is used to assign views to community strings that define which MIB objects can be accessed by a remote SNMP manager To view the SNMP View Table window click Administration gt SNMP Manager gt SNMP View Table View Name restricted 3 5 1 2 1 1 Included restricted 13612111 Included restricted 1 3 5 1 5 3 10 2 1 Included restricted 1 3 5 1 5 3 11 2 1 Included restricted L3E EXIST Included Community view Included CommurntbyView 1 3 6 1 6 3 Excluded CommurntyView 1136 1 6 31 Included Figure 6 34 SNMP View Table window To delete an existing SNMP View Table entry click the corresponding in the Delete column of the entry you wish to delete To create a new entry click the Add button and a separate window will appear View Name subtree OID View Type Included show Al SHME View Table Entries Figure 6 35 SNMP View Table Configuration window The SNMP Group created with this table maps SNMP users identified in the SNMP User Table to the views c
88. lost 82 SMTP Server Settings The following window is used to configure the fields to set up the SMTP server for the switch along with setting e mail addresses to which switch log files can be sent when a problem arises on the Switch To open the following window click Administration gt SMTP Service gt SMTP Server Settings SMTP State Disabled v SMTP Server Address 0 0 0 0 SMTP Server Port 1 65535 Self Mail Address Mail Receiver Address eo b k d Pe Figure 6 68 SMTP Service Settings and Mail Receiver Address Table window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description SMTP State Use the pull down menu to enable or disable the SMTP service on this device SMTP Server Address Enter the IP address of the SMTP server on a remote device This will be the device that sends out the mail for you SMTP Server Port Enter the virtual port number that the Switch will connect with on the SMTP server The common port number for SMTP is 25 yet a value between 7 and 65535 can be chosen Self Mail Address Enter the e mail address from which mail messages will be sent This address will be the from address on the e mail message sent to a recipient Only one self mail address can be configured for this Switch This string can be no more that 64 alphanumeric characters Mail Receiver Address
89. necessary for establishing the timing control between the two physical layers The timing control is set on a master physical layer by a local source The slave setting 1000M Full S uses loop timing where the timing comes from a data stream received from the master If one connection is set for 7000M Full M the other side of the connection must be set for 7000M Full S Any other configuration will result in a link down status for both ports Displays the flow control scheme used for the various port configurations Ports configured for full duplex use 802 3x flow control half duplex ports use backpressure flow control and Auto ports use an automatic selection of the two The default is Disabled This applies only to the Combo ports If configuring the Combo ports this defines the type of transport medium being configured SFP ports should be set at Fiber and the Combo 1000BASE T ports should be set at Copper if no medium type is specified the device will assume the Copper port is the one being configured MDIX can be set to Auto Normal and Cross depending on the cable type used for the connection When Enabled destination and source MAC addresses are automatically listed in the forwarding table The default setting is Enabled Click Apply to implement the new settings on the Switch 32 Port Description The Switch supports a port description feature Switch To assign names to various ports click Me Foti Porl Apply Ad
90. physical server host but remember that TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS are separate entities and are not compatible with each other The maximum supported number of server hosts is 16 To view the following window click Security gt Access Authentication Control gt Authentication Server Host 218 Ada Mote Maximum of 16 entries Total Entries 1 ag m z pe dag zi dag al E m pa J a Authentication Server Host 5 2 A 10 0 0 0 TACACO 45 SN Figure 10 39 Authentication Server Host Settings window To add an Authentication Server Host click the Add button revealing the following window Address 0 0 0 0 l TACACS v show All Authentication Server Host Entries Figure 10 40 Authentication Server Host Settings Add window To edit an Authentication Server Host click the IP address hyperlink revealing the following window 10 99 99 89 show 41 Authentication Server Host Entries Figure 10 41 Authentication Server Host Setting Edit window Configure the following parameters to add an Authentication Server Host Parameter Description IP Address The IP address of the remote server host to add Protocol The protoc
91. port range by using the From and To pull down menus and then insert a priority value from 0 to 7 in the Priority field Click Apply to implement your settings 148 802 1p User Priority When using 802 1p priority mechanism the packet is examined for the presence of a valid 802 1p priority tag If the tag is present the packet is assigned to a programmable egress queue based on the value of the tagged priority The tagged priority can be designated to any of the available queues The Switch allows the assignment of a class of service to each of the 802 1p priorities To view this window click CoS gt 802 1p User Priority Class Class 1 Class M Class Class 3 Class 3 Figure 8 4 802 1p User Priority window Once you have assigned a priority to the port groups on the Switch you can then assign this Class to each of the four levels of 802 1p priorities Click Apply to set your changes CoS Scheduling Mechanism This drop down menu allows you to select between a Weight Fair and a Strict mechanism for emptying the priority classes To view this window click CoS gt CoS Scheduling Mechanism Scheduling Mechanism Class Mechanism OSSO OO Weight Fair Weight Fair Weight Fair Strict No
92. process between client and host as they exchange keys in looking for a match and therefore authentication to be accepted to negotiate encryptions on the following level 2 Encryption The second part of the ciphersuite that includes the encryption used for encrypting the messages sent between client and host The Switch supports two types of cryptology algorithms e Stream Ciphers There are two types of stream ciphers on the Switch RC4 with 40 bit keys and RC4 with 126 bit keys These keys are used to encrypt messages and need to be consistent between client and host for optimal use e CBC Block Ciphers CBC refers to Cipher Block Chaining which means that a portion of the previously encrypted block of encrypted text 1s used in the encryption of the current block The Switch supports the 3DES EDE encryption code defined by the Data Encryption Standard DES to create the encrypted text 3 Hash Algorithm This part of the ciphersuite allows the user to choose a message digest function which will determine a Message Authentication Code This Message Authentication Code will be encrypted with a sent message to provide integrity and prevent against replay attacks The Switch supports two hash algorithms MD5 Message Digest 5 and SHA Secure Hash Algorithm These three parameters are uniquely assembled in four choices on the Switch to create a three layered encryption code for secure communication between the server and the host The
93. repair or replace the defective Hardware at no charge to the original owner Such repair or replacement will be rendered by D Link at an Authorized D Link Service Office The replacement Hardware need not be new or of an identical make model or part D Link may in its discretion may replace the defective Hardware or any part thereof with any reconditioned product that D Link reasonably determines is substantially equivalent or superior in all material respects to the defective Hardware The Warranty Period shall extend for an additional ninety 90 days after any repaired or replaced Hardware is delivered If a material defect is incapable of correction or if D Link determines in its sole discretion that it is not practical to repair or replace the defective Hardware the price paid by the original purchaser for the defective Hardware will be refunded by D Link upon return to D Link of the defective Hardware All Hardware or part thereof that is replaced by D Link or for which the purchase price is refunded shall become the property of D Link upon replacement or refund Limited Software Warranty D Link warrants that the software portion of the product Software will substantially conform to D Link s then current functional specifications for the Software as set forth in the applicable documentation from the date of original delivery of the Software for a period of ninety 90 days Warranty Period if the Software is properly insta
94. returning it to an Enabled status alternatively the user can wait for the auto recovery function which will occur after 5 minutes the auto recovery function cannot be configured by the user To utilize this method of Storm Control choose the Shutdown option of the Action field in the window below To view this window to configure Traffic Control click Security gt Traffic Control 182 The user may set the following parameters Parameter Description Traffic Trap Configuration Traffic Trap Enable sending of Storm Trap messages when the type of action taken by the Traffic Control function in handling a Traffic Storm is one of the following None Will send no Storm trap warning messages regardless of action taken by the Traffic Control mechanism Storm Occurred Will send Storm Trap warning messages upon the occurrence of a Traffic Storm only Storm Cleared Will send Storm Trap messages when a Traffic Storm has been cleared by the Switch only Both Will send Storm Trap messages when a Traffic Storm has been both detected and cleared by the Switch This function cannot be implemented in the Hardware mode When Drop is chosen in the Action field Traffic Control Settings Threshold Specifies the maximum rate per second Kbps that will trigger the Traffic Control function to commence Action Select the method of traffic Control from the pull down menu The choices are Drop Utilizes the hardware Traffi
95. second 122 STP Port Settings STP can be set up on a port per port basis To view the STP Port Settings window click L2 Features gt Spanning Tree gt STP Port Settings Port 1 Y Porti Enabled y 10 No il True m v Disabled Disabled v False v False 1 Auto 200000 2 12 No No Auto Yes Enabled Enabled False False 2 Auto 200000 e T2 No No Auto Yes Enabled Enabled False False Auto 200000 B No No Auto Yes Enabled Enabled False False i Auto 200000 Aa No No Auto Yes Enabled Enabled False False Auto 200000 ede No No Auto Yes Enabled Enabled False False Auto 200000 22 No No Auto Yes Enabled Enabled False False Auto 200000 212 No No lt Auto Yes Enabled Enabled False False Auto 200000 e T2 No No Auto Yes Enabled Enabled False False Auto 200000 ete No No lt Auto Yes Enabled Enabled False False Auto 200000 Bite No No Auto Yes Enabled Enabled False False Auto 200000 ee No No Auto Yes Enabled Enabled False False Auto 200000 PUE No No Auto Yes Enabled Enabled False False Auto 200000 FEN E No No Auto Yes Enabled Enabled False False Auto 200000 2 i2 No No Auto Yes Enabled Enabled False False Auto 200000 ee No No Auto Yes Enabled Enabled False False Auto 200000 212 No No Auto Yes Enabled Enabled False False Auto 200000 zie No No Auto Yes Enabled Enabled False False Auto 200000 No No Auto Yes Enabled Enabled False False Auto 200000 No No Auto Yes Enabled Enabled False
96. set for the time in seconds the Switch will hold information sent to it from other switches utilizing the Discovery Interval The user may set the hold time from 100 to 255 seconds Click Apply to implement the settings changed After enabling the Switch to be a Commander Switch CS the Single IP Management folder will then contain four added links to aid the user in configuring SIM through the web including Topology Firmware Upgrade and Configuration Backup Restore and Upload Log File 70 Topology The Topology window will be used to configure and manage the Switch within the SIM group and requires Java script to function properly on your computer The Java Runtime Environment on your server should initiate and lead you to the topology window as seen below File Group Device View Help er i O Perr Speed Remote port Mac Address Model name Saf default 88 BD 7 Wtdefault98 60 7 7 00 21 91 98 60 77 DES 30286 L2 Switch 1 Jes 1 0H ADO 3 00 54 85 50 05 00 DX8 33508R L3 Switch gt jos Figure 6 48 Single IP Management window Tree View The Tree View window holds the following information under the Data tab Parameter Description Device Name This field will display the Device Name of the switches in the SIM group configured by the user If no Device Name is configured by the name it will be given the name default and tagged with the last six digits of the MAC Address to identify it Loca
97. string that determines the exact cryptographic parameters specific encryption algorithms and key sizes to be used for an authentication session The Switch possesses four possible ciphersuites for the SSL function which are all enabled by default To utilize a particular ciphersuite disable the unwanted ciphersuites leaving the desired one for authentication When the SSL function has been enabled the web will become disabled To manage the Switch through the web based management while utilizing the SSL function the web browser must support SSL encryption and the header of the URL must begin with https Ex https 10 90 90 90 Any other method will result in an error and no access can be authorized for the web based management To view the windows for Download Certificate and Ciphersuite click Security gt SSL 191 Certificate Type server IP Certificate File Name Key File Name SOL Status Disabled Cache Timeout 60 86400 sec BOB L RSA with RC4 128 MDS Enabled Ox0004 RSA with 3DES EDE CBC SHA Enabled 020004 DHE DSS with 3DES EDE CBC SHA Enabled 0x0013 RSA EXPORT with RC4 40 MDS Enabled 020003 Figure 10 9 Download Certificate and C
98. telefon 0900 100 77 00 Vardagar 08 00 20 00 D Link Teknisk Support via Internet http www dlink se Assist ncia T cnica Assist ncia T cnica da D Link na Internet http www dlink pt e mail soporte dlink es Texvikh YTTOOT pISN D Link Hellas Support Center KepaAAnv ag 64 11251 A nva TnA 210 86 11 114 Agzur pa MapaoKkeun 09 00 17 00 Pag 210 8611114 http www dlink gr support Tehnicka podrska Hvala vam na odabiru D Link proizvoda Za dodatne informacije podrsku upute za kori tenje ure aja molimo vas da posjetite D Link internetsku stranicu na www dlink eu www dlink biz hr Tehni na podpora Zahvaljujemo se vam ker ste izbrali D Link proizvod Za vse nadaljnje informacije podporo ter navodila za uporabo prosimo obi ite D Link ovo spletno stran www dlink eu www dlink biz sl Suport tehnica V multumim pentru alegerea produselor D Link Pentru mai multe informatii suport i manuale ale produselor v rug m s vizitati site ul D Link www dlink eu www dlink ro Technical Support You can find software updates and user documentation on the D Link website Tech Support for customers in Australia Tel 1300 766 868 24 7 24Hrs 7days a week technical support http www dlink com au e mail support dlink com au India Tel 1800 222 002 9 00 AM to 9 00 PM All days http www dlink co in support productsupport aspx Indonesia Malaysia Singapore and Thailand Tel 62 21 5731610 I
99. the ICMPvV6 packet header this message is sent by the router to ask if any link is requesting multicast data There are two types of MLD query messages emitted by the router The General Query is used to advertise all multicast addresses that are ready to send multicast data to all listening ports and the Multicast Specific query which advertises a specific multicast address that is also ready These two types of messages are distinguished by a multicast destination address located in the IPv6 header and a multicast address in the Multicast Listener Query Message MLDv2 has three types of messages General Query Multicast Group Specific Query and Multicast Group and Source Specific Query 2 Multicast Listener Report Comparable to the Host Membership Report in IGMPv2 and labeled as 131 in the ICMP packet header this message is sent by the listening port to the Switch stating that it is interested in receiving multicast data from a multicast address in response to the Multicast Listener Query message MLDv2 introduces the concept of Source List and Filtering Mode therefore its listener report is labeled as 143 in the packet header There has also been six new filtering report modes added which include MODE IS INCLUDE MODE IS EXCLUDE CHANGE TO INCLUDE CHANGE TO EXCLUDE ALLOW NEW and BLOCK OLD 3 Multicast Listener Done Akin to the Leave Group Message in IGMPv2 and labeled as 132 in the ICMPv6 packet header this message is sen
100. the SNTP information will be taken from This is the IP address of the secondary server the SNTP information will be taken from in the event the primary server is unavailable SNTP Poll Interval in This is the interval in seconds between requests for updated SNTP information Seconds Month Enter the current month if you would like to manually update the system date 48 Time in HH MM SS Enter the current time in hours minutes and seconds Click Apply to implement changes made Time Zone and DST The following are windows used to configure time zones and Daylight Savings time settings for SNTP Open the Administration folder then the SNTP Settings folder and click on the Time Zone and DST link revealing the following window a a F x xe zz Y x mur E Im 8 8 7 L A Bom E 3 Wr 4L ee e iit LI L LI a a LI LI Daylight Saving Time State Disabled Daylight Saving Time Offset in Minutes Time Zone Offset from GMT in HH MM Y 06 00 v p Y 5 FTT ME nul T Tor Fr PR m _ Ee Ls BS LE T E Ue dii LL d ul db Be LLL a From Which Day of the Week dh Am d a B 4 Ea ME 1 Ear pS Figure 6 21 Time Zone and DST Settings window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description Time Zone and DST Daylight Saving Use this pull down menu to enable or disable the DST Settings Time State Daylight Saving Use this pull down menu to specify the amou
101. the Switch you can configure the Switch monitor the LED panel and display statistics graphically using a web browser such as Netscape Navigator version 6 2 3 and higher or Microsoft Internet Explorer version 6 0 SNMP Based Management You can manage the Switch with an SNMP compatible console program The Switch supports SNMP version 1 0 version 2 0 and version 3 0 The SNMP agent decodes the incoming SNMP messages and responds to requests with MIB objects stored in the database The SNMP agent updates the MIB objects to generate statistics and counters Connecting the Console Port RS 232 DCE The Switch provides an RS 232 serial port that enables a connection to a computer or terminal for monitoring and configuring the Switch This port is a female DB 9 connector implemented as a data terminal equipment DTE connection To use the console port you need the following equipment e A terminal or a computer with both a serial port and the ability to emulate a terminal A null modem or crossover RS 232 cable with a female DB 9 connector for the console port on the Switch To connect a terminal to the console port 1 Connect the female connector of the RS 232 cable directly to the console port on the Switch and tighten the captive retaining screws 2 Connect the other end of the cable to a terminal or to the serial connector of a computer running terminal emulation software Set the terminal emulation software as follows Se
102. the UDP port number contained in an incoming packet as the forwarding criterion Selecting UDP requires that you specify a source port mask and or a destination port mask E src port mask Specify a TCP port mask for the source port in hex form hex 0x0 Oxffff dest port mask Specify a TCP port mask for the destination port in hex form hex OxO Oxffff protocol id mask Enter a value defining the protocol ID in the packet header to mask Specify in hex form hex Ox0 0xf The window shown below is the Access Profile Configuration window for Packet Content Mask 160 Offset 16 31 Offset 48 63 Offset 64 79 show Access Profile Table Entries Figure 9 5 Access Profile Configuration window Packet Content Mask This screen will aid the user in Switch to mask packet headers beginning with the offset value specified The following fields are used to configure the Packet Content Mask Parameter Description Profile ID 1 256 Type in a unique i
103. the desired setting between 7s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second Record Number Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200 The default value is 200 Bytes Counts the number of bytes successfully sent from the port Counts the number of packets successfully sent on the port Counts the total number of good packets that were transmitted by a unicast address Counts the total number of good packets that were transmitted by a multicast address Broadcast Counts the total number of good packets that were transmitted by a broadcast address Show Hide Check whether or not to display Bytes and Packets Clear Clicking this button clears all statistics counters on this window View Table Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a table rather than a line graph View Line Chart Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a line graph rather than a table 240 Packet Errors The Web Manager allows port error statistics compiled by the Switch s management agent to be viewed as either a line graph or a table Four windows are offered Received RX The following graph displays error packets received by the Switch To select a port to view these statistics for select the port by using the Port pull down menu The user may also use the real time graphic of the Switch at the top of the web page by simply clicking on a port To view this window click Monitoring gt Pack
104. this button to view the next page of the address table View All Entry Clicking this button will allow the user to view all entries of the address table Add to Static MAC This function will add the entry to the Static MAC address table and change its Type to address Table Permanent 248 Switch Log The Web manager allows the Switch s history log as compiled by the Switch s management agent to be viewed To view the Switch history log click Monitoring gt Switch Log sequence lime Log Text QOOO O0 00 00 10 22 Console session timed out Username Anonymous successtul login through Web Username Anonymous IE 10 73 21 1 0000 00 00 OLDO 45 DOCO D00 00 00 0025 System started up 0000 00 00 00 00 21 Successhil login through Console Username Anonymous QOOO O0 00 00 00 19 Port link up l00Mbps FULL duplex QOOO O0 00 00 00 19 Ports lnk up 100Mbps FULL duplex Figure 11 16 Switch History Log window The Switch can record event information in its own logs to designated SNMP trap receiving stations and to the PC connected to the console manager Click Next to go to the next page of the Switch History Log Clicking Clear will allow the user to clear the Switch History Log The information is described as follows Parameter Description Sequence A counter incremented whenever an entry to the Switch s history log is made The table displays the last entry highest sequence number first Displays the ti
105. to an application program on another device VLAN Virtual LAN A group of location and topology independent devices that communicate as if they are on a common physical LAN VLT Virtual LAN Trunk A Switch to Switch link which carries traffic for all the VLANs on each Switch VT100 A type of terminal that uses ASCII characters VT100 screens have a text based appearance Appendix E ARP Packet Content ACL Address Resolution Protocol ARP is the standard method for finding a host s hardware address MAC address when only its IP address is known This protocol is vulnerable so hackers can spoof the IP and MAC information in the ARP packets to attack a LAN known as ARP spoofing This document is intended to introduce ARP protocol ARP spoofing attacks and the countermeasure devised by D Link to put an end to ARP spoofing attacks How Address Resolution Protocol works In the process of ARP PC A will firstly issue an ARP request to query PC B s MAC address The network structure is shown in 00 205C 01 33 33 Port 3 00 20 5C 01 11 11 10 10 10 3 TUE 10 10 10 1 Figure 1 o L Target 00 20 5C 01 44 44 00 20 5C 01 22 22 10 10 10 4 10 10 10 2 Figure 1 In the mean time PC A s MAC address will be written into the Sender H W Address and its IP address will be written into the Sender Protocol Address in ARP payload As PC B s MAC address is unknown the Target H W Address will be 00 00 00 00 00 00 whi
106. uem dum x e e e e e m e e em we e ue e e em u ee e e wm x amp e uw wu e RW WO E S RO BW ZW Y e e amp em e ee S um ro d e m ue x e amp amp amp cm ee em e amp e e es amp e e ee ees Ss SY e Figure 7 52 LLDP Statistics System window 139 LLDP Management Address Table The following window is used to make entries to and display the LLDP Management Address Table To view this window click L2 Features gt LLDP gt LLDP Management Address Table el Advertising A I NEN d IPv4 10 73 21 11 unknown 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 11 63 11 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 NONE EM Entries 1 Figure 7 53 LLDP Management Address Table window Use the drop down menu to select the type of Management Address enter an IP address in the field provided and then click the Find button LLDP Local Port Table The following window is used to display the LLDP Local Port Brief Table To view this window click L2 Features gt LLDP gt LLDP Local Port Table 140 1 Local Local 4 Local 4 Local 3 Local Local E Local 5 Local 3 Local 10 Local 11 Local 12 Local l Local 14 Local 15 Local 16 Local 17 Local ls Local 13 Local 2l Local 21 Local Ze Local 25 Local 24 Local 12 1 5 1 4 15 1 6 Lf Lf Ls 1 10 1111 1 12 1 13 1114 1115
107. user may also identify which flag bits to filter Flag bits are parts of a packet that determine what to do with the packet The user may filter packets by filtering certain flag bits within the packets by checking the boxes corresponding to the flag bits of the TCP field The user may choose between urg urgent ack acknowledgement psh push rst reset syn synchronize fin finish e src port mask Specify a TCP port mask for the source port in hex form hex Ox0 Oxffff which you wish to filter dest port mask Specify a TCP port mask for the destination port in hex form hex OxO Oxffff which you wish to filter Select UDP to use the UDP port number contained in an incoming packet as the forwarding criterion Selecting UDP requires that you specify a source port mask and or a destination port mask src port mask Specify a UDP port mask for the source port in hex form hex Ox0 Oxffff dest port mask Specify a UDP port mask for the destination port in hex form hex OxO Oxffff protocol id Enter a value defining the protocol ID in the packet header to mask Specify the protocol ID mask in hex form hex OxO Oxff Click Apply to set this entry in the Switch s memory 172 The following is the CPU Interface Filtering Configuration window for the Packet Content Mask Profile ID 1 3 ff
108. user may implement any one or combination of the ciphersuites available yet different ciphersuites will affect the security level and the performance of the secured connection The information included in the ciphersuites is not included with the Switch and requires downloading from a third source in a file form called a certificate This function of the Switch cannot be executed without the presence and implementation of the certificate file and can be downloaded to the Switch by utilizing a TFTP server The Switch supports SSLv3 and TLSv1 Other versions of SSL may not be compatible with this Switch and may cause problems upon authentication and transfer of messages from client to host Download Certificate This window is used to download a certificate file for the SSL function on the Switch from a TFTP server The certificate file is a data record used for authenticating devices on the network It contains information on the owner keys for authentication and digital signatures Both the server and the client must have consistent certificate files for optimal use of the SSL function The Switch only supports certificate files with der file extensions The Switch is shipped with a certificate pre loaded though the user may need to download more depending on user circumstances Ciphersuite This window will allow the user to enable SSL on the Switch and implement any one or combination of listed ciphersuites on the Switch A ciphersuite is a security
109. uses triggered updates to carry out loop prevention and poison reverse or counting to infinity DVMRP multicast Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol uses reverse path flooding Messages are flooded out of all interfaces except the one that returns to the souce this is to prevent any packets traveling to members of the multicast VLAN The DVMRP uses periodic flooding so as to establish if there are other or potentially new group members PIM DM multicast Protocol Independent Multicast Dense Mode works by flooding the multicast packets to all routers and eliminates groups or members of groups that don t have an efficient path or route to their members This mode is generally used if the volume of multicast traffic is large and constant To view this window click L2 Features gt IGMP Snooping gt Router Ports Settings Total Entries l1 default Modify Figure 7 17 Router Ports Settings window The Router Ports Settings page shown above displays all the current entries on the Switch s static router port table To modify an entry click the Modify button This will open the following window 103 VID 1 VLAN Name default Po A to BS sft ffs o JO O JO o o o JO JO o o o o o 9 q 9 9 9 e 9 0 9 Forbidden O Q O O O O O LINE NEU MEME MEL IL O 0 C 0 0 0 0 Cy O O CO Q A A MEME MEL MEE MEL MEL MEL LJ Forhidden O O O O O O O O O O O Show All Reut
110. view this window click CoS gt CoS Output Scheduling Class 1 Class 2 MMETIS Figure 8 6 CoS Output Scheduling window Click Apply to implement changes made 150 Priority Settings The Priority Setting window will allow users to configure the CoS priority settings on a port per port basis When CoS tagged packets arrive on the switch they are mapped to the settings configured here For example if a port has been assigned a MAC priority the packet that has the CoS priority assigned to a MAC address will be sent to the CoS queue configured for that MAC address Once the configuration has been completed users may see the results in the Priority Settings Table seen here After configuring the port priorities users may adjust the individual CoS settings on the other windows located in the CoS folder of the Switch To view this window click CoS gt Priority Settings 151 From fo Type ly Apply Fort wa eal d e ey cEx pan O Pa Pb PP Pb OS 2 32 2 art Sa f d E Pe MES dec O oe a O te A tee e age PE A oe Do nem wt olf of of off off off of oft of oH off of of of olf of of off of off oft olf of otf off off off off x 202 Ip 202 Ip 802 Ip 802 Ip 802 Ip 202 Ip 802 Ip 802 Ip 802 Ip 802 Ip 802 Ip 802 Ip 802 Ip 802 Ip 802 Ip 802 Ip 802 Ip 802 Ip 802 Ip
111. will have a multicast router attached to them There are three options for which to configure these ports None Select this option to not set these ports as router ports Static Select this option to designate a range of ports as being connected to a multicast enabled router This command will ensure that all packets with this router as its destination will reach the multicast enabled router Forbidden Select this option to specify the port as not being a member of the VLAN and that the port is forbidden from becoming a member of the VLAN dynamically Click Apply to implement the new settings Spanning Tree This Switch supports three versions of the Spanning Tree Protocol 802 1d STP 802 1w Rapid STP and MSTP 802 1d STP will be familiar to most networking professionals However since 802 1w RSTP has been recently introduced to D Link managed Ethernet switches a brief introduction to the technology is provided below followed by a description of how to set up 802 1d STP and 802 1w RSTP 802 10 MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol or MSTP is a standard defined by the IEEE community that allows multiple VLANs to be mapped to a single spanning tree instance which will provide multiple pathways across the network Therefore these MSTP configurations will balance the traffic load preventing wide scale disruptions when a single spanning tree instance fails This will allow for faster convergences of new topologies for the fai
112. 1 IEEE 802 3z compliance 2 IEEE 802 3u compliance NOTE The SFP combo ports on the Switch cannot be used simultaneously with the corresponding 1000BASE T ports If both ports are in use at the same time ex port 25 of the SFP and port 25 of the 1000BASE T the SFP ports will take priority over the combo ports and render the 1000BASE T ports inoperable LED Indicators The Switch supports LED indicators for Power Console RPS and Port LEDs The following shows the LED indicators for the DES 3028 28P 28G 52 52P Series switches along with an explanation of each indicator LEDs and there corresponding meanings are displayed below D Link Managed Switch mn m UU o pu o 10M 10 100M e 100M GE Porte 10m e Link S act 13 17 25 ome E zH cH Power E BES KI D EN Ko EDE Kog Ko Console L DES 3028 Figure 1 1 LED Indicators on DES 3028 Switch D Link Managed Switch ee ee D Link D Link Managed Switch Managed Switch Link Act S peed E PoE a Power Power E El Console Console a ETE Figure 1 4 LED Indicators on DES 3052 DES 3052P Switch Green Per Device Solid Light Solid Light Consoleon Consoleon Console Gron Blinking POST is in progress POST is failure Lightoff Lightoff Console off off Mode Select Button only LinkAct Speed LinkAct Speed Green Solid Light Solid Light dum Link Act Speed Mo
113. 1 Note It 1s allowed insert 10 entries into the table only SNMP User Table initial initial Ws X Figure 6 31 SNMP User Table window To delete an existing SNMP User Table entry click the X below the Delete heading corresponding to the entry you wish to delete To display the detailed entry for a given user click on the hyperlinked username under the Display heading This will open the SNMP User Table Display window as shown below User Name Group Name NSINIIP Version Auth Protocol Priv Protocol Figure 6 32 SNMP User Table Display window The following parameters are displayed Parameter Description User Name An alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters This is used to identify the SNMP users 58 This name is used to specify the SNMP group created can request SNMP messages SNMP Version V1 Indicates that SNMP version 1 is in use V2 Indicates that SNMP version 2 is in use V3 Indicates that SNMP version 3 is in use Auth Protocol None Indicates that no authentication protocol is in use MD5 Indicates that the HMAC MD5 96 authentication level will be used SHA Indicates that the HMAC SHA authentication protocol will be used Priv Protocol None Indicates that SNMP messages will not be encrypted DES Indicates that DES 56 bit encryption is in use based on the CBC DES DES 56 standard To return to the SNMP User Table click the Show All SNMP User Table Entries link To add a new entry to th
114. 1 16 WT 1 18 1 19 Lat fa 1r2z 1 23 1124 Figure 7 54 LLDP Local Port Brief Table window Click the View button to display additional information about entries on the LLDP Local Port Brief Table EMOH Port 1 on Unt 1 EMON Port Z on Unit 1 EMON Port 3 on Unit 1 EMOH Port 4 on Umt 1 EMOH Port 5 on Unt 1 EMOH Port 6 on Unit 1 EMOH Port on Unit 1 EMON Port 8 on Unit 1 EMOH Port 9 on Unit 1 EMON Port 10 on Unt 1 EMON Port 11 on Umt 1 EMON Port 12 on Umt 1 EMON Port 13 on Umt 1 EMON Port 14 on Umt 1 EMON Port 15 on Umt 1 EMON Port 16 on Umt 1 EMON Port 17 on Umt 1 EMON Port ls on Umt 1 EMON Port 19 on Unt 1 EMON Port 20 on Umt 1 EMON Port 21 on Umt 1 EMON Port 22 on Umt 1 EMON Port 23 on Umt 1 EMON Port 24 on Unt 1 141 1 1 ormal E LE UE E LE UE UE LE LE UE E LE UE LE LE LEE LE LE ELE LE E E Detaled LE UE E LE UE E LE LE UE E LE UE E LE LEE LE LE ELE LE LEE LLDP Remote Port Table The following window is used to display the LLDP Remote Port Brief Table To view this window click L2 Features gt LLDP gt LLDP Remote Port Table INE a Remote Entities Count 0 NONE Normal View Normal Detaled View Detaled Figure 7 55 LLDP Remote Port Brief Table window Click the View Normal and View Detailed hyperlinks to display additional information 142 Cos Port Bandwidth 802 1p Default Priority 802 1p User Priority CoS Scheduling Mechanism CoS Output Scheduling Pr
115. 10 31 Reauthenticate Ports window MAC based 802 1X To reauthenticate ports first choose the range of ports in the From and To field Then the user must specify the MAC address to be reauthenticated by entering it into the MAC Address field and checking the corresponding check box To begin the reauthentication click Apply RADIUS Server The RADIUS feature of the Switch allows you to facilitate centralized user administration as well as providing protection against a sniffing active hacker The Web Manager offers three windows Click Security gt 802 1X gt RADIUS Server to open the RADIUS Server window shown below RADIUS Timeout 1 255 RADIUS Retransmit 1 255 Succession Confirm Key vaid v Succession RADIUS server Auth UDP Port Acct UDP Port Key status First Second Third Figure 10 32 RADIUS Server window This window displays the following information 213 Parameter Description RADIUS Timeout 1 This field is used to set the time the Switch will wait for a response from the Radius Server The 255 Sec user may set a time between 0 and 255 seconds The default setting is 5 seconds Radius Retransmit Enter the value in the Radius Retransmit field to change how ma
116. 178 Offset 16 31 Offset 48 63 Offset 64 79 Porthst show All CPU Interface Filtering Kule Entries Figure 9 28 CPU Interface Filtering Rule Configuration window Packet Content Mask To set the Access Rule for Ethernet adjust the following parameters and click Apply Parameters Description Profile ID This is the identifier number for this profile set Select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the Switch according to any additional rule added see below Select Deny to specify that packets that do not match the access profile are not forwarded by the Switch and will be filtered Type in a unique identifier number for this access This value can be set from 7 fo 5 Selected profile based on Ethernet MAC Address P address or Packet Content e Ethernet instructs the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header IP instructs the Switch to examine the IP address in each frame s header Packet Content Mask instructs the Switch to examine the packet header This field will instruct the Switch to mask the packet header beginning with the offset value specified value 0 15 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from the beginning of 179 the packet to the 15th byte a 16 31 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 16 to byte va
117. 18 19 29 2i 22 23 of 25 28 20 28 239 3X 3i 322 eio 33 M 35 38 37 38 39 40 4 42 43 42 45 48 47 148 amp 40 100M 48 50 51 52 ions 9 7 8 Wig WB Wo Mg Mg My W gy Sio Mig Wa4 HW WW W M A WW M cj ComojoW W Wgjm 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 a Sunk Pact Comboz 50 DES 3052P 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 39 1 1 1 1 4 1 e A AA Managed Switch Link AcUS peed n PoE LI Power LI Console H LI a ai 2 1 6 g T0 12 Ts E 1 CROSSOVER CABLE Switch or Hub Uplink STRAIGHT CABLE D Link Figure 3 2 Switch connected to a normal non Uplink port on a hub or switch using a straight or crossover cable NOTICE When the SFP transceiver acquires a link the associated integrated 10 100 1000BASE T port is disabled 13 Introduction to Switch Management Management Options Web based Management Interface SNMP Based Management Managing User Accounts Command Line Console Interface through the Serial Port Connecting the Console Port RS 232 DCE First Time Connecting to the Switch Password Protection SNMP Settings IP Address Assignment Management Options This system may be managed out of band through the console port on the front panel or in band using Telnet The user may also choose the web based management accessible through a web browser Web based Management Interface After you have successfully installed
118. 2009 D Link Corporation Contents are subject to change without prior notice D Link is a registered trademark of D Link Corporation D Link Systems Inc All other trademarks belong to their respective proprietors Copyright Statement No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form or by any means or used to make any derivative such as translation transformation or adaptation without permission from D Link Corporation D Link Systems Inc as stipulated by the United States Copyright Act of 1976 Link Building Networks for People Subject to the terms and conditions set forth herein D Link Systems Inc D Link provides this Limited Warranty Only to the person or entity that originally purchased the product from D Link or its authorized reseller or distributor and e Only for products purchased and delivered within the fifty states of the United States the District of Columbia U S Possessions or Protectorates U S Military Installations or addresses with an APO or FPO Limited Warranty D Link warrants that the hardware portion of the D Link product described below Hardware will be free from material defects in workmanship and materials under normal use from the date of original retail purchase of the product for the period set forth below Warranty Period except as otherwise stated herein Limited Lifetime Warranty for the product is defined as follows e Hardware For as long as the original custom
119. 28P 28G 52 52P Switch Figure 1 16 Installing the Mini GBIC Module Installing the SFP ports The DES 3028 28P 28G 52 52P Switches are equipped with SFP Small Form Factor Portable ports which are to be used with fiber optical transceiver cabling in order to uplink various other networking devices for a gigabit link that may span great distances These SFP ports support full duplex transmissions have auto negotiation and can be used with the DEM 310GT 1000BASE LX DEM 311GT 1000BASE SX DEM 210 Single Mode 1OOBASE FX DEM 211 Multi Mode 1OOBASE FX DEM 314GT 1000BASE LH DEM 315GT 1000BASE ZX DEM 330T R WDM and DEM 331T R WDM transceivers See the figure below for installing the SFP ports in the Switch Figure 1 17 Inserting the fiber optic transceivers into the DES 3028 28P 28G 52 52P Switch Installation Package Contents Before You Connect to the Network Installing the Switch without the Rack Rack Installation Power On Package Contents Open the shipping carton of the Switch and carefully unpack its contents The carton should contain the following items One Stand alone Switch E One AC power cord e This Manual on CD E Mounting kit two brackets and screws Four rubber feet with adhesive backing e DCE RS 232 console cable If any item is missing or damaged please contact your local D Link Reseller for replacement Before You Connec
120. 3 21 1 00 1B FC 02 46 03 Dynamic Modip x 10 73 21 11 00 21 91 98 60 77 Local Modify x Modiy X 10 255 255 255 FF FE FE FF FF FF LocalBroadcast Modify Total Entries 7 Figure 11 22 Static ARP Settings window To add an entry to the Static ARP Settings table click the Add button IP Address 0 0 0 0 MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 show All Static A EP Entries Figure 11 23 Static ARP Settings Add window To modify an entry select it on the ARP Settings table and click Modify MAC Address FF FF FF FF FF FF Show All Static ARP Entries Figure 11 24 Static ARP Settings Edit window ARP FDB This window conveniently allows the user to add entries to the IP MAC Port Binding Table the user may search for a particular entry by the Port MAC Address or IP Address on this screen Once an entry is found it will be displayed in the ARP FDB Table on the lower portion of the screen the user can then click Add which will add the entry to the IP MAC Port Binding Table This window will show current ARP FDB entries on the Switch To view this window click Monitoring gt ARP FDB 253 MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 Poti v Add to IP IP Address MAC Address i WLAC Port Binding Table 10 44 8 2553 00 44 08 EL 09 09 Add 10 635 677 00 09 41 Ds8 15 E Add 10 6451 178 00 11 De SB D06
121. 350255 Lunes a Viernes 05 00am a 18 00pm 01800 1233201 Lunes a Viernes 06 00am a 19 00pm Soporte T cnico de D Link a trav s de Internet www dlinkla com e mail soporte dlinkla com amp consultas dlinkla com D Link Building Networks for People Suporte Tecnico Voc pode encontrar atualizac es de software e documentac o de usuario no site da D Link Brasil A D Link fornece suporte t cnico gratuito para clientes no Brasil durante o periodo de vig ncia da garantia deste produto Suporte T cnico para clientes no Brasil Telefone Sao Paulo 11 2185 9301 Segunda a sexta Das 8h30 as 18h30 Demais Regides do Brasil 0800 70 24 104 E mail e mail suporte dlinkbrasil com br D Link Building Networks for People D Link RAR AERAR 3x ld Se 32 ES RT ALS ABUS ELA GB FREE ARIANE 6 F FT LLAMA BEMIS SCBRD Link EB HEU SH TARMA D Link amp f ETi l 24 85 Sik 0800 002 615 IRJ AAA E F9 003 R amp 9 00 PERRA O ARBITRO ME YE htto www dlink com tw E FER dssqa_service dlink com tw BD ER fa ze e ES ES DAP MR FP 8B SD Linkifduh E ER eg Hb DA R BO BS ES aA BY SAE IER Sz FARTS gt Eae BBBS ARA Aso PARSER http www dlink com tw EE nA FH aT E Sx e A ELEME e Re EU ERR BS SSH gt D Link Building Networks for People Dukungan Teknis Update perangkat lunak dan dokumentasi pengguna dapat diperoleh pada situs web D Link Dukungan Teknis untuk pelanggan Dukungan Teknis
122. 4 NONE 15 NONE 16 NONE 17 NONE 18 NONE 19 NONE 20 NONE 2 NONE 22 NONE 23 NONE 24 NONE 25 NONE 26 NONE 27 NONE 28 NONE Figure 7 51 LLDP Management Address Settings window The following parameters can be set or displayed 138 Parameter Description Select a port or group of ports using the pull down menus Displays the PV4 Address type Enter the LLDP management address in this field Use the drop down menu to toggle the Port State between Enabled and Disabled Click Apply to implement changes made LLDP Statistics The following window is used to display LLDP statistics To view this window click L2 Features gt LLDP gt LLDP Statistics Last Change Time Bs Number of Table Insert 0 Mumber of Table Delete 0 Number of Table Drop 0 0 Number of Table Age Out Port TxPort RxPortFrames RxPort ExPort ExPortTLYs RxPortTLYs RxPort ID FramesTotalDiscardedTotalFramesErrors Frames Total DiscardedTotal UnrecogmzedT otal AgeoutsT otal w eaj a cmm Um ES tbe pem c 0 Q 0 i Q 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 i 0 0 0 0 Q 0 Q 0 0 0 0 0 0 ro d ee amp ue m c ee amp e e a ee e e amp ee ee S eae ae ee e es S ee a ro d amp m m m c amp amp d ee e e e e e e amp e e eS es S S Se e d e um m mm m uude em eee e emm ee
123. 44 Add 10 73 21 1 U0 I1B FC 02 A6 05 Add Total Entries 4 Figure 11 25 ARP FDB window To search for information regarding a specific entry enter the appropriate information and click Find The ARP FDB entries will be displayed in the ARP FDB Table to add an entry to the IP MAC Port Binding Table click the corresponding Add button 254 Gratuitous ARP Settings This window will show the Gratuitous ARP Settings on the Switch An ARP announcement also known as Gratuitous ARP is a packet usually an ARP Request containing a valid SHA Sender Hardware Address and SPA Sender Protocol Address for the host which sent it with TPA Target Protocol Address equal to SPA Such a request is not intended to solicit a reply but merely update the ARP caches of other hosts which receive the packet and determine if there are any IP conflicts To view this window click Monitoring gt Gratuitous ARP Settings send on IPIF status up Enabled BM send on Duplicate IP Detected Enabled Gratuitous ARP Learning Enabled Bil IP Interface Name Gratutous ARP Trap Gratuitous ARP Log Gratutous ARP Periodical Send Interval Modify ovstem Disabled Enabled i Figure 11 26 Gratuitous ARP Settings window Once you have made the desired gratuitous ARP setting changes click Apply To modify a current entry click the corresponding Modify button of the entry to
124. 802 3af standard only for PoE SFP Mini GBIC Support DEM 310GT 1000BASE LX DEM 311GT 1000BASE SX DEM 314GT 1000BASE LH DEM 315GT 1000BASE ZX Fiber Optic DEM 210 Single Mode 100BASE FX DEM 211 Multi Mode 100BASE FX WDM Transceivers Supported DEM 330T TX 1550 RX 1310nm up to 10km Single Mode DEM 330R TX 1310 RX 1550nm up to 10km Single Mode DEM 331T TX 1550 RX 1310nm up to 40km Single Mode DEM 331R TX 1310 RX 1550nm up to 40km Single Mode Standards CSMA CD Data Transfer Rates Half duplex Full duplex Ethernet 10 Mbps 20Mbps Fast Ethernet 100Mbps 200Mbps Gigabit Ethernet n a 2000Mbps Network Cables Cat 5 Enhanced for 1000BASE T UTP Cat 5 Cat 5 Enhanced for 100BASE TX UTP Cat 3 4 5 for TOBASE T EIA TIA 568 100 ohm screened twisted pair STP 100m Number of Ports DES 3028 DES 3028P 24x 10 100Base T Ports 2 x 1000Base T SFP Combo Ports 2 x 1000Base T ports DES 3028G 24 x 10 100Base T Ports 4 x 1000Base T SFP Combo Ports DES 3052 DES 3052P 48 x 10 100Base T Ports 2 x 1000Base T SFP Combo Ports 2 x 1000Base T ports Physical and Environmental 262 Internal Power Supply Input DES 3028 DES 3052 DES 3028G 100 240V AC 0 5A 50 60Hz DES 3052P 100 240V AC 5A 50 60Hz DES 3028P 100 240V AC 2 9A 50 60Hz Output DES 3028 DES 3052 DES 3028G 12V 3 3A Max DES 3028P 12V 3 3A 50V 3 7A Max DES 3052P 12V 10 5A 50V 7 5A Max Power Consumption DES 3028 18 8W DES
125. AC 00 50 60 Hz 0 5A MAX Figure 1 11 Rear panel view of the DES 3052 Side Panel Description The left and right hand panel of the DES 3028G DES 3028 DES 3052 Switches contain heat vents The heat vents are used to dissipate heat Do not block these openings and leave at least 6 inches of space at the rear and sides of the Switch for proper ventilation Be reminded that without proper heat dissipation and air circulation system components might overheat which could lead to system failure 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 oo Q Q QQ Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q O O Figure 1 12 Side panels of the DES 3028G DES 3028 DES 3052 The sides of the DES 3028P have heat vents to serve to dissipate heat Do not block these openings and leave at least 6 inches of space at the rear and sides of the Switch for proper ventilation Be reminded that without proper he
126. ARP matches the Source MAC addresses in Ethernet Sender s MAC address and Senders IP address in the ARP protocol can it pass through the switch In this example it is the gateway s ARP 2 Theswitch will deny all other ARP packets which claim they are from the gateway s IP When calculating packet offset on DES 3028 series remember that even though a port is an untagged port the packet will add additional 4 bytes of 802 1Q header TCI for switching internal process shown in Figure 6 All packets will add an additional 4 bytes to assign PVID for the switching internal process Packet format d FRE ee ee E ah Tirna E ANO LK a ye lo Vik amne IL needle i ll bn O create access profile ethernet source mac FF FF FF FF FF FF ethernet type profile id 1 config access profile profile id 1 add access id 1 ethernet source mac 01 02 03 04 05 06 ethernet type 0x806 port 1 28 permit create access profile packet content mask Offset 0 15 0x0 0x0 0x0 OxFFFFOOOO uem Ethernet Type 2 byte offset 16 51 0x0 0x0 0x0 OxFFFFFFFF a Sdr IP 4 byte profile_id 2 config access profile profile id 2 add access id 1 packet content Offset 12 nM Ethernet Type 2 byte ARP offset 28 OxOA5SASASA Sdr IP 4 byte 10 90 90 90 port 1 28 den create access profile packet_content_mask offset_0 15 0x0 0x0 0x0 OxXFFFFO000 Man Tag 2 byte offset_16 31 0xFFFF0000 0x0 0x0 0x0 Ethernet Type 2 byte offset
127. Checking is Disabled by default The field in the 802 1Q Port Table shows the current PVID assignment for each port which may be manually assigned to a VLAN when created The Switch s default is to assign all ports to the default VLAN with a VID of 1 The PVID is used by the port to tag ingress untagged packets and to make filtering decisions about incoming packets If the port is specified to accept only tagged frames as tagging and an untagged packet is forwarded to the port for transmission the port will add an 802 1Q tag using the PVID to write the VID in the tag When the packet arrives at its destination the receiving device will use the PVID to make VLAN forwarding decisions If the two are unequal the port will drop the packet If the two are equal the port will receive the packet Acceptable This field denotes the type of frame that will be accepted by the port The user may choose between Frame Tagged Only which means only VLAN tagged frames will be accepted and Admit_Al which mean Type both tagged and untagged frames will be accepted Admit_All is enabled by default Click Apply to implement changes made NOTE A VLAN group can support 255 dynamic VLAN groups VLAN Trunk Settings Enable VLAN on a port to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass through that port This is useful if you want to set up VLAN groups on end devices without having to configure the same VLAN groups on intermediary devices
128. D Link or for which the purchase price is refunded shall become the property of D Link upon replacement or refund Limited Software Warranty D Link warrants that the software portion of the product Software will substantially conform to D Link s then current functional specifications for the Software as set forth in the applicable documentation from the date of original retail purchase of the Software for a period of ninety 90 days Software Warranty Period provided that the Software is properly installed on approved hardware and operated as contemplated in its documentation D Link further warrants that during the Software Warranty Period the magnetic media on which D Link delivers the Software will be free of physical defects The customer s sole and exclusive remedy and the entire liability of D Link and its suppliers under this Limited Warranty will be at D Link s option to replace the non conforming Software or defective media with software that substantially conforms to D Link s functional specifications for the Software or to refund the portion of the actual purchase price paid that is attributable to the Software Except as otherwise agreed by D Link in writing the replacement Software is provided only to the original licensee and is subject to the terms and conditions of the license granted by D Link for the Software Replacement Software will be warranted for the remainder of the original Warranty Period and is subj
129. D Link melalui telepon Tel 62 21 5731610 Dukungan Teknis D Link melalui Internet Email support dlink co id Website http support dlink co id D Link Building Networks for People Technical Support ORM S ERU EPULES MBE WET FACIAL Web V4 FANS2L 9 XE Sk COIT MS KE reo ESE lO VARIAR TAZA DIF Av TZIFPI E FIVA FFSCEMCEET Z4 Uv2Zv N7 Web tb URL http www dlink jp com D Link Building Networks for People BAN SC FF FT EAE D Link HEA ARE ATER AD FI FR AOU IERHAARMKIL AHRE 36 5 MADAD B 26F 02 05 z amp AB 100013 AK MISH DAI 8008296688 028 66052968 LARIMER 028 85176948 eS Lei Ibm ARMRAK ARE 36 5 MR RG BE 26F 02 05 HB 100013 SH LAG 010 58257789 HI MER 010 58257790 WHE http www dlink com cn Oat Aaa F09 00 1 18 00 D Link Building Networks for People
130. E RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THE PRODUCT RELATING TO WARRANTY SERVICE OR ARISING OUT OF ANY BREACH OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY EVEN IF D LINK HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES THE SOLE REMEDY FOR A BREACH OF THE FOREGOING LIMITED WARRANTY IS REPAIR REPLACEMENT OR REFUND OF THE DEFECTIVE OR NON CONFORMING PRODUCT GOVERNING LAW This Limited Warranty shall be governed by the laws of the state of California Some states do not allow exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages or limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts so the foregoing limitations and exclusions may not apply This limited warranty provides specific legal rights and the product owner may also have other rights which vary from state to state Trademarks Copyright 2002 D Link Corporation Contents subject to change without prior notice D Link is a registered trademark of D Link Corporation D Link Systems Inc All other trademarks belong to their respective proprietors Copyright Statement No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form or by any means or used to make any derivative such as translation transformation or adaptation without permission from D Link Corporation D Link Systems Inc as stipulated by the United States Copyright Act of 1976 FCC Warning This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits ar
131. Entry 1 10 Apply CO No Limit EA E E Ei 3 1 Disabled Disabled Enabled 3 2 Disabled Disabled Enabled E Disabled Disabled Enabled 4 Disabled Disabled Enabled 3 Disabled Disabled Enabled 6 Disabled Disabled Enabled 5 E Disabled Disabled Enabled 5 5 Disabled Disabled Enabled 3 Disabled Disabled Enabled 10 Disabled Disabled Enabled E 11 Disabled Disabled Enabled 3 l2 Disabled Disabled Enabled 13 Disabled Disabled Enabled 3 14 Disabled Disabled Enabled 5 15 Disabled Disabled Enabled 3 16 Disabled Disabled Enabled 1 Disabled Disabled Enabled E 18 Disabled Disabled Enabled 13 Disabled Disabled Enabled 20 Disabled Disabled Enabled 5 21 Disabled Disabled Enabled 22 Disabled Disabled Enabled D Disabled Disabled Enabled 24 Disabled Disabled Enabled 5 i Disabled Disabled Enabled 3 25 Disabled Disabled Enabled j EN Disabled Disabled Enabled 5 25 Disabled Disabled Enabled E Figure 10 5 IMP Port Settings window The following fields can be set or modified Parameter Description From Port To Port Select a port or range of ports to set for IP MAC Binding Use the pull down menu to enable or disable these ports for IP MAC Binding Strict This mode provides a stricter method of control If the user selects this mode all packets will be sent to the CPU thus all packets will not be forwarded by the hardware until the S W learns 188 packets will be dropped The default mode is str
132. F THE PRODUCT INCONVENIENCE OR DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER WHETHER DIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL LOSS OF REVENUE OR PROFIT WORK STOPPAGE COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION FAILURE OF OTHER EQUIPMENT OR COMPUTER PROGRAMS TO WHICH D LINK S PRODUCT IS CONNECTED WITH LOSS OF INFORMATION OR DATA CONTAINED IN STORED ON OR INTEGRATED WITH ANY PRODUCT RETURNED TO D LINK FOR WARRANTY SERVICE RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THE PRODUCT RELATING TO WARRANTY SERVICE OR ARISING OUT OF ANY BREACH OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY EVEN IF D LINK HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES THE SOLE REMEDY FOR A BREACH OF THE FOREGOING LIMITED WARRANTY IS REPAIR REPLACEMENT OR REFUND OF THE DEFECTIVE OR NON CONFORMING PRODUCT THE MAXIMUM LIABILITY OF D LINK UNDER THIS WARRANTY IS LIMITED TO THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT COVERED BY THE WARRANTY THE FOREGOING EXPRESS WRITTEN WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND ARE IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTIES OR REMEDIES EXPRESS IMPLIED OR STATUTORY Governing Law This Limited Warranty shall be governed by the laws of the State of California Some states do not allow exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages or limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts so the foregoing limitations and exclusions may not apply This Limited Warranty provides specific legal rights and you may also have other rights which vary from state
133. False Auto 200000 No No Auto Yes Enabled Enabled False False Auto 200000 No No Auto Yes Enabled Enabled False False Auto 200000 No No Auto Yes Enabled Enabled False False Auto 200000 No No Auto Yes Enabled Enabled False False Auto 200000 No No lt Auto Yes Enabled Enabled False False Auto 200000 No No Auto Yes Enabled Enabled False False Auto 200000 No No Auto Yes Enabled Enabled False False Auto 200000 No No Auto Yes Enabled Enabled False False Auto 200000 No No Auto Yes Enabled Enabled False False Figure 7 37 STP Port Settings window In addition to setting Spanning Tree parameters for use on the switch level the Switch allows for the configuration of groups of ports each port group of which will have its own spanning tree and will require some of its own configuration settings An STP Group will use the switch level parameters entered above with the addition of Port Priority and Port Cost An STP Group spanning tree works in the same way as the switch level spanning tree but the root bridge concept is replaced with a root port concept A root port is a port of the group that is elected based on port priority and port cost to be the connection to the network for the group Redundant links will be blocked just as redundant links are blocked on the switch level The STP on the switch level blocks redundant links between switches and similar network devices The port level STP will block redundant links w
134. H server is enabled SSH server is enabled Informational SSH server is disabled SSH server is disabled Informational Authentication Policy is enabled Authentication Policy is enabled Informational Module AAA Authentication Policy is disabled Authentication Policy is disabled Informational Module AAA Successful login through Console Successful login through Console Informational authenticated by AAA local method authenticated by AAA local method Username lt username gt Login failed through Console Login failed through Console Warning authenticated by AAA local method authenticated by AAA local method Username lt username gt Successful login through Web Successful login through Web from Informational authenticated by AAA local method lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA local method Username lt username gt Login failed through Web authenticated by Login failed failed through Web Warning AAA local method from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA local method Username lt username gt Successful login through Web SSL Successful login through Web Informational authenticated by AAA local method SSL from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA local method Username lt username gt Login failed through Web SSL Login failed through Web SSL authenticated by AAA local method from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA local method Username lt username gt Successful login through Telnet
135. LAN V2 are incapable of sharing information with each other and the Overlapping VLAN configuration has been successfully created 89 VLAN and Trunk Groups The members of a trunk group have the same VLAN setting Any VLAN setting on the members of a trunk group will apply to the other member ports Static VLAN Entry To view this window click L2 Features gt VLAN gt Static VLAN Entry which will reveal the following window Add Add ar Configure LAN by VID List Total Entries l 1 default laos Macdif Ix Figure 7 5 Static VLANs Entry Settings window The 802 1Q Static VLANs window lists all previously configured VLANs by VLAN ID and VLAN Name To delete an existing 802 1Q VLAN click the corresponding Las button under the Delete heading To create a new 802 1Q VLAN click the Add button in the 802 1Q Static VLANs window A new window will appear as shown below to configure the port settings and to assign a unique name and number to the new VLAN See the table below for a description of the parameters in the new window YLAN Name Advertisement so D op os 4 5 b 7 s p go n d ms a O O O FE r et up m E Na wi a H s OO Is o OO 9 OO Is a I zm m y E E m cer he efefolnl efefola O 9l QDESJEOOOGE 2 O O Port Settings 15 2 O O OO O Ll O O 5 gt m m a F d F J Im C U
136. LED indicators of the Switch Section 3 Connecting the Switch Tells how you can connect the Switch to your Ethernet Fast Ethernet network Section 4 Introduction to Switch Management Introduces basic Switch management features including password protection SNMP settings IP address assignment and connecting devices to the Switch Section 5 Introduction to Web based Switch Management Talks about connecting to and using the Web based switch management feature on the Switch Section 6 Administration A detailed discussion about configuring the basic functions of the Switch including Device Information IP Address Port Configuration DHCP BOOTP Relay User Accounts Cable Diagnostics Port Mirroring System Log Settings Log Settings SNTP Settings MAC Notification Settings TFTP Services Multiple Image Services Ping Test Safeguard Engine SNMP Manager Single IP Settings Forwarding amp Filtering and SMTP Service Section 7 Layer 2 Features A discussion of Layer 2 features of the Switch including VLAN QinQ Trunking IGMP Snooping MLD Snooping Spanning Tree Loopback Detection and LLDP Section 8 CoS Features information on CoS including Port Bandwidth 802 1P Default Priority 802 1P User Priority CoS Scheduling Mechanism CoS Output Scheduling Priority Settings TOS Priority Settings DSCP Priority Settings Port Mapping Priority Settings and MAC Priority Section 9 ACL Discussion on the ACL function of the Sw
137. Managed Smart amp Wireless Switches or Firewalls 0871 873 0909 09 00am 05 30pm BT 10ppm other carriers may vary Ireland Mon Fri All Products 1890 886 899 09 00am 06 00pm Sat 10 00am 02 00pm 0 05ppm peak 0 045ppm off peak Times Internet http www dlink co uk ftp ftp dlink co uk Technische Unterstutzung Deutschland Web E Mail Telefon Zeiten Osterreich Web E Mail Telefon Zeiten Schweiz Web E Mail Telefon Zeiten http www dlink de support dlink de 49 0 1805 2787 0 14 pro Minute Mo Fr 09 00 17 30 Uhr http www dlink at support dlink at 43 0 820 480084 0 116 pro Minute Mo Fr 09 00 17 30 Uhr http www dlink ch support dlink ch 41 0 848 331100 0 08 CHF pro Minute Mo Fr 09 00 17 30 Uhr Geb hren aus Mobilnetzen und von anderen Providern k nnen abweichen Geb hren aus Mobilnetzen und von anderen Providern k nnen abweichen Assistance technique Assistance technique D Link par telephone 0 820 0803 03 0 12 min la minute Lundi Vendredi de 9h a 13h et de 14h a 19h Samedi 9h a 13h et de 14h a 16h Assistance technique D Link sur internet http www dlink fr Asistencia T cnica Asistencia T cnica Telef nica de D Link 34 902 30 45 45 0 067 min De Lunes a Viernes de 9 00 a 14 00 y de 15 00 a 18 00 http www dlink es Supporto tecnico Supporto Tecnico dal lunedi al venerdi dalle ore
138. Port List below as part of the Guest VLAN Be sure that these ports are configured for this VLAN or users will be prompted with an error message Port List Set the port list of ports to be enabled for the Guest 802 1X VLAN using the pull down menus Click Apply to implement the guest 802 1X VLAN settings entered Only one VLAN may be assigned as the 802 1X Guest VLAN Initializing Ports for Port Based 802 1X Existing 802 1 X port and MAC settings are displayed and can be configured using the window below Click Security gt 802 1X gt Initialize Port s to open the following window From To ENS Pot eo w ort Auth PAR State Barkend State Oper Dir PortStatus l Force Auth SUCCESS both Authorized 2 Force Auth SUCCESS both Authorized 4 Force Auth SUCCESS both Authorized Figure 10 28 Initialize Port window This window allows initialization of a port or group of ports The Initialize Port Table in the bottom half of the window displays the current status of the port s This window displays the following information 210 Parameter Description From and To Select ports to be initialized Auth PAE State The Authenticator PAE State will display one of the following nitialize Disconnected Connecting Authenticating Authenticated Aborting Held ForceAuth ForceUnauth and N A Backend State The Backend Authentication State will display one of the following Request Resp
139. Profile Table entries created on the Switch To view the configurations for an entry click the hyperlinked Profile ID number Modify Modify Modify Figure 9 16 CPU Interface Filtering Table window To add an entry to the CPU Interface Filtering Profile Table window click the Add button This will open the CPU Interface Filtering Profile Configuration window as shown below There are three CPU Access Profile Configuration windows one for Ethernet or MAC address based profile configuration one for IP address based profile configuration and one for the Packet Content Mask Users can switch between the three CPU Access Profile Configuration windows by using the Type drop down menu The window shown below is for Ethernet CPU Interface Filtering Configuration 169 Profile ID 1 3 1 Tye Event VLAN source WLAC Destination MAC C A Ethernet Type show All CPU Interface Filtering Table Entries Figure 9 17 CPU Interface Filtering Configuration window Ethernet Parameter Description Type Select profile based on Ethernet MAC Address P address or Packet Content Mask This will change the window according to the requirements for the type of profile Select Ethernet to instruct the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header Select P to instruct the Switch to examine the IP address in each frame s header Select Packet Content Mas
140. R THE LIMITED WARRANTY PROVIDED HEREIN THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY SELECTION AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT IS WITH THE PURCHASER OF THE PRODUCT Limitation of Liability TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW D LINK IS NOT LIABLE UNDER ANY CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHER LEGAL OR EQUITABLE THEORY FOR ANY LOSS OF USE OF THE PRODUCT INCONVENIENCE OR DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER WHETHER DIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL WORK STOPPAGE COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION LOSS OF INFORMATION OR DATA CONTAINED IN STORED ON OR INTEGRATED WITH ANY PRODUCT RETURNED TO D LINK FOR WARRANTY SERVICE RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THE PRODUCT RELATING TO WARRANTY SERVICE OR ARISING OUT OF ANY BREACH OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY EVEN IF D LINK HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES THE SOLE REMEDY FOR A BREACH OF THE FOREGOING LIMITED WARRANTY IS REPAIR REPLACEMENT OR REFUND OF THE DEFECTIVE OR NON CONFORMING PRODUCT GOVERNING LAW This Limited Warranty shall be governed by the laws of the state of California Some states do not allow exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages or limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts so the foregoing limitations and exclusions may not apply This limited warranty provides specific legal nghts and the product owner may also have other rights which vary from state to state Trademarks Copyright
141. S Attack Prevention Trap Log Disabled Figure 5 2 Main Web Manager page Area Function Select the folder or window to be displayed The folder icons can be opened to display the hyper linked window buttons and subfolders contained within them Click the D Link logo to go to the D Link website Presents a graphical near real time image of the front panel of the Switch This area displays the Switch s ports and expansion modules showing port activity duplex mode or flow control depending on the specified mode Various areas of the graphic can be selected for performing management functions including port configuration Presents switch information based on your selection and the entry of configuration data NOTICE Any changes made to the Switch configuration during the current session must be saved in the Save Changes web menu explained below or use the command line interface CLI command save 23 Web Pages When you connect to the management mode of the Switch with a web browser a login window is displayed Enter a user name and password to access the Switch s management mode Below is a list and description of the main folders available in the web interface Administration Contains windows concerning configuring the basic functions of the Switch including Device Information IP Address Port Configuration DHCP BOOTP Relay User Accounts Cable Diagnostics Port Mirroring System Log Settings Log
142. Switch CS select Commander from the Role State field and click Apply The window will change once again to look like this Role State FRE v Discovery Interval EIN 30 90 sec Hold Time ME 100 255 sec Figure 6 47 SIM Settings window Commander enabled The following parameters can be set Parameters Description Use the pull down menu to either enable or disable the SIM state on the Switch Disabled will render all SIM functions on the Switch inoperable Role State Use the pull down menu to change the SIM role of the Switch The two choices are Candidate A Candidate Switch CaS is not the member of a SIM group but is connected to a Commander Switch This is the default setting for the SIM role Commander Choosing this parameter will make the Switch a Commander Switch CS The user may join other switches to this Switch over Ethernet to be part of its SIM group Choosing this option will also enable the Switch to be configured for SIM Discovery The user may set the discovery protocol interval in seconds that the Switch will send out Interval discovery packets Returning information to a Commander Switch will include information about other switches connected to it Ex MS CaS The user may set the Discovery Interval from 30 to 90 seconds Hold Time This parameter may be
143. System ipaddress xxx xxx xxx xxx z where the x s represents the corresponding number of subnets in CIDR notation The IP interface named System on the Switch can be assigned an IP address and subnet mask which can then be used to connect a management station to the Switch s Telnet or Web based management agent The system message Success indicated that the command was executed successfully The Switch can now be configured and managed via Telnet and the CLI or via the Web based management agent using the above ip address to connect to the Switch 30 Port Configuration This section contains information for configuring various attributes and properties for individual physical ports including port speed and flow control Port Settings Click Administration gt Port Configuration gt Port Settings to display the following window To configure switch ports 1 Choose the port or sequential range of ports using the From To port pull down menus Use the remaining pull down menus to configure the parameters described below i _ Flow s Tm Poti jwjPotl MiEnabled Auto Disabled Auto Enabled Apply Speed Duplex Flow Control Connection Duplex Flowttrl Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Auto Enabled Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Auto Enabled 4 Enabled Auto Disabled 1O0MF ull one Auto Enabled 4 Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Aute Enabled Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Auto Enabled 5 Enabled Auto Disab
144. UD Bo Bo Bo Bo bo P9 Bh BS Bh 3 ted j ea ce ea ay ec O ZA SEE SO ME a ee ies 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 iy 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 i 0 0 0 0 0 Le I Figure 8 9 DSCP Priority Settings window Click Apply to implement changes made 154 Port Mapping Priority Settings When using the port based priority mechanism the port based priority high or low assigned to each ingress port determines the egress queue assigned to frames arriving via the given ingress port The frames will be assigned to either the highest queue or the lowest queue Please note the following limitation exists port based CoS only supports mapping to Queue 3 Port mapping Priority Settings can be specified on this window Select a port range using the From and To drop down menus and select a Class To view this window click CoS gt Port Mapping Priority Settings Pot w Poti w ow w Peay mr sese ng des necs qe m 1 11 sae Soe eS SS SS SSS CO C Lh Bow PO e C w CO C8 Ln Bo po Exe edere eere eade edere emere c cR HEE IE q Figure 8 10 Port Mapping Priority Settings window Click Apply to implement changes made 155 MAC Priority When using the MAC Priority mechanism the packet is classified based on the MAC address field priority in the MAC priority table entries To configure a destination MAC address for a CoS queue users must adhere to the following
145. _32 47 OxFFFFFFFF 0x0 0x0 0x0 Sdr IP 4 byte profile id 3 config access_profile profile_id 3 add access_id 1 packet_content offset 12 0x81000000 E Vlan Tag 2 byte offset 16 0x08060000 a Ethernet Type 2 byte ARP offset 32 OxOA5SASASA Sdr IP 4 byte 10 90 90 90 port 1 28 den Create access profile 1 To match Ethernet Type and Source MAC address Configure access profile 1 Only if the gateway s ARP packet that contains the correct Source MAC in Ethernet frame can pass through the switch Create access profile 2 for no 802 10 header The offset 0 15 mask for Ethernet Type the significant byte are from 12 to 13 The offset 16 31 mask for Sender IP in ARP packet the significant byte are from 28 to 31 Configure access profile 2 The rest ARP packets whose Sender IP claim they are the gateway s IP will be dropped Create access profile 3 for 802 10 header The offset 0 15 mask for Vlan Tag the significant byte are from 12 to 13 The offset 16 31 mask for Ethernet Type the significant byte are from 16 to 17 The offset 32 47 mask for Sender IP in ARP packet the significant byte are from 32 to 35 Configure access profile 3 The rest ARP packets whose Sender IP claim they are the gateway s IP will be dropped FCC Warning This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasona
146. a packet toward its destination by an internetworking device full duplex A system that allows packets to be transmitted and received at the same time and in effect doubles the potential throughput of a link half duplex A system that allows packets to be transmitted and received but not at the same time Contrast with full duplex IP address Internet Protocol address A unique identifier for a device attached to a network using TCP IP The address is written as four octets separated with full stops periods and is made up of a network section an optional subnet section and a host section IPX Internetwork Packet Exchange A protocol allowing communication in a NetWare network LAN Local Area Network A network of connected computing resources such as PCs printers servers covering a relatively small geographic area usually not larger than a floor or building Characterized by high data rates and low error rates latency The delay between the time a device receives a packet and the time the packet is forwarded out of the destination port line speed See baud rate main port The port in a resilient link that carries data traffic in normal operating conditions MDI Medium Dependent Interface An Ethernet port connection where the transmitter of one device is connected to the receiver of another device MDI X Medium Dependent Interface Cross over An Ethernet port connection where the internal transmit and receive lines are
147. a router port will allow multicast packets coming from the router to be propagated through the network as well as allowing multicast messages IGMP coming from the network to be propagated to the router A router port has the following behavior E All IGMP Report packets will be forwarded to the router port E IGMP queries from the router port will be flooded to all ports All UDP multicast packets will be forwarded to the router port Because routers do not send IGMP reports or implement IGMP snooping a multicast router connected to the router port of a Layer 3 switch would not be able to receive UDP data streams unless the UDP multicast packets were all forwarded to the router port A router port will be dynamically configured when IGMP query packets RIPv2 multicast DVMRP multicast or PIM DM multicast packets are detected flowing into a port IGMP query packets Internet Group Management Protocol query packets work by controlling the flow of multicast traffic The IGMP query packets works by sending messages out to determine which devices are members of a particular multicast group the devices will respond to the query and inform the querier of its membership status RIPv2 multicast Routing Information Protocol Version 2 can be used for small networks or on the perifory of larger networks where VLSM is required RIPv2 is used to support route authentication and multicasting of route updates RIPv2 sends updates every 30 seconds and it
148. abled Enabled All Frames E 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames z 1 Lusabled Enabled All Frames 3 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames 10 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames 11 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames 12 l Disabled Enabled All Frames We 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames 14 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames 15 1 Lusabled Enabled All Frames 16 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames l7 l Disabled Enabled All Frames 18 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames 19 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames 2l 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames Z 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames EP 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames 2 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames 24 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames 25 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames 25 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames ai l Disabled Enabled All Frames 25 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames Figure 7 8 GVRP Settings window The following fields can be set Parameter Description From To These two fields allow you to specify the range of ports that will be included in the Port based VLAN that you are creating using this window GVRP The Group VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP enables the port to dynamically become a member of a VLAN GVRP is Disabled by default Ingress This field can be toggled using the space bar between Enabled and Disabled Enabled enables the port 93 to compare the VID tag of an incoming packet with the PVID number assigned to the port If the two are different the port filters drops the packet Disabled disables ingress filtering Ingress
149. ackets of which were received from this server on the authentication port and dropped for some other reason 231 RADIUS Accounting This window shows managed objects used for managing RADIUS accounting clients and the current statistics associated with them It has one row for each RADIUS authentication server that the client shares a secret with To view the RADIUS Accounting click Monitoring gt Port Access Control gt RADIUS Accounting RADIUS Accountin _ nf rcs ce eS i Serverindex InvalidServerAddr Identifier Server IP Addr Figure 11 30 RADIUS Accounting window The user may also select the desired time interval to update the statistics between s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second To clear the current statistics shown click the Clear button in the top left hand corner The following fields can be viewed Parameter Description Server IP Addr The IP address assigned to each RADIUS Accounting server that the client shares a secret with UDP Port The UDP port the client is using to send requests to this server Timeouts The number of accounting timeouts to this server After a timeout the client may retry to the same server send to a different server or give up A retry to the same server is counted as a retransmit as well as a timeout A send to a different server is counted as an Accounting Request as well as a timeout Requests The number of RADIUS Accoun
150. ailed through Telnet Warning Username username IP lt ipaddr gt Logout through Telnet Logout through Telnet Username Informational username IP lt ipaddr gt Telnet session timed out Telnet session timed out Informational Username username IP lt ipaddr gt Login failed through Telnet SNMP request received with invalid SNMP request received from Informational community string lt ipAddress gt with invalid community string i Z D lt U gt STP Topology changed Topology changed Informational Instance lt InstancelD gt port lt portNum gt New Root selected CIST MSTI New Root selected Informational Instance lt InstancelD gt Root bridge MAC lt macaddr gt Priority lt value gt BPDU Loop Back on port BPDU Loop Back on Port Warning lt portNum gt Spanning Tree Protocol is enabled Spanning Tree Protocol is enabled Informational Spanning Tree Protocol is disabled Spanning Tree Protocol is disabled Informational SSH Successful login through SSH Successful login through SSH Informational Username username IP lt ipaddr gt Login failed through SSH Warning Username username IP lt ipaddr gt Login failed through SSH 270 Logout through SSH Logout through SSH Username Informational username IP lt ipaddr gt Informational SSH session timed out SSH session timed out Username username IP lt ipaddr gt SS
151. ailed through Telnet due Enable Admin failed through to AAA server timeout or improper Telnet from lt userlP gt due to AAA configuration server timeout or improper configuration Username lt username gt Successful Enable Admin through SSH Successful Enable Admin through Informational authenticated by AAA server SSH from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt Enable Admin failed through SSH Enable Admin failed through SSH Warning authenticated by AAA server from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt Enable Admin failed through SSH due to Enable Admin failed through SSH Warning AAA server timeout or improper from lt userlP gt due to AAA server configuration timeout or improper configuration Username lt username gt AAA server response is wrong AAA server lt serverlP gt Protocol Warning lt protocolname gt response is wrong AAA doesn t support this functionality AAA doesn t support this Warning functionality AAA server connection failed AAA server lt serverlP gt Protocol Warning lt protocolname gt connection failed Port security Port security has exceeded its maximum Port security violation MAC Warning learning size and will not learn any new macaddr Port lt portNum gt addresses IP and Password IP Address change activity Management IP address was Informational changed by Username username IP
152. al downloaded by console Username lt username gt Configuration download was unsuccessful Configuration download was Warning unsuccessful Username username IP lt ipaddr gt 268 Configuration download by console was unsuccessful Configuration successfully uploaded Configuration successfully uploaded by console Configuration upload was unsuccessful Configuration upload by console was unsuccessful Log message successfully uploaded Log message successfully uploaded by console Log message upload was unsuccessful Log message upload by console was unsuccessful Interface Port link down Console Successful login through Console Web Successful login through Web Login failed through Web 269 Configuration download by console was unsuccessful Username lt username gt Configuration successfully uploaded Username username IP lt ipaddr gt Configuration successfully uploaded by console Username lt username gt Configuration upload was unsuccessful Username username IP lt ipaddr gt Configuration upload by console was unsuccessful Username lt username gt Log message successfully uploaded Username username IP lt ipaddr gt Log message successfully uploaded by console Username lt username gt Log message upload was unsuccessful Username username IP lt ipaddr gt Log message upload by console
153. all ingress ARP and IP broadcast packets for five seconds After another five second checking interval arrives the Switch will again check the ingress flow of packets If the flooding has stopped the Switch will again begin accepting all packets Yet if the checking shows that there continues to be too many packets flooding the Switch it will stop accepting all ARP and IP broadcast packets for double the time of the previous stop period This doubling of time for stopping ingress ARP and IP broadcast packets will continue until the maximum time has been reached which is 320 seconds and every stop from this point until a return to normal ingress flow would be 320 seconds For a better understanding examine the following example of the Safeguard Engine 54 60 Ti i ae Checking intervals occur every 5 seconds 0 10 20 30 40 50 Stop Ratel interval 5 Seconds 10 Seconds I 32 wA T If the second checking If the third checking If the fourth interval If the Switch detects interval reveals there are interval reveals there are reveals the packet flooding too many packets it still too many ingress still too many ingress has subsided the Switch will drop all ingress packets the Switch will packets the Switch will will return to accepting ARP and IP Stop all ARP and IP stop all ARP and IP ARP and IP broadcast broadcast packets broadcast packets for 10 broadcast packets for 20 packets for 5 secon
154. allow you to prevent unauthorized users from accessing the Switch or changing its settings This section tells how to log onto the Switch m z 1 y NOTE The passwords used to access the Switch are case sensitive therefore S is not the same as s P When you first connect to the Switch you will be presented with the first login screen NOTE Press Ctrl R to refresh the screen This command can be used at any time to force the console program in the Switch to refresh the console screen Press Enter in both the Username and Password fields You will be given access to the command prompt DES 3028G 4 shown below There is no initial username or password Leave the Username and Password fields blank DES 3028G Fast Ethernet Switch Command Line Interface Firmware Build 2 00 B26 Copyright C 2009 D Link Corporation All rights reserved UserName PassWord DES 3028G 4 Figure 4 2 Command Prompt Ps Password Protection NOTE The first user automatically gets Administrator level privileges It is recommended to create at least one Admin level user account for the Switch The Switch does not have a default user name and password One of the first tasks when settings up the Switch is to create user accounts Once logged in using a predefined administrator level user name users will have privileged access to the Switch s management software After your initial login define new passwords for both default user n
155. ames to prevent unauthorized access to the Switch and record the passwords for future reference To create an administrator level account for the Switch follow these steps At the CLI login prompt enter create account admin followed by the lt user name gt and press the Enter key The switch will then prompt the user for a password Type the lt password gt used for the administrator account being created and press the Enter key E Again the user will be prompted to enter the same password again to verify it Type the same password and press the Enter key e Successful creation of the new administrator account will be verified by a Success message 16 NOTE Passwords are case sensitive User names and passwords can be up to 15 characters in length The sample below illustrates a successful creation of a new administrator level account with the user name newmanager DES 3028G 4ff create account admin newmanager Command create account admin newmanager Enter a case sensitive new password x xxx Enter the new password again for confirmation x xxx Success DES 3028G 4 Figure 4 3 Create account command NOTICE CLI configuration commands only modify the running configuration file and are not saved when the Switch is rebooted To save all your configuration changes in nonvolatile storage you must use the save command to copy the running configuration file to the startup configuration NOTICE In ca
156. and current marked on the product s electrical ratings label The voltage and current rating of the cable should be greater than the ratings marked on the product e To help prevent electric shock plug the system and peripheral power cables into properly grounded electrical outlets These cables are equipped with three prong plugs to help ensure proper grounding Do not use adapter plugs or remove the grounding prong from a cable If you must use an extension cable use a 3 wire cable with properly grounded plugs e Observe extension cable and power strip ratings Make sure that the total ampere rating of all products plugged into the extension cable or power strip does not exceed 80 percent of the ampere ratings limit for the extension cable or power strip To help protect your system from sudden transient increases and decreases in electrical power use a surge suppressor line conditioner or uninterruptible power supply UPS Position system cables and power cables carefully route cables so that they cannot be stepped on or tripped over Be sure that nothing rests on any cables Do not modify power cables or plugs Consult a licensed electrician or your power company for site modifications Always follow your local national wiring rules When connecting or disconnecting power to hot pluggable power supplies if offered with your system observe the following guidelines Install the power supply before connecting the power cable to the p
157. any aspects of network and end station operation Spanning Tree Protocol STP A bridge based system for providing fault tolerance on networks STP works by allowing you to implement parallel paths for network traffic and ensure that redundant paths are disabled when the main paths are operational and enabled if the main paths fail stack A group of network devices that are integrated to form a single logical device standby port The port in a resilient link that will take over data transmission if the main port in the link fails switch A device which filters forwards and floods packets based on the packet s destination address The switch learns the addresses associated with each switch port and builds tables based on this information to be used for the switching decision TCP IP A layered set of communications protocols providing Telnet terminal emulation FTP file transfer and other services for communication among a wide range of computer equipment Telnet A TCP IP application protocol that provides virtual terminal service letting a user log in to another computer system and access a host as if the user were connected directly to the host TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol Allows you to transfer files such as software upgrades from a remote device using your switch s local management capabilities UDP User Datagram Protocol An Internet standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send a datagram
158. ardware defect or Software nonconformance in sufficient detail to allow D Link to confirm the same along with proof of purchase of the product such as a copy of the dated purchase invoice for the product if the product is not registered e The customer must obtain a Case ID Number from D Link Technical Support at 1 877 453 5465 who will attempt to assist the customer in resolving any suspected defects with the product If the product is considered defective the customer must obtain a Return Material Authorization RMA number by completing the RMA form and entering the assigned Case ID Number at https rma dlink com e After an RMA number is issued the defective product must be packaged securely in the original or other suitable shipping package to ensure that it will not be damaged in transit and the RMA number must be prominently marked on the outside of the package Do not include any manuals or accessories in the shipping package D Link will only replace the defective portion of the product and will not ship back any accessories e The customer is responsible for all in bound shipping charges to D Link No Cash on Delivery COD is allowed Products sent COD will either be rejected by D Link or become the property of D Link Products shall be fully insured by the customer and shipped to D Link Systems Inc 17595 Mt Herrmann Fountain Valley CA 92708 D Link will not be held responsible for any packages that are lost in transit t
159. are on the TFTP server Click Start to record the IP address of the TFTP server and to initiate the file transfer Download Configuration Enter the IP address of the TFTP server and the path and filename for the Configuration file on the TFTP server Click Start to record the IP address of the TFTP server and to initiate the file transfer Upload Configuration Enter the IP address of the TFTP server and the path and filename for the switch settings on the TFTP server Click Start to record the IP address of the TFTP server and to initiate the file transfer Upload Log Enter the IP address of the TFTP server and the path and filename for the history log on the TFTP server Click Start to record the IP address of the TFTP server and to initiate the file transfer Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the server from which to download firmware or configuration files Enter the path and filename of the firmware or configuration file to upload or download located on the TFTP server Image ID To select a firmware file from the internal Flash drive to which the firmware file will be transferred Click Start to initiate the file transfer 52 Multiple Image Services To configure the files located on the Flash memory use the following windows to guide you The Multiple Image Services folder contains windows to allow the user to view Firmware Information and to configure Firmware Image to view these windows click Administration
160. as Uxzssas Uxbsas Uxssas Uzssas lzssas lzssas lzseas xao Uxssas xB5Bas xB5Bas xB5Bas lzseas lzssas Uxssas Figure 7 10 QinQ Global State Settings window Description QinQ Global State Use the pull down menu to Enable or Disable the QinQ Global State From Port To Port A consecutive group of ports that are part of the VLAN configuration starting with the selected 96 The user can choose between UNI or NNI role UNI To select a user to network interface which specifies that communication between the specified user and a specified network will occur NNI To select a network to network interface specifies that communication between two specified networks will occur Outer TPID The Outer TPID is used for learning and switching packets The Outer TPID constructs and inserts the outer tag into the packet based on the VLAN ID and Inner Priority Note QinQ cannot be set to TPID 0x8100 Click Apply to implement changes 97 Trunking Port trunk groups are used to combine a number of ports together to make a single high bandwidth data pipeline The Switch supports up to six port trunk groups with 2 to 8 ports in each group A potential bit rate of 800 Mbps can be achieved An Example of Link Aggregation Ethernet Backbone Uplink ee PPP v up IZ xus Port Trunk Gro 32 y NEP Om Peron 2 193 at Pen C2 OR Un Do soen p f Jta e 100 Mbps 100 Mbps 100 Mbps
161. assword for authentication from the Candidate Switch before being added to the SIM group Click OK to enter the password or Cancel to exit the window Input password Password Java Applet window Figure 6 59 Input password window Remove from Group Remove an MS from the group Device Configure Will open the web manager for the specific device View Refresh Update the views with the latest status Topology Display the Topology view 76 Help About Will display the SIM information including the current SIM version Single IP Management w1 61 Copyright c 2004 D Link corporation Release Date 2005 07 14 Java Applet window Figure 6 60 About window Firmware Upgrade This screen is used to upgrade firmware from the Commander Switch to the Member Switch Member Switches will be listed in the table and will be specified by Port port on the CS where the MS resides MAC Address Model Name and Version To specify a certain Switch for firmware download click its corresponding check box in the first column To update the firmware enter the Server IP Address where the firmware resides and enter the Path Filename of the firmware Click Download to initiate the file transfer To access the following window click Administration gt Single IP Settings gt Firmware Upgrade MON I CNN 00 19 5B EF f6 E5 DES s04sP L2 switch 200 B20 Server IP Address Path Filename Figure 6 61 Firmware Upg
162. at dissipation and air circulation system components might overheat which could lead to system failure 000000000000000000000 000000000000000000000 000000000000000000000 000000000000000000000 Figure 1 13 Side panels of the DES 3028P The left hand side panel of the DES 3052P Switch contains a system fan and ventilation along the entire right side The system fan is used to dissipate heat Do not block these openings on either side of the Switch Leave at least 6 inches of space at the rear and sides of the Switch for proper ventilation Be reminded that without proper heat dissipation and air circulation system components might overheat which could lead to system failure 000000000000000000000000 000000000000000000000000 000000000000000000000000 000000000000000000000000 Figure 1 14 Side panels of the DES 3052P Gigabit Combo Ports In addition to the 24 or 48 10 100 Mbps ports the Switch features two Gigabit Ethernet Combo ports These two ports are 1000BASE T copper ports provided and Mini GBIC ports optional See the diagram below to view the two Mini GBIC port modules being plugged into the Switch Please note that although these two front panel modules can be used simultaneously the ports must be different The GBIC port will always have the highest priority MEE 26 nak amp a 1 Ow ELUND we 0 t 8 R8 8 EDO PSU 2 wives Figure 1 15 Inserting the Mini GBIC modules into the DES 3028
163. ated CPU Access Profile Rule The CPU Interface Filtering Rule Configuration window allows the user to create a rule for a previously created CPU Access Profile 174 show All CPU Interface Filtering Rule Entries Figure 9 22 CPU Interface Filtering Rule Configuration window Ethernet To set the CPU Access Rule for Ethernet adjust the following parameters and click Apply Parameters Description Profile ID This is the identifier number for this profile set Select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the Switch according to any additional rule added see below Select Deny to specify that packets that do not match the access profile are not forwarded by the Switch and will be filtered Type in a unique identifier number for this access and priority This value can be set from 7 to 5 Type Selected profile based on Ethernet MAC Address P address or Packet Content e Ethernet instructs the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header e IP instructs the Switch to examine the IP address in each frame s header Packet Content Mask instructs the Switch to examine the packet header VLAN Name Allows the entry of a name for a previously configured VLAN Source MAC Enter a MAC Address
164. ating from 802 1d STP to 802 1s MSTP RSTP and MSTP can coexist with standard STP however the benefits of RSTP and MSTP are not realized on a port where an 802 1d network connects to an 802 1w or 802 1s enabled network Migration should be set as yes on ports connected to network stations or segments that are capable of being upgraded to 802 1w RSTP or 802 1s MSTP on all or some portion of the segment Choosing the 7rue parameter designates the port as an edge port Edge ports cannot create loops however an edge port can lose edge port status if a topology change creates a potential for a loop An edge port normally should not receive BPDU packets If a BPDU packet is received it automatically loses edge port status Choosing the False parameter indicates that the port does not have edge port status Choosing the Auto parameter will indicate that the port will be able to automatically enable edge port status if needed Choosing the True parameter indicates a point to point P2P shared link P2P ports are similar to edge ports however they are restricted in that a P2P port must operate in full duplex Like edge ports P2P ports transition to a forwarding state rapidly thus benefiting from RSTP A p2p value of false indicates that the port cannot have p2p status Auto allows the port to have p2p status whenever possible and operate as if the p2p status were true If the port cannot maintain this status for example if the port is forced to half dup
165. ation and notification of user actions for security purposes utilizing via one or more centralized TACACS servers utilizing the UDP protocol for packet transmission Extended TACACS XTACACS An extension of the TACACS protocol with the ability to provide more types of authentication requests and more types of response codes than TACACS This protocol also uses UDP to transmit packets TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System plus Provides detailed access control for authentication for network devices TACACS is facilitated through Authentication commands via one or more centralized servers The TACACS protocol encrypts all traffic between the Switch and the TACACS daemon using the TCP protocol to ensure reliable delivery In order for the TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS security function to work properly a TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server must be configured on a device other than the Switch called an Authentication Server Host and it must include usernames and passwords for authentication When the user is prompted by the Switch to enter usernames and passwords for authentication the Switch contacts the TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server to verify and the server will respond with one of three messages The server verifies the username and password and the user is granted normal user privileges on the Switch The server will not accept the username and password and the user is denied access to the Swi
166. ation gt PoE System gt PoE System Configuration which will reveal the following window for the user to configure PoE System Configuration Power Limit 37 185W 185 Disconnect Method Deny Next Port v Power Limit Power Consumption Power Remained Disconnection Method 185 J 185 Deny Next Port If power disconnection method is set to deny next port then the system can not utilize out of its maximum power capacity The maximum unused watt is 19 W Figure 6 43 PoE System Configuration window 65 PoE Port Configuration To configure PoE port configuration for the Switch click Administration gt PoE System gt PoE Port Configuration which will reveal the following window for the user to configure Fart 1 v Foti Enabled Low User Define 115400 Apply Port State Friority Puwer Power Limit mW mW Low 0 Current maA status l Enabled 15400 User Defined O OF Interim state during line detection Z Enabled Low 0 15400 User Defined 0 OF Interim state during line detection 4 Enabled 0 Low 0 15400 ser Defined O 0 OF Interim state during line detection 4 Enabled 0 Low 0 15400 U ser Defined O V OE Interim state during line detection Enabled 0 Low 0 15400 U ser Defined O OE No standard PD connected Enabled 0 Low 0 15400 ser Defined O V OE Interim state during line detection F Enabled 0 Low 0 15400 ser Defined O i OF Interim state during line de
167. ation to its neighbor through ports For the receiving of LLDP packets the switch will learn the information from the LLDP packets advertised from the neighbor in the neighbor table LLDP Forward Use the drop down menu to disable or enable the LLDP forward message state Message State Message TX Interval This parameter indicates the interval at which LLDP frames are transmitted on behalf of this 5 32768 LLDP agent The default value is 30 seconds Message TX Hold This parameter is a multiplier that determines the actual TTL value by multiplying the Multiplier 2 10 message Tx interval message Tx hold multiplier The default value is 4 Relnit Delay 1 10 This parameter indicates the amount of delay from when adminStatus becomes disabled until re initialization will be attempted The default value is 2 seconds TX Delay 1 8192 This parameter indicates the delay between successive LLDP frame transmissions initiated by value or status changes in the LLDP local systems MIB The value for txDelay is set by the following range formula 1 lt txDelay lt 0 25 x msgTxInterval The default value is 2 seconds Notification Interval Used to configure the timer of notification interval for sending notification to configured SNMP trap receiver s The default value is 5 seconds Click Apply to implement changes made 132 Basic LLDP Port Settings The following window is used to set up LLDP on individual port s on the Switch To v
168. ation changes are made effective clicking the Apply button When this 1s done the settings will be immediately applied to the switching software in NV RAM and will immediately take effect Some settings though require you to restart the Switch before they will take effect Restarting the Switch erases all settings in RAM and reloads the stored settings from the NV RAM Thus it is necessary to save all setting changes to NV RAM before rebooting the switch To retain any configuration changes permanently click on the Save button in the Save Changes page as shown below 9 Save Config Saving all configurations to IN V E AME O Save Log Sawing all log intormation to HNV E AM O Save All Saving all configurations and log information to MV EAM Figure 11 33 Save Changes window 260 Logout Click the Logout button on the Logout window to immediately exit the Switch Are you sure you want logout If yes just click the Logout button and return to main page Figure 11 34 Logout window 261 Appendix A Technical Specifications Protocols IEEE 802 3 10BASE T Ethernet IEEE 802 3u 100BASE TX Fast Ethernet IEEE 802 3ab 1000BASE T Gigabit Ethernet IEEE 802 3z 1000BASE T SFP Mini GBIC IEEE 802 1D s w Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1Q VLAN IEEE 802 1p Priority Queues IEEE 802 1X Port Based Network Access Control IEEE 802 3ad Link Aggregation Control IEEE 802 3x Full duplex Flow Control IEEE 802 3 NWay auto negotiation IEEE
169. atus Some functions are hyper linked to their configuration window for easy access from the Device Information window Serial Number P45 175000019 k k kl LI System Name System Location System Contact Spanning Tree Disabled Detail settings MAC Notification Disabled Detail settings Port Mirror PEOR Detail settings Single IP Management Disabled Detail settings SSH Disabled Detail settings Disabled Detail settings supported Serial Port Auto Logout Never serial Port Baud Rate gBDD MAC Address Aging Time 10 300 1000000 Multicast Router Only Disabled Telnet TCP Port Number 1 653535 kE Web Status Enabled Web TCP Port Number 1 65535 80 RMON Status Disabled Link Aggregation Algorithm MAC Source switch 802 1X Disabled v Auth Protocol Syslog Status Disabled Port Security Trap Log Disabled ARP Aging Time 65535 al VLAN Trunk Disabled Multicast VLAN Disabled Asymmetric YLAN Disabled Password Encryption Disabled Dos Attack Prevention Trap Log Disabled Figure 6 1 Device Information window 26 The fields that can be configured are described below Parameter Description System Name Enter a system name for the Swit
170. ble click the corresponding X under the Delete heading Click the Show All Multicast Forwarding Entries link to return to the Static Multicast Forwarding Settings window 80 Multicast Filtering Mode The following figure and table describe how to set up multicast forwarding on the Switch To view this window click Administration gt Forwarding amp Filtering gt Multicast Filtering Mode Pot Pot v Forward Unregistered Groups Y Forwarding List Filtermg List Figure 6 67 Multicast Filtering Mode window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description These two drop down menus allow you to select a range of ports to which the filter settings will be applied This drop down menu allows you to select the action the Switch will take when it receives a multicast packet that is to be forwarded to one of the ports in the range specified above Forward Unregistered Groups This will instruct the Switch to forward a multicast packet whose destination is an unregistered multicast group residing within the range of ports specified above Filter Unregistered Groups This will instruct the Switch to filter any multicast packets whose destination is an unregistered multicast group residing within the range of ports specified above Click Apply to implement changes made 81 SMTP Service SMTP or Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is a function of the Switch that will send swi
171. ble Disable l Disable LX and RX Disable Disable Disable Disable e Disable TX and EX Disable Disable Disable Disable ds Disable TX and EX Disable Disable Disable Disable 2g Disable TX and EX Disable Disable Disable Disable AD Disable LX and EX Disable Disable Disable Disable Ab Disable TX and EX Disable Disable Disable Disable E Disable TX and EX Disable Disable Disable Disable 26 Disable LX and EX Disable Disable Disable Disable Figure 7 48 Basic LLDP Port Settings window The following parameters can be set or displayed 133 Parameter Description Select a port or group of ports using the pull down menus Notification State Used to configure each port for sending notification to configured SNMP trap receiver s Enable or disable each port for sending change notification to configured SNMP trap receiver s if an LLDP data change is detected in an advertisement received on the port from an LLDP neighbor The definition of change includes new available information information timeout and information update In addition the changed type includes any data update insert remove Admin Status Use the drop down menu to choose 7X Only RX Only TX and RX or Disabled Click Apply to implement changes made 802 1 Extension LLDP Port Settings The following window is used to set up 802 1 extension LLDP on individual port s on the Switch To view this window click L2 Features gt LLDP gt 802 1 Extension LLDP Port Settings 134
172. ble Entries The following parameters can be set for IP Parameter src port mask dest port mask 0000 flag mask but urg ack psh rst syn fin src port mask dest port nm Figure 9 4 Access Profile Configuration window IP Profile ID 1 256 Description Type in a unique identifier number for this profile set The number is used to set the relative priority for the profile Priority is set relative to other profiles where the lowest profile ID has the highest priority If a conflict occurs among configured access rules the profile ID establishes relative priority of the rules The value can be set from 7 to 256 however there is a limit to the total number of profiles that can be created Select Ethernet to instruct the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header Select P to instruct the Switch to examine the IP address in each frame s header Select Packet Content Mask to specify a mask to hide the content of the packet header Type Select profile based on Ethernet MAC Address IP address or packet content mask This will change the menu according to the requirements for the type of profile VLAN Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the VLAN part of each packet header and use this as the or part of the criterion for forwarding Source IP Mask Enter an IP address mask for the source IP address 159 Destination IP Mask DSCP Protocol Enter an IP address mask for the
173. ble protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with this manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense CE Mark Warning This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Warnung Dies ist ein Produkt der Klasse A Im Wohnbereich kann dieses Produkt Funkstoerungen verursachen In diesem Fall kann vom Benutzer verlangt werden angemessene Massnahmen zu ergreifen Precaucion Este es un producto de Clase A En un entorno dom stico puede causar interferencias de radio en cuyo case puede requerirse al usuario para que adopte las medidas adecuadas Attention Ceci est un produit de classe A Dans un environnement domestique ce produit pourrait causer des interf rences radio auquel cas l utilisateur devrait prendre les mesures ad quates Attenzione Il presente prodotto appartiene alla classe A Se utilizzato in ambiente domestico il prodotto pu causare interferenze radio nel cui caso e possibile che l utente debba assumere provvedimenti adeguati VCCI Warning
174. boot The IP Address Settings options are Parameter BOOTP DHCP Default Gateway VLAN Name Auto Config State Description The Switch will send out a BOOTP broadcast request when it is powered up The BOOTP protocol allows IP addresses network masks and default gateways to be assigned by a central BOOTP server If this option is set the Switch will first look for a BOOTP server to provide it with this information before using the default or previously entered settings The Switch will send out a DHCP broadcast request when it is powered on The DHCP protocol allows IP addresses network masks and default gateways to be assigned by a DHCP server If autoconfig is enabled the Switch will first look for a DHCP server to provide it with information before using the default or previously entered settings Allows the entry of an IP address Subnet Mask and a Default Gateway for the Switch These fields should be of the form xxx xxx xxx xxx where each xxx is a number represented in decimal form between O and 255 This address should be a unique address on the network assigned for use by the network administrator A Bitmask that determines the extent of the subnet that the Switch is on Should be of the form XXX XXX XXX XXX where each xxx is a number represented in decimal between 0 and 255 The value should be 255 0 0 0 for a Class A network 255 255 0 0 for a Class B network and 255 255 255 0 for a Class C network but
175. c Control mechanism which means the Switch s hardware will determine the Packet Storm based on the Threshold value stated and drop packets until the issue Is resolved Shut Down Utilizes the Switch s software Traffic Control mechanism to determine the Packet Storm occurring Once detected the port will deny all incoming traffic to the port except STP BPDU packets which are essential in keeping the Spanning Tree operational on the Switch If the Countdown timer has expired and yet the Packet Storm continues the port will be placed in rest mode and if no action is taken will enter auto recovery mode after a five minute period Choosing this option obligates the user to configure the Interval setting as well which will provide packet count samplings from the Switch s chip to determine if a Packet Storm is occurring The Count Down timer is set to determine the amount of time in minutes that the Switch will wait before shutting down the port that is experiencing a traffic storm This parameter is only useful for ports configured as Shutdown in their Action field and therefore will not operate for Hardware based Traffic Control implementations The possible time settings for this field are 0 5 30 minutes O denotes that the port will never shutdown Count Down Interval The Interval will set the time between Multicast and Broadcast packet counts sent from the Switch s chip to the Traffic Control function These packet counts are the determ
176. can be managed configured and monitored via the embedded web based HTML interface The Switch can be managed from remote stations anywhere on the network through a standard browser such as Opera Netscape Navigator Communicator or Microsoft Internet Explorer The browser acts as a universal access tool and can communicate directly with the Switch using the HTTP protocol The Web based management module and the Console program and Telnet are different ways to access the same internal switching software and configure it Thus all settings encountered in web based management are the same as those found in the console program Login to Web Manager To begin managing the Switch simply run the browser you have installed on your computer and point it to the IP address you have defined for the device The URL in the address bar should read something like http 123 123 123 123 where the numbers 123 represent the IP address of the Switch Mm lj NOTE The Factory default IP address for the Switch is 10 90 90 90 a i d This opens the management module s user authentication window as seen below 21 Connect to 10 90 90 90 DES 3Uz8P User name 7 admin v Remember my password Cancel Figure 5 1 Enter Network Password dialog Enter admin in both the User Name and Password fields and click OK This will open the Web based user interface The Switch management features available in the web based manager are explained
177. causes the system to lock up Smurf Attack A Smurf attack works by sending PING requests to an Internet broadcast address which then broadcasts all the messages received to the hosts connected subnet causing network congestion TCP Null Scan A TCP Null Scan works by using a series of strangely configured TCP packets that contain no flags to identify listening TCP ports This type of scan can penetrate some firewalls and boundary routers TCP Xmascan A TCP Xmascan works by using a series of strangely configured TCP packets that contain a sequence number of 0 FIN flags Push PSH and Urgent URG This type of scan can penetrate some firewalls and boundary routers 228 TCP SYNFIN A TCP SYNFIN works by using SYN and FIN bits set into the TCP packets These packets will leave the victim unable to get normal SYN packets and a large amount of these packets will result in the victim being blocked in CLOSE WAIT TCP SYN SrcPort less 1024 A TCP SYN SrcPort less 1024 works by sending a SYN packet with a source port less than 1024 The internet default services then uses the L4 port between 1 and 1023 All Check this box to select all attack types Set Action to Drop or Mirror the selected types of attacks E Set the State to Enabled or Disabled Click Apply to implement the changes made click the corresponding Clear to clear a particular attack type or Clear All to clear all of the attack types To view a summary of an
178. ccess Challenge packets valid or invalid received from this server Accepts The number of RADIUS Access Accept packets valid or invalid received from this server AccessRejects The number of RADIUS Access Reject packets valid or invalid received from this server RoundTripTime The time interval in hundredths of a second between the most recent Access Reply Access dieu and the Access Request that matched it from this RADIUS authentication server AccessRetrans The number of RADIUS Access Request packets retransmitted to this RADIUS authentication server PendingRequests The number of RADIUS Access Request packets destined for this server that have not yet timed out or received a response This variable is incremented when an Access Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of an Access Accept Access Reject or Access Challenge a timeout or retransmission AccessResponses The number of malformed RADIUS Access Response packets received from this server Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length Bad authenticators or Signature attributes or known types are not included as malformed access responses BadAuthenticators The number of RADIUS Access Response packets containing invalid authenticators or Signature attributes received from this server UnknownTypes The number of RADIUS packets of unknown type which were received from this server on the authentication port PacketsDropped The number of RADIUS p
179. ce Settings window and setting the Self Mail Address field The Switch can be configured to send out test mail to first ensure that the recipient will receive e mails from the SMTP server regarding the Switch To configure this test mail the SMTP function must first be enabled by configuring the SMTP State in the SMTP Service Settings window and then by sending an email using the SMTP Service window All recipients configured for SMTP will receive a sample test message from the SMTP server ensuring the reliability of this function The Switch will send out e mail to recipients when one or more of the following events occur When a cold start occurs on the Switch When a port enters a link down status When a port enters a link up status When SNMP authentication has been denied by the Switch When a switch configuration entry has been saved to the NVRAM by the Switch When an abnormality occurs on TFTP during a firmware download event This includes in process invalid file violation file not found complete and time out messages from the TFTP server When a system reset occurs on the Switch Information within the e mail from the SMTP server regarding switch events includes The source device name and IP address A timestamp denoting the identity of the SMTP server and the client that sent the message as well as the time and date of the message received from the Switch Messages that have been relayed will have timestamps for each r
180. ch if so desired This name will identify it in the Switch network System Location Enter the location of the Switch if so desired System Contact Enter a contact name for the Switch if so desired Serial Port Auto Select the logout time used for the console interface This automatically logs the user out after Logout Time an idle period of time as defined Choose from the following options 2 Minutes 5 Minutes 10 Minutes 15 Minutes or Never The default setting is 70 minutes Serial Port Baud Rate This field specifies the baud rate for the serial port on the Switch there are four possible baud rates to choose from 9600 19200 38400 and 115200 For a connection to the Switch using the CLI interface the baud rate must be set to 9600 which is the default setting MAC Address Aging Time This field specifies the length of time a learned MAC Address will remain in the forwarding table without being accessed that is how long a learned MAC Address is allowed to remain idle To change this type in a different value representing the MAC address age out time in seconds The MAC Address Aging Time can be set to any value between 70 and 1 000 000 seconds The default setting is 300 seconds IGMP Snooping To enable system wide IGMP Snooping capability select Enabled IGMP snooping is Disabled by default Enabling IGMP snooping allows you to specify use of a multicast router only see below To configure IGMP Snooping for individual
181. choose between Fuzzy and Strict In strict mode the Switch will stop receiving all ARP packets That means that whatever reasons have caused the high CPU utilization the Switch will reluctantly processes any ARP packets in exhausted mode In fuzzy mode the Switch will adjust the bandwidth dynamically depending on some reasonable algorithm Safeguard Engine Displays the current state of the Safeguard Engine Current Status 56 SNMP Manager SNMP Settings Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is an OSI Layer 7 Application Layer designed specifically for managing and monitoring network devices SNMP enables network management stations to read and modify the settings of gateways routers switches and other network devices Use SNMP to configure system features for proper operation monitor performance and detect potential problems in the Switch switch group or network Managed devices that support SNMP include software referred to as an agent which runs locally on the device A defined set of variables managed objects is maintained by the SNMP agent and used to manage the device These objects are defined in a Management Information Base MIB which provides a standard presentation of the information controlled by the on board SNMP agent SNMP defines both the format of the MIB specifications and the protocol used to access this information over the network The DES 3028 28P 28G 52 52P supports the SNMP versions 1 2c a
182. ck the CPU Utilization Settings button which will alter the previous window to look like this 55 Enabled Rising Threshold 20 100 o Falling Threshold 20 0 100 5 Disabled Fuzzy Safeguard Engine Current Status normal mode Developed by D Link the Safeguard Engine is a robust and innovative technology which will automatically reduce the negative impact of repeated packet flooding to the Switch s CPU As a result D Link Switches will be better protected from frequent interruptions by malicious viruses or worm attacks Figure 6 29 Safeguard Engine Settings window CPU Utilization Settings To set the Safeguard Engine for the Switch complete the following fields Parameter Description State Toggle this field to either Enabled or Disabled for the Safeguard Engine of the Switch Rising Threshold Used to configure the acceptable level of CPU utilization before the Safeguard Engine mechanism is enabled Once the CPU utilization reaches this percentage level the Switch will move into the Exhausted state Falling Threshold Used to configure the acceptable level of CPU utilization as a percentage where the Switch leaves the Exhausted state and returns to normal mode Trap Log Use the pull down menu to enable or disable the sending of messages to the device s SNMP agent and switch log once the Safeguard Engine has been activated by a high CPU utilization rate You can
183. count gt Port Warning lt portNum gt MAC lt macaddr gt 802 1x Authentication failure for the radius server lt server_ip gt timeout from Username lt user_account gt Port lt portNum gt MAC lt macaddr gt 802 1x Authentication failure for the 802 1X client session timeout from Username lt user_account gt Warning Port lt portNum gt MAC lt macaddr gt 802 1x Authentication success from Username lt user_account gt Port lt portNum gt MAC lt macaddr gt Informational rfc2819 RMON MIB ric2819 RMON MIB V2 LLDP MIB IIdpStatsRemTablesAgeouts SNMPv2 MIB SNMPv2 MIB A ee SNMPv2 MIB iflndex rfc2863 ifAdminStatus IF MIB ifOperStatus alarmVariable alarmSampleType alarmValue alarmFalling Threshold IldpStatsRemTablesIinserts IldpStatsRemTablesDeletes IldpStatsRemTablesDrops 278 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 4 ifAdminStatus E a RN ifOperStatus newRoot None ia 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 1 BRIDGE MIB topologyChange None r c1493 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 2 BRIDGE MIB Proprietary Trap List E O romat memamo 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 25 5 0 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 25 5 0 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 19 4 1 0 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 19 4 1 0 2 swlpMacBindingViolationTrap swlpMacBindingPorts IP MAC BIND MIB 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 23 5 0 1 swlpMacBindingViolationIP swlpMacBindingViolationMac agentGratuitousARP Trap agentGratuitousARPlpAddr Genmgmt 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 1 7 2 0 5 agentGratuitou
184. custom subnet masks are allowed IP address that determines where packets with a destination address outside the current subnet should be sent This is usually the address of a router or a host acting as an IP gateway If your network is not part of an intranet or you do not want the Switch to be accessible outside your local network you can leave this field unchanged This allows the entry of a VLAN Name from which a management station will be allowed to manage the Switch using TCP IP in band via web manager or Telnet Management stations that are on VLANs other than the one entered here will not be able to manage the Switch in band unless their IP addresses are entered in the Security IP Management window If VLANs have not yet been configured for the Switch the default VLAN contains all of the Switch s ports There are no entries in the Security IP Management table by default so any management station that can connect to the Switch can access the Switch until a management VLAN is specified or Management Station IP Addresses are assigned When autoconfig is Enabled the Switch is instructed to get a configuration file via TFTP and it becomes a DHCP client automatically The configuration file will be loaded upon booting up In order to use Auto Config the DHCP server must be set up to deliver the TFTP server IP address and configuration file name information in the DHCP reply packet The TFTP server must be running and have the requested
185. d value 0 15 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from the beginning of the packet to the 15th byte value 16 31 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 16 to byte 31 value 32 47 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 32 to byte 47 value 48 63 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 48 to byte 63 value 64 79 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 64 to byte 79 173 Click Apply to implement changes made To establish the rule for a previously created CPU Access Profile Click ACL gt CPU Interface Filtering gt CPU Interface Filtering Profile Table Add Profile Total Rule Entnes 0 CPU Interface Filtering Table Pale TD Ethernet Madify Packet Content ladify View Figure 9 20 CPU Interface Filtering Profile Table window Add In this window the user may add a rule to a previously created CPU access profile by clicking the corresponding Modify button of the entry to configure Ethernet IP or Packet Content Mask Add Profile ID l Permit Ethernet 1 7E Show All CPU Interface Filtermo Entries Figure 9 21 CPU Interface Filtering Rule Table window Click the Add button to continue on to the CPU Interface Filtering Rule Table window A new and unique window for Ethernet IP and Packet Content will open as shown in the examples below To change a rule for a previously cre
186. d Forbidden Select this to specify the port as not being a member of the VLAN and that the port is forbidden from becoming a member of the VLAN dynamically Click Apply to implement changes made Click the Show All Static VLAN Entries link to return to the 802 1Q Static VLANs window To add a new 802 1Q Static Multiple VLAN by VID List click the Add or Configure VLAN by VID List in the Static VLAN Entry window the following window will be displayed VID List Action Advertis ement Create v Disabled v TITRE GENES 6 000070373 None O O CU O CO m IA Egress LAE MEUSE 2 O Forbidden OQ O 7 4 b3 JIM baud ma 9 e O Forbidden Q O show All Static Y LAN Entries Figure 7 7 802 1Q Static VLANs window Add or Configure VLAN by VID List The following fields can then be set Parameter Description VID List Allows the entry of a VLAN ID in the Add dialog box or displays the VLAN ID of an existing e 9 O ia a EIE gt jejeje Sai JEDE SO ia da JDIEIEIIEIEIEIE 0 LINE j OCIO gt gt QOO 9s o O pi ee VLAN in the Modify dialog box VLANs can be identified by their VID Action Choose an action to Create Configure or Delete an 802 1Q Static VLAN Advertisement Use the pull down menu to Enable or Disable the Advertisement broadcast on the VLAN Port Settings Allows an individual port to be sp
187. d The addresses telephone fax list of the nearest Authorized D Link Service Office is provided in the back of this manual FAILURE TO PROPERLY COMPLETE AND TIMELY RETURN THE REGISTRATION CARD MAY AFFECT THE WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT Submitting A Claim Any claim under this limited warranty must be submitted in writing before the end of the Warranty Period to an Authorized D Link Service Office The claim must include a written description of the Hardware defect or Software nonconformance in sufficient detail to allow D Link to confirm the same The original product owner must obtain a Return Material Authorization RMA number from the Authorized D Link Service Office and if requested provide written proof of purchase of the product such as a copy of the dated purchase invoice for the product before the warranty service is provided After an RMA number is issued the defective product must be packaged securely in the original or other suitable shipping package to ensure that it will not be damaged in transit and the RMA number must be prominently marked on the outside of the package The packaged product shall be insured and shipped to Authorized D Link Service Office with all shipping costs prepaid D Link may reject or return any product that is not packaged and shipped in strict compliance with the foregoing requirements or for which an RMA number is not visible from the outside of the package The product owner agrees to pay D Link s reasonable handlin
188. d on the value of the tagged priority The tagged priority can be designated to any of the available queues When TOS is set to enable DSCP cannot be used and when DSCP is set to enable TOS cannot be used TOS Priority Settings can be specified on this window Use the drop down menus to select a value for TOS and Class ID To view this window click CoS gt TOS Priority Settings OS O O O O OOO 0 1 3 5 7 Figure 8 8 TOS Priority Settings window Click Apply to implement changes made 153 DSCP Priority Settings When using the DSCP TOS priority mechanism the packet is classified based on the DSCP TOS field in the IP header If the tag is present the packet is assigned to a programmable egress queue based on the value of the tagged priority The tagged priority can be designated to any of the available queues When a packet is received containing this DSCP tag it will be mapped to the CoS queue configured here These settings will only take effect if at least one of the priority settings per port is configured for DSCP When DSCP is set to enable TOS cannot be used and when TOS is set to enable DSCP cannot be used DSCP Priority Settings can be specified on this window Enter a DSCP value and select a Class ID between 0 and 3 To view this window click CoS gt DSCP Priority Settings re hk e EE n 3 Apply uc O3 LA Jd uu ba c l a ee e om LA ouo Bo LW LW Ld
189. ddress scheme The Switch is also assigned a unique MAC address by the factory This MAC address cannot be changed and can be found by entering the command show switch into the command line interface as shown below 18 DES 3028G 4 show switch Command show switch Device Type MAC Address IP Address VLAN Name Subnet Mask Default Gateway Boot PROM Version Firmware Version Hardware Version Serial Number System Name System Location System Contact Spanning Tree GVRP IGMP Snooping VLAN trunk 802 1X TELNET WEB RMON SSH DES 3028G Fast Ethernet Switch 00 21 91 98 60 77 10 73 21 11 Manual default 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Build 1 00 B06 Build 2 00 B26 A1 P4IG188000007 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled TCP 23 Enabled TCP 80 Disabled Disabled CTRL C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page ENTER Next Entry a All Figure 4 4 Show switch command The Switch s MAC address can also be found from the Web management program on the Switch Information Basic Settings window on the Configuration menu The IP address for the Switch must be set before 1t can be managed with the Web based manager The Switch IP address can be automatically set using BOOTP or DHCP protocols in which case the actual address assigned to the Switch must be known The IP address may be set using the Command Line Interface CLI over the console serial port as follows Starting at the command line prompt enter the co
190. de for DES 3028P DES Green Solid Light PoE Mode 3052P When there is a secure Sold Green 100Mbps Fast Ethernet connection or link at any of the ports When there is reception or transmission i e Activity Blinking Green Act of data occurring at a Fast Ethernet connected Link Act Speed Green Amber port When there is a secure Solid Amber 10Mbps Ethernet connection or link at any of the ports LED Per 10 100 Mbps UR transmission i e Activity Port i ead Act of data occurring at an Ethernet connected port Solid Green Powered device is connected Blinkin Port has detected a error Green 9 condition Powered Device may receive power from an AC power En source or no 802 3af PD is found When there is a secure Solid Green 1000Mbps connection or link at any of the ports When there is reception or transmission i e Activity Eun Act of data occurring at a 1000Mbps connected port Link Act Speed When there is a secure mode for Green Amber Solid Amber 10 100Mbps Fast Ethernet 1000BASE T ports connection or link at any of the ports When there is reception or transmission i e Activity Blinking Amber Act of data occurring at a Fast Ethernet connected LED Per GE Port port Light off When there is a secure Solid Green 1000Mbps connection or link at the ports When there is reception or T transmission i e Activity dise Act of data occurring at a Link Act
191. dentifier number for this profile set This value can be set from 7 to 256 Type Select profile based on Ethernet MAC Address P address or Packet Content Mask This will change the menu according to the requirements for the type of profile Select Ethernet to instruct the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header Select P to instruct the Switch to examine the IP address in each frame s header Select Packet Content Mask to specify a mask to hide the content of the packet header This field will instruct the Switch to mask the packet header beginning with the offset value specified value 0 15 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from the beginning of the packet to the 16th byte value 16 31 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 16 to byte value 32 47 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 32 to byte 4T value 48 63 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 48 to byte 63 value 64 79 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 64 to byte 79 With this advanced unique Packet Content Mask also known as Packet Content Access Control List ACL D Link xStack switch family can effectively mitigate some network attacks 161 like the common ARP Spoofing attack that is wide spread today This is the reason why Packet Content ACL is able to inspect any specified content of a packet in different protocol laye
192. describes the specifics of the action 34 DHCP BOOTP Relay To enable and configure DHCP BOOTP Relay Global Settings on the Switch click Administration gt DHCP BOOTP Relay gt DHCP BOOTP Relay Global Settings DHCP BOOTP Relay Global Settings BOOTP Relay State Disabled v BOOTP Relay Hops Count Limit 1 16 4 BOOTP Relay Time Threshold 0 65535 i DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 State Disabled v DHCP Relay Azent Information Option 82 Check Disabled v DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 Policy Replace DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 32 Remote ID Default v 21 Figure 6 6 DHCP BOOTP Relay Global Settings window The following fields can be set Parameter Description BOOTP Relay State This field can be toggled between Enabled and Disabled using the pull down menu It is used to enable or disable the DHCP BOOTP Relay service on the Switch The default is Disabled BOOTP Relay Hops This field allows an entry between 7 and 16 to define the maximum number of relay hops Count Limit 1 16 DHCP BOOTP messages can be forwarded across The default hop count is 4 BOOTP Relay Time Allows an entry between 0 and 65535 seconds and define
193. dow click CoS gt Port Bandwidth Poti w Poti Y Both Disabled 64 Apply Pot m Rate TX Rate Effective RX Effective TX EKbit sec Ebit sec EK bit sec Kbit sec i No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit 2 No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit 3 No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit A No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit 5 No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit 6 No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit 7 No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit 8 No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit 9 No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit 10 No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit 11 No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit E No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit 13 No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit 14 No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit 15 No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit 16 No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit 17 No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit 18 No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit 19 No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit 20 No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit 21 No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit 22 No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit 23 No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit 24 No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit 25 No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit 26 No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit 27 No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit 28 No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit Note To perform precise bandwidth control itis required to enable the flow control to mitigate the retransimission o TC P traffic Figure 8 2 Port Bandwidth window The following para
194. ds seconds 5 2 10 seconds 10 2 20 Safeguard Engine Checking Interval Example Figure 6 27 Safeguard Engine example For every consecutive checking interval that reveals a packet flooding issue the Switch will double the time it will discard ingress ARP and IP broadcast packets In the example above the Switch doubled the time for dropping ARP and IP broadcast packets when consecutive flooding issues were detected at 5 second intervals First stop 5 seconds second stop 10 seconds third stop 20 seconds Once the flooding is no longer detected the wait period for dropping ARP and IP broadcast packets will return to 5 seconds and the process will resume NOTE While in Exhausted mode only trusted IP addresses are accepted to connect to the Switch To configure the Safeguard Engine for the Switch click Administration gt Safeguard Engine gt Safeguard Engine Settings which will open the following window Disabled CPU Utilization Settings Apply Developed by D Link the Sateguard Engine is a robust and innovative technology which will automatically reduce the negative impact of repeated packet flooding to e Switchs CPU As a result D Link Switches will be better protected trom frequent interruptions by malicious viruses or worm attacks Figure 6 28 Safeguard Engine Settings window To configure the Switch s Safeguard Engine change the State to Enabled To configure the parameters for the Safeguard Engine cli
195. e Access Profile Table CPU Interface Filtering Time Range The DES 3028 28P 28G 52 52P Switches allow you to configure a time period when each Access Profile will be active Use the window below to name the time range and then specify when the Access Profile that will be configured below will be active To view this window click ACL gt Time Range Range Name Hours HH MM SS m Tal 00 00 m Y End Time 00 00 00 Weekdays Mon O Tue O Wed O Thu O En O Sat O Sun Total Entries 0 Figure 9 1 Time Range window Press the Apply button to make the time range current Access Profile Table Access profiles allow you to establish criteria to determine whether or not the Switch will forward packets based on the information contained in each packet s header Creating an access profile is divided into two basic parts The first is to specify which part or parts of a frame the Switch will examine such as the MAC source address or the IP destination address The second part is entering the criteria the Switch will use to determine what to do with the frame To display the currently configured Access Profiles on the Switch click ACL gt Access Profile Table Total Used Rule Entnes 0 Total Unused Rule Entries 256 Add Clear All Profile ID Ethernet IP Packet Content Figure 9 2 Acces
196. e stream cipher RC4 encryption with 128 MD5 bit keys and the MD5 Hash Algorithm Use the pull down menu to enable or disable this ciphersuite This field is Enabled by default RSA with 3DES EDE This ciphersuite combines the RSA key exchange CBC Block Cipher 3DES EDE CBC SHA encryption and the SHA Hash Algorithm Use the pull down menu to enable or disable this ciphersuite This field is Enabled by default DHS DSS with 3DES This ciphersuite combines the DSA Diffie Hellman key exchange CBC Block Cipher EDE CBC SHA 3DES_EDE encryption and SHA Hash Algorithm Use the pull down menu to enable or disable this ciphersuite This field is Enabled by default RSA EXPORT with This ciphersuite combines the RSA Export key exchange and stream cipher RC4 encryption RC4 40 MD5 with 40 bit keys Use the pull down menu to enable or disable this ciphersuite This field is Enabled by default NOTE For more information on SSL and its functions see the DES 3028 28P 28G 52 52P CLI Manual located on the documentation CD of this product NOTE Enabling the SSL command will disable the web based switch management To log on to the Switch again the header of the URL must begin with https Entering anything else into the address field of the web browser will result in an error and no authentication will be granted 193 SSH SSH is an abbreviation of Secure Shell which is a program allowing secure remote login and secure network services o
197. e SNMP User Table Configuration window click on the Add button on the SNMP User Table window This will open the SNMP User Table Configuration window as shown below r Name Group Name SNMP V3 Encryption Jencrypted Auth Protocol Password PF OE Priv Protocol Password Show All SHME User Table Entries Figure 6 33 SNMP User Table Configuration window The following parameters can set Parameter Description UserName Enter an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters This is used to identify the SNMP user This name is used to specify the SNMP group created to which the SNMP user will belong SNMP V3 Encryption Checking the corresponding box will enable encryption for SNMP V3 and is only operable in SNMP V3 mode Auth Protocol MD5 Specifies that the HMAC MD5 96 authentication level will be used This field is only operable when V3 is selected in the SNMP Version field and the Encryption field has been checked This field will require the user to enter a password SHA Specifies that the HMAC SHA authentication protocol will be used This field is only operable when V3 is selected in the SNMP Version field and the Encryption field has been checked This field will require the user to enter a password Priv Protocol None Specifies that no encryption will be used DES Specifies that DES 56 bit encryption is in use based on the CBC DES DES 56 standard This field
198. e Switch s CPU interface Employed similarly to the Access Profile feature previously mentioned CPU interface filtering examines Ethernet IP and Packet Content Mask packet headers destined for the CPU and will either forward them or filter them based on the user s implementation As an added feature for the CPU Filtering the Switch allows the CPU filtering mechanism to be enabled or disabled globally permitting the user to create various lists of rules without immediately enabling them Creating an access profile for the CPU is divided into two basic parts The first is to specify which part or parts of a frame the Switch will examine such as the MAC source address or the IP destination address The second part is entering the criteria the Switch will use to determine what to do with the frame The entire process is described below CPU Interface Filtering State In the following window the user may globally enable or disable the CPU Interface Filtering mechanism by using the pull down menu to change the running state To access this window click ACL gt CPU Interface Filtering gt CPU Interface Filtering State Choose Enabled to enable CPU packets to be scrutinized by the Switch and Disabled to disallow this scrutiny Figure 9 15 CPU Interface Filtering State window CPU Interface Filtering Profile Table Click ACL gt CPU Interface Filtering gt CPU Interface Filtering Table to display the CPU Access
199. e date of original retail purchase of the Hardware for the period set forth below applicable to the product type Warranty Period if the Hardware is used and serviced in accordance with applicable documentation provided that a completed Registration Card is returned to an Authorized D Link Service Office within ninety 90 days after the date of original retail purchase of the Hardware If a completed Registration Card is not received by an authorized D Link Service Office within such ninety 90 period then the Warranty Period shall be ninety 90 days from the date of purchase Product Type Warranty Period Product including Power Supplies and Fans One 1 Year Spare parts and pare kits Ninety 90 days D Link s sole obligation shall be to repair or replace the defective Hardware at no charge to the original owner Such repair or replacement will be rendered by D Link at an Authorized D Link Service Office The replacement Hardware need not be new or of an identical make model or part D Link may in its discretion may replace the defective Hardware or any part thereof with any reconditioned product that D Link reasonably determines 1s substantially equivalent or superior in all material respects to the defective Hardware The Warranty Period shall extend for an additional ninety 90 days after any repaired or replaced Hardware is delivered If a material defect is incapable of correction or if D Link determines in its sole discretion tha
200. e designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with this manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Tech Support Technical Support You can find software updates and user documentation on the D Link website D Link provides free technical support for customers within the United States and within Canada for the duration of the service period and warranty confirmation service during the warranty period on this product U S and Canadian customers can contact D Link technical support through our website or by phone Tech Support for customers within the United States D Link Technical Support over the Telephone USA 877 DLINK 55 877 354 6555 D Link Technical Support over the Internet http support dlink com Tech Support for customers within Canada D Link Technical Support over the Telephone 877 354 6560 D Link Technical Support over the Internet http support dlink com D Link Building Networks for People Technical Support United Kingdom Mon Fri Home Wireless Broadband 0871 873 3000 9 00am 06 00pm Sat 10 00am 02 00pm
201. e pull down to enable or disable the HMAC Hash for Message Authentication Code mechanism utilizing the RSA encryption algorithm The default is Enabled HMAC DSA Use the pull down to enable or disable the HMAC Hash for Message Authentication Code mechanism utilizing the Digital Signature Algorithm encryption The default is Enabled Click Apply to implement changes made 196 SSH User Authentication The following windows are Mote Maximum of 8 entries used to configure parameters for users attempting to access access the following window click Security gt SSH gt SSH dmn Password User User Authentication Mode Password Figure 10 12 SSH User Authentication Mode window In the example window to the right the User Account admin has been E ci previously set using the User Accounts Auth Mod Password B window in the Administration folder A Mimi User Account MUST be set in order to Ws MESKET T set the parameters for the SSH user To Hast IP configure the parameters for a SSH user gat click on the hyperlinked User Name in the SSH User Authentication Mode we window which will reveal the following show All User Authentication Entries window to configure Figure 10 13 SSH User window The user may set the following parameters Parameter Description Enter a User Name of no more than 15 characters to ident
202. e the source IP address of incoming packets sent by the host before IP being forwarded to the source port Click Apply to implement settings made To return to the IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN Entries window click the hyperlinked Show IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN Entries To edit the Group List Settings for a particular entry click the corresponding Modify button the following window will appear YLAN Name Multicast Group List Pe Remove All Multicast Group List Delete Chow IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN Entries 109 Figure 7 24 IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN Group List Settings window Enter a Multicast Group List for a particular entry and click Add the new IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN Group List entry will be displayed on the IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN Group List table on the lower half of the window To remove an entry click its corresponding Delete button in the IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN Group List table to remove all entries click Remove All IP Multicast Filter Profile Settings The IP Multicast Filter Profile Settings window allows the user to add a profile to which multicast address es reports are to be received on specified ports on the Switch This function will therefore limit the number of reports received and the number of multicast groups configured on the Switch The user may set an IP Multicast address or range of IP Multicast addresses to accept reports Permit that come into t
203. ecified as member of a VLAN Tag Specifies the port as either 802 1Q tagging or 802 1Q untagged Checking the box will desig nate the port as Tagged Allows an individual port to be specified as a non VLAN member Select this to specify the port as a static member of the VLAN Egress member ports are ports that will be transmitting traffic for the VLAN These ports can be either tagged or untagged Forbidden Select this to specify the port as not being a member of the VLAN and that the port is forbidden from becoming a member of the VLAN dynamically Click Apply to implement changes made Click the Show All Static VLAN Entries link to return to the 802 1Q Static VLANs window GVRP Settings The GVRP Settings window shown below allows you to determine whether the Switch will share its VLAN configuration information with other GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP enabled switches In addition Ingress Checking can be used to limit traffic by filtering incoming packets whose PVID does not match the PVID of the port Results can be seen in the table under the configuration settings as seen below To view this window click L2 Features gt VLAN gt GVRP Settings 92 Pot Poti v Disabled Enabled Admit All v Ingress Check Acceptable Frame Type 1 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames E 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames E 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames 4 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames 5 l Disabled Enabled All Frames b 1 Dis
204. ect to the same limitations and exclusions If a material non conformance is incapable of correction or if D Link determines in its sole discretion that it is not practical to replace the non conforming Software the price paid by the original licensee for the non conforming Software will be refunded by D Link provided that the non conforming Software and all copies thereof is first returned to D Link The license granted respecting any Software for which a refund is given automatically terminates Non Applicability of Warranty The Limited Warranty provided hereunder for Hardware and Software portions of D Link s products will not be applied to and does not cover any refurbished product and any product purchased through the inventory clearance or liquidation sale or other sales in which D Link the sellers or the liquidators expressly disclaim their warranty obligation pertaining to the product and in that case the product is being sold As Is without any warranty whatsoever including without limitation the Limited Warranty as described herein notwithstanding anything stated herein to the contrary Submitting A Claim The customer shall return the product to the original purchase point based on its return policy In case the return policy period has expired and the product is within warranty the customer shall submit a claim to D Link as outlined below e The customer must submit with the product as part of the claim a written description of the H
205. ed by different customers This is achieved by inserting SPVLAN tags into the customer s frames when they enter the service provider s network and then removing the tags when the frames leave the network Customers of a service provider may have different or specific requirements regarding their internal VLAN IDs and the number of VLANs that can be supported Therefore customers in the same service provider network may have VLAN ranges that overlap which might cause traffic to become mixed up So assigning a unique range of VLAN IDs to each customer might cause restrictions on some of their configurations requiring intense processing of VLAN mapping tables which may exceed the VLAN mapping limit QinQ uses a single service provider VLAN SPVLAN for customers who have multiple VLANs Customer s VLAN IDs are segregated within the service provider s network even when they use the same customer specific VLAN ID QinQ expands the VLAN space available while preserving the customer s original tagged packets and adding SPVLAN tags to each new frame To view this window click L2 Features gt QinQ The following fields can be set Parameter QmO Global State UNI v From To Role Outer TPID Apply wt e x 1 2 E 4 5 E q ean c ee DNNNCI NENNEN TNI xs8ab NNI Oseead NWI lzssas Uxssas Uxssas Uxssas Uzssas Uzssas lzssas lzssas lzssas lzssas Uxss
206. ee the window below for an example Figure 6 50 Device Information Utilizing the Tool Tip Setting the mouse cursor over a line between two devices will display the connection speed between the two devices as shown below defaultleh 83 32 idefaultieh 83 32 SY i defaulti30 10 015 v 5 5 N 09 00 Es 13 00 a 24 04 ES 41 00 default 35 25 3 V Figure 6 51 Port Speed Utilizing the Tool Tip 73 Right Click Right clicking on a device will allow the user to perform various functions depending on the role of the Switch in the SIM group and the icon associated with it Group Icon rdefault idefaulti35 25 al Figure 6 52 Right Clicking a Group Icon The following options may appear for the user to configure Property s Collapse To collapse the group that will be represented by a single icon E defauitas 80 77 Expand To expand the SIM group in detail Module Mame DES 3028G L2 Switch hac Address 00 21 91 98 80 77 Remote Port Mo Property To pop up a window to display the group information Local Port Mo Port Speed Close me Applet Window Figure 6 53 Property window This window holds the following information Parameter Description Device Name This field will display the Device Name of the switches in the SIM group configured by the user If no Device Name is configured by the name it will be given the name default and
207. eene eee eee eene eee e nsns ette eee eese esee esses sss s PPP eee e ee eee esee eene 14 Management SIT NR D DD mE 14 Web based ManaeermienbIntebtdeE 22 Cond bait orco a lol lic oia 14 SINMIP Based Mana eMe td A Edoardo Mene eet 14 Connecti the Console Port RS 252 DEl dll ab az Loa Fio acacia 4 Bist Dire Connec ne tothe Wii A te tra Do Vann dnce sa nas iS 16 SAN E UON E E M MEME MM uM c uM M AM 16 SNMP SUITE S adoos 17 EP AGOT CSG ING SIO IMCL onaacpdctetesst ha ikea qat do 18 Web based Switch ConfioUuratiOni aee a cioe eigo ERE eta aao Hoe os aM a Coe EE CE EA aaee ER E S asa CERE UP CEA SURE RUDR Se Ra gae Usa 21 INTO CHAO ari M 21 Eos mO Web Manara loas 21 CO DAS UI al eb e 22 NODIS Seu M MM MI E MEL DM I M ML C UM UE AU MU UNIS 24 A Aa EEANN 25 Device Informati Oi AA EEE ETA AAA AA AAA AAA AI 26 DPA GUE CSS cc M 28 setting the swith s IP Address using the Console Inter ace cer oem eh RENTE e ERE Yet a e SRM ORE a RURSUM Ye evt 30 Port Grip M 31 POtt Sep Scie ompiec o 3l POIUDESCHDLHOD Sui unu A Md ML iD A 33 Port Error Disabled seta cea 33 DHCP BOOTP Re T T ti 35 DHCP DOOTP Relay Global Se IP acter isse C a Yasue tes DULL D TI LiEEE 35 DHCP BOOTP Relay Interrdce Set WS cete tenuitate ro O A is 38 PHCP cal Relay Set tros NIUE n AD IS CUI pap dao alma TUNES A ISDN 38 User UNT tme
208. egation window Group ID state Disabled Y Type Static v Waster Port Member Ports MemnerParts E LE NE NE NE NE NE NEM NE NE NE NEM NE NEM Active Port Flooding Port None Note tis only valid to set up at most member ports of any one trunk group and a port can be a member of only one trunk group at a time A coregation Group Entries Figure 7 13 Link Aggregation Settings window Add To return to the Link Aggregration Group Entries table click the hyperlinked Show All Link Aggregration Group Entries at the bottom of the window LACP Port Settings To configure Link Aggregation Control Protocol port trunking click L2 Features gt Trunking gt LACP Port Settings to display the Port Link Aggregation Group table 99 Poti vw Poti M Passive Apply 1 Passive 2 Passrre 4 Passive 4 Passive Passive Passive E Passive z Passive 9 Passrre 10 Passive 11 Passrre 12 Passive 13 Passrre 14 Passive 15 Passive 16 Passive 17 Passive 18 Passive 19 Passive 20 Passrre al Passive 22 Passrre 2 Passive 24 Passive 25 Passive 25 Passive af Passive 26 Passive Figure 7 14 LACP Port Settings window To configure LACP port trunk settings select a port range using the From and To drop down menus select either Passive or Active Mode and then click Apply to let your changes take effect 100 IGMP Snooping Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP
209. eir corresponding check boxes Click Upload to initiate the file transfer To view this window click Administration gt Single IP Management gt Upload Log File ID Port MAC Address Model Name Version BO E d 19 5B EP s B5 DES s028P Le swatch 2 00 B20 Server IP Address Path Filename Figure 6 63 Upload Log File window Forwarding amp Filtering Unicast Forwarding To view this window click Administration gt Forwarding amp Filtering gt Unicast Forwarding This will open the following window 78 SS E rear tue hr El a Ml E AL Si RS L d 00 00 00 00 00 00 End of data Figure 6 64 Unicast Forwarding window To add or edit an entry define the following parameters and then click Add Modify Parameter Description VID The VLAN ID number of the VLAN on which the above Unicast MAC address resides MAC Address The MAC address to which packets will be statically forwarded This must be a unicast MAC address Allows the selection of the port number on which the MAC address entered above resides Click Apply to implement the changes made To delete an entry in the Static Unicast Forwarding Table click the corresponding X under the Delete heading Multicast Forwarding The following figure and table describe
210. elay The event that occurred on the Switch prompting the e mail message to be sent When an event is processed by a user such as save or firmware upgrade the IP address MAC address and User Name of the user completing the task will be sent along with the system message of the event occurred When the same event occurs more than once the second mail message and every repeating mail message following will have the system s error message placed in the subject line of the mail message The following details events occurring during the Delivery Process Urgent mail will have high priority and be immediately dispatched to recipients while normal mail will be placed in a queue for future transmission The maximum number of untransmitted mail messages placed in the queue cannot exceed 32 messages Any new messages will be discarded if the queue is full If the initial message sent to a mail recipient is not delivered it will be placed in the waiting queue until its place in the queue has been reached and then another attempt to transmit the message is made The maximum attempts for delivering mail to recipients is three Mail message delivery attempts will be tried every five minutes until the maximum number of attempts is reached Once reached and the message has not been successfully delivered the message will be dropped and not received by the mail recipient If the Switch shuts down or reboots mail messages in the waiting queue will be
211. ember Query Interval 1 25 Host Timeout 1 16711450 Router Timeout 1 16711450 Leave Timer 1 16711450 VLAN ID e Querier State Disabled Querier Router Behavior Mon Querter Ste PREM Multicast Fast Leave Disabled Data Driven Learnng Aged Out Disabled v show All IGNE Group Entries Figure 7 16 IGMP Snooping Settings window The following parameters may be viewed or modified Parameter Description VLAN ID This is the VLAN ID that along with the VLAN Name identifies the VLAN for which to modify 101 re the IGMP Snooping Settings VLAN Name This is the VLAN Name that along with the VLAN ID identifies the VLAN for which to modify the IGMP Snooping Settings Query Interval This field is used to set the time in seconds between transmitting IGMP queries Entries between 7 and 65535 seconds are allowed Default 125 Max Response Time This determines the maximum amount of time in seconds allowed before sending an IGMP response report This field allows an entry between 7 and 25 seconds Default 10 Adjust this variable acc
212. en meee eu eetoncln 218 Lost WCE OC MISES sistens dcc entum MN E LIN I I MM anew auace aelaanaieeasla nant secant A 22 Enable Memo d D1SES usd 222 Cont sure LocabEnable Pass w Ord nacio 225 Enable ACI ns dro He eds BR vo ED ooo lso ld UI bu Seu BOO 225 Traffic SeSnientatioli dod ut doe iii 226 DoS Attack Prev em On Adi 2217 hdbiniirsr pte M 232 ASIA O TT 232 A sdectseessedavscsdoasactevebsetacdeeedeussedauaessossaaievebdetacceecedesswlavecevess 233 ACCES id 234 ALAN DS ERO T DD M A PT ETAN 235 UMB CERA d id E A A H M 237 Frans ii teas p 239 Packet BEEOES uni A AAA I ETITIO IKE EID a HUE POM DIRE U E EIE do CU eo P PE 241 Received RA ERR 241 vi Poa a E S TE 243 Packe SDE naain aS 245 MAC Addres S ecr a A E E E E E 247 Quid um nn RS E e E 249 IGMP Shooping GEOUD i eesosas eaan oas eoa aaa ue od Doo eoe es irritan EEE eot eE 250 Browse Router uii m 251 VELAN EMrIi RN 251 MED STOOPDIMO GTO M 251 Browse MILD Snooping Router PO usted iii illes 252 Static ARE Sefina S orasan ea e E E E E E a aaar EE EA 253 PIR PPE DDB P M 253 Gratuitous ARP Settings e A
213. en proof of purchase of the product such as a copy of the dated purchase invoice for the product before the warranty service is provided After an RMA number is issued the defective product must be packaged securely in the original or other suitable shipping package to ensure that it will not be damaged in transit and the RMA number must be prominently marked on the outside of the package The packaged product shall be insured and shipped to Authorized D Link Service Office with all shipping costs prepaid D Link may reject or return any product that is not packaged and shipped in strict compliance with the foregoing requirements or for which an RMA number is not visible from the outside of the package The product owner agrees to pay D Link s reasonable handling and return shipping charges for any product that is not packaged and shipped in accordance with the foregoing requirements or that 1s determined by D Link not to be defective or non conforming What Is Not Covered This limited warranty provided by D Link does not cover Products that have been subjected to abuse accident alteration modification tampering negligence misuse faulty installation lack of reasonable care repair or service in any way that is not contemplated in the documentation for the product or if the model or serial number has been altered tampered with defaced or removed Initial installation installation and removal of the product for repair and shipping
214. en the user may forward these tagged packets to designated classes of service on the Switch where they will be emptied based on priority For example lets say a user wishes to have a video conference between two remotely set computers On the receiving end the administrator instructs the Switch to examine packets for this tag acquires the tagged packets and maps them to a class queue on the Switch Then in turn the administrator will set a priority for this queue so that will be emptied before any other packet is forwarded This results in the end user receiving all packets sent as quickly as possible thus prioritizing the queue and allowing for an uninterrupted stream of packets which optimizes the use of bandwidth available for the video conference Understanding CoS The Switch has four priority classes of service These priority classes of service are labeled as 3 the high class to 0 the lowest class The eight priority tags specified in IEEE 802 1p are mapped to the Switch s priority classes of service as follows Priority 0 is assigned to the Switch s Q1 class Priority 1 is assigned to the Switch s QO class Priority 2 is assigned to the Switch s QO class Priority 3 is assigned to the Switch s Q1 class Priority 4 is assigned to the Switch s Q2 class Priority 5 is assigned to the Switch s Q2 class Priority 6 is assigned to the Switch s Q3 class Priority 7 is assigned to the Switch s Q3 class For strict p
215. enable method to promote user level privileges to administrator privileges he or she will be prompted to enter the password configured here that is locally set on the Switch To view the following window click Security gt Access Authentication Control gt Configure Local Enable Password New Local Enable Password Po Confirm Local Enable Password Po Figure 10 48 Configure Local Enable Password window To set the Local Enable Password set the following parameters and click Apply Parameter Description Old Local Enabled lf a password was previously configured for this entry enter it here in order to change it to a new password New Local Enabled Enter the new password that you wish to set on the Switch to authenticate users attempting to access Administrator Level privileges on the Switch The user may set a password of up to 15 characters Confirm Local Enabled Confirm the new password entered above Entering a different password here from the one set in the New Local Enabled field will result in a fail message Enable Admin The Enable Admin window is for users who have logged on to the Switch on the normal user level and wish to be promoted to the administrator level After Click Enable Admin button will let user input the new password to logging on to the Switch users will have only user level upgrade this web management to Admin level privileges To gain access to administrator level privileges the user will
216. ent processing of packets that will just be dropped by the destination port Default VLANs The Switch initially configures one VLAN VID 1 called default The factory default setting assigns all ports on the Switch to the default Packets cannot cross VLANSs If a member of one VLAN wants to connect to another VLAN the link must be through an external router NOTE If no VLANs are configured on the Switch then all packets will be forwarded to any destination port Packets with unknown destination addresses will be flooded to all ports Broadcast and multicast packets will also be flooded to all ports An example is presented below VLAN Name Switch Ports System default 1 5 6 7 8 21 22 23 24 Engineering J2 9101 12 Marketing 3 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 4 Table 7 1 VLAN Example Assigned Ports VLAN Segmentation Take for example a packet that is transmitted by a machine on Port that is a member of VLAN 2 If the destination lies on another port found through a normal forwarding table lookup the Switch then looks to see if the other port Port 10 is a member of VLAN 2 and can therefore receive VLAN 2 packets If Port 10 is not a member of VLAN 2 then the packet will be dropped by the Switch and will not reach its destination If Port 10 is a member of VLAN 2 the packet will go through This selective forwarding feature based on VLAN criteria is how VLANs segment networks The key po
217. ent will request access to the LAN and or Switch through EAPOL packets and in turn will respond to requests from the Switch Switch Authenticator RADIUS Server Authentication Server Workstation Client Figure 10 18 The Client Authentication Process Utilizing the three roles stated above the 802 1X protocol provides a stable and secure way of authorizing and authenticating users attempting to access the network Only EAPOL traffic is allowed to pass through the specified port before a successful authentication is made This port is locked until the point when a Client with the correct username and password and MAC address if 802 1X 1s enabled by MAC address is granted access and therefore successfully unlocks the port Once unlocked normal traffic is allowed to pass through the port The following figure displays a more detailed explanation of how the authentication process is completed between the three roles stated above 02 1X Authentication process Switch RADIUS Server Workstation Authentication Server Client Authenticator ys LO y RADIUS Access Request RADIUS Access Challenge RADIUS Access Request RADIUS Access Accept Port Authorized RADIUS Account Stop RADIUS Ack Port Unauthorized OTP One Time Password Figure 10 19 The 802 1X Authentication Process The D Link implementation of 802 1X allows network administrators to choose between two types
218. er Behavior will denote that the router is sending out IGMP query packets Non Querier will denote that the router is not sending out IGMP query packets This field will only read Querier when the Querier State and the State fields have been Enabled State Select Enabled to implement IGMP Snooping This field is Disabled by default Multicast Fast Leave This parameter allows the user to enable the Fast Leave function Enabled this function will allow members of a multicast group to leave the group immediately without the implementation of the Last Member Query Timer when an IGMP Leave Report Packet is received by the Switch The default is Disabled Data Driven Learning This parameter allows the user to Enable or Disable the Data Driven Learning Aged Out Aged Out function on the Switch Click Apply to implement the new settings Click the Show All IGMP Group Entries link to return to the Current IGMP Snooping Group Entries window NOTE The Fast Leave function is intended for IGMPv2 users wishing to leave a multicast group and is best implemented on VLANs that have only one host connected to each port When one host of a group of hosts uses the Fast Leave function it may cause the inadvertent fast leave of other hosts of the group 102 Router Ports Settings A static router port is a port that has a multicast router attached to it Generally this router would have a connection to a WAN or to the Internet Establishing
219. er if a MS has its own IP address it can belong to SNMP communities to which other switches in the group including the CS do not belong 68 The Upgrade to v1 6 To better improve SIM management the DES 3028 28P 28G 52 52P Switches have been upgraded to version 1 6 in this release Many improvements have been made including 1 The Commander Switch CS now has the capability to automatically rediscover member switches that have left the SIM group either through a reboot or web malfunction This feature is accomplished through the use of Discover packets and Maintain packets that previously set SIM members will emit after a reboot Once a MS has had its MAC address and password saved to the CS s database if a reboot occurs in the MS the CS will keep this MS information in its database and when a MS has been rediscovered it will add the MS back into the SIM tree automatically No configuration will be necessary to rediscover these switches There are some instances where pre saved MS switches cannot be rediscovered For example if the Switch is still powered down if it has become the member of another group or if it has been configured to be a Commander Switch the rediscovery process cannot occur 2 The topology map now includes new features for connections that are a default 0 27 00 member of a port trunking group It will display the speed and number of Ethernet connections creating this port trunk group as shown in the adjace
220. er Ports Entries Figure 7 18 Router Ports Settings Edit window The following parameters can be viewed Parameter Description VID VLAN ID This is the VLAN ID that along with the VLAN Name identifies the VLAN where the multicast router is attached VLAN Name This is the name of the VLAN where the multicast router is attached Port Settings Select the individual ports and settings you wish to apply None No restrictions on the port dynamically becoming a router port Static Allows the selection of ports that will be router ports Forbidden Select this to specify that the port shall not be a router port Click Apply to implement the new settings Click the Show All Router Port Entries link to return to the Current Static Router Port Entries window 104 IGMP Authentication IGMP Access Authentication provides a client server authentication protocol for specified ports on the Switch This function will secure access to an IP multicast group by using a user authentication process that will insure there is more control over the access to multicast traffic Only the host port that passes the authentication process can successfully join the multicast group and receive multicast data When a host sends a join message for the interested multicast group the switch has to authenticate the request first before learning the multicast group port To do this the switch sends an access request to the authentication server for info
221. er Source over Ethernet pinout Alternative A whereby power is sent out over pins 1 2 3 and 6 Both the DES 3028P and DES 3052P work with all D Link 802 3af capable devices The DES 3028P and DES 3052P include the following PoE features Auto discovery recognizes the connection of a PD Power Device and automatically sends power to it The Auto disable feature will occur under two conditions first if the total power consumption exceeds the system power limit and second 1f the per port power consumption exceeds the per port power limit Active circuit protection automatically disables the port if there is a short Other ports will remain active PDs receive power according to the following classification PSE provides power according to the following classification po paenesw To configure the PoE features on the DES 3028P and DES 3052P click Administration PoE Configuration The PoE System window is used to assign a power limit and power disconnect method for the whole PoE system To configure the Power Limit for the PoE system enter a value between 37W and 185W for the DES 3028P and between 37W and 370W for the DES 3052P in the Power Limit field The default setting is 185W DES 3028P and 370W DES 3052P When the total consumed power exceeds the power limit the PoE controller located in the PSE disconnects the power to prevent overloading the power supply To configure PoE for the Switch click Administr
222. er defined or default Login Method List of authentication techniques for users logging on to the Switch The sequence of techniques implemented in this command will affect the authentication result For example if a user enters a sequence of techniques for example TACACS XTACACS local the Switch will send an authentication request to the first TACACS host in the server group If no response comes from the server host the Switch will send an authentication request to the second TACACS host in the server group and so on until the list is exhausted At that point the Switch will restart the same sequence with the following protocol listed XTACACS If no authentication takes place using the XTACACS list the local account database set in the Switch is used to authenticate the user When the local method is used the privilege level will be dependant on the local account privilege configured on the Switch Successful login using any of these techniques will give the user a User privilege only To upgrade his or her status to the administrator level the user must use the Enable Admin window in which the user must enter a previously configured password set by the administrator See the Enable Admin part of this section for more detailed information concerning the Enable Admin command To view the following window click Security gt Access Authentication Control gt Login Method Lists Mote Maximum of 8 I Total Entries 1 sean Metho Name
223. er end user owns the product or five 5 years after product discontinuance whichever occurs first excluding power supplies and fans e Power supplies and fans Three 3 Year e Spare parts and spare kits Ninety 90 days The customer s sole and exclusive remedy and the entire liability of D Link and its suppliers under this Limited Warranty will be at D Link s option to repair or replace the defective Hardware during the Warranty Period at no charge to the original owner or to refund the actual purchase price paid Any repair or replacement will be rendered by D Link at an Authorized D Link Service Office The replacement hardware need not be new or have an identical make model or part D Link may at its option replace the defective Hardware or any part thereof with any reconditioned product that D Link reasonably determines is substantially equivalent or superior in all material respects to the defective Hardware Repaired or replacement hardware will be warranted for the remainder of the original Warranty Period or ninety 90 days whichever is longer and is subject to the same limitations and exclusions If a material defect is incapable of correction or if D Link determines that it is not practical to repair or replace the defective Hardware the actual price paid by the original purchaser for the defective Hardware will be refunded by D Link upon return to D Link of the defective Hardware All Hardware or part thereof that is replaced by
224. er may configure the following parameters for a MSTI on the Switch Parameter Description MSTI ID Displays the MSTI ID previously set by the user This field allows the user to choose a desired method for altering the MSTI settings The user has four choices e Add Select this parameter to add VIDs to the MSTI ID in conjunction with the VID List parameter Remove Select this parameter to remove VIDs from the MSTI ID in con junction with the VID List parameter VID List 1 4094 This field is used to specify the VID range from configured VLANs set on the Switch that the user wishes to add to this MSTI ID Supported VIDs on the Switch range from ID number 1 to 4094 This parameter can only be utilized if the Type chosen is Add or Hemove Click Apply to implement changes made STP Instance Settings The following window displays MSTIs currently set on the Switch To view the following table click L2 Features gt Spanning Tree gt STP Instance Settings Instance i EX TNAM instance status Instance Priority Ype CE Disabled 42 6e Bridge Priority 32 66 sys ID ezt 0 MS TICs Disabled 427 Bridge Priority 32 68 sys ID ext 3 Figure 7 42 STP Instance Settings window The following information is displayed Parameter Description Instance Type Displays the instance type s currently configured on the Switch Each instance type is classified by a MSTI ID CIST refers to the default MSTI configuration
225. erification is found the Switch will send an authentication request to the second TACACS host in the server group and so on until the list is exhausted At that point the Switch will restart the same sequence with the following protocol listed XTACACS If no authentication takes place using the XTACACS list the Local Enable password set in the Switch is used to authenticate the user Successful authentication using any of these methods will give the user an Admin privilege Ps de gt y NOTE To set the Local Enable Password see the next section entitled Local Enable Password 222 To view the following table click Security gt Access Authentication Control gt Enable Method Lists Mote Maximum of 8 entries Total Entries 1 nable Method Lists Name X detault local enable Figure 10 45 Enable Method List Settings window To delete an Enable Method List defined by the user click the X under the Delete heading corresponding to the entry desired to be deleted To modify an Enable Method List click on its hyperlinked Method List Name To configure a Method List click the Add button Both actions will result in the same window to configure Minit MN Method 4 Show 41 Authentication Enable List Entries Figure 10 46 Enable Method List Edit window Show Al Authentication Enable List Entries Figure 10 47 Enable Method List Add window To defi
226. ermitted to use the community string to gain access to the Switch s SNMP agent Any MIB view that defines the subset of all MIB objects will be accessible to the SNMP community E Read write or read only level permission for the MIB objects accessible to the SNMP community To configure SNMP Community entries click Administration SNMP Manager SNMP Community Table which will display the following window 62 View Name Access Right Community Name Read Only v Total Entries 2 Note It 1s allowed msert 10 entries into the table only Read Write Read Only Communty Name View Name Community View Community View Figure 6 39 SNMP Community Table Configuration window The following parameters can set Parameter Description Community Name Type an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters that is used to identify members of an SNMP community This string is used like a password to give remote SNMP managers access to MIB objects in the Switch s SNMP agent View Name Type an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters that is used to identify the group of MIB objects that a remote SNMP manager is allowed to access on the Switch The view name must exist in the SNMP View Table Access Right Read Only Specifies that SNMP community members using the community string created can only read the contents of the MIBs on the Switch Read Write Specifies that
227. erval for the periodical sending of gratuitous ARP request Periodical Send packets By default the interval is 0 255 After making the desired changes click Apply to implement the new Gratuitous ARP Table entry Session Table The Session Table allows the user to view detailed information on the current configuration session of the Switch Information such as the Session ID of the user initial Login Time Live Time configuration connection From the Switch Level and Name of the user are displayed Click Reload to refresh this window To view this window click Monitoring gt Session Table Feces Total Entries 1 sion Table om Time Live Time From Level Name 00000 days 00 10 23 02 57 01 820 Serial Port E Anonymous Figure 11 28 Session Table window Port Access Control The following windows are used to monitor 802 1X statistics of the Switch on a per port basis To view the Port Access Control windows open the Monitoring folder and click the Port Access Control folder There are six windows to monitor NOTE The Authenticator State Authenticator Statistics Authenticator Session Statistics and Authenticator Diagnostics windows in this section cannot be viewed on the owitch unless 802 1X is enabled by port or by MAC address To enable 802 1X go to the Switch 802 1X entry in the DES 30xx Web Management Tool RADIUS Authentication This table contains information concerning the activity of the RADIUS authenticati
228. es an explicit tagging scheme with one level tagging 802 1Q VLAN Packet Forwarding o Packet forwarding decisions are made based upon the following three types of rules E Ingress rules rules relevant to the classification of received frames belonging to a VLAN Forwarding rules between ports decides whether to filter or forward the packet E Egress rules determines if the packet must be sent tagged or untagged 802 10 Packet Forwarding Tagging or Untagging Figure 7 1 IEEE 802 1Q Packet Forwarding 802 10 VLAN Tags The figure below shows the 802 1Q VLAN tag There are four additional octets inserted after the source MAC address Their presence is indicated by a value of 0x8100 in the EtherType field When a packet s EtherType field is equal to 0x8100 the packet carries the IEEE 802 1Q 802 1p tag The tag is contained in the following two octets and consists of 3 bits of user priority 1 bit of Canonical Format Identifier CFI used for encapsulating Token Ring packets so they can be carried across Ethernet backbones and 12 bits of VLAN ID VID The 3 bits of user priority are used by 802 1p The VID is the VLAN identifier and is used by the 802 1Q standard Because the VID is 12 bits long 4094 unique VLANs can be identified The tag is inserted into the packet header making the entire packet longer by 4 octets All of the information originally contained in the packet is retained 86 IEEE 802 1Q Tag Octets
229. es within the network will immediately update their own ARP table in accordance with the sender s MAC and IP address The format of Gratuitous ARP 1s shown in Table 5 Gratuitous ARP rn po Ethernet Header Destination Source address Ethernet Protocol H W Protocol Operation Sender H W Sender Target H W Target address type type address address address protocol address protocol length length address address 6 byte 6 byte 2 byte 2 byte 2 byte 1 byte 1 byte 2 byte 6 byte 4 byte 6 byte 4 byte FF FF FF FF FF FF 00 20 5C 01 11 11 806 ARP reply 00 20 5C 01 11 11 10 10 10 254 00 20 5C 01 11 11 10 10 10 254 Table 5 A common DoS attack today can be done by associating a nonexistent or any specified MAC address to the IP address of the network s default gateway The malicious attacker only needs to broadcast ONE Gratuitous ARP to the network claiming it is the gateway so that the whole network operation will be turned down as all packets sent through the Internet will be directed to the wrong node Likewise the attacker can either choose to forward the traffic to the actual default gateway passive sniffing or modify the data before forwarding it man in the middle attack The hacker fools the victims PC to make it believe it is a router and fools the router to make it believe it is the victim As can be seen in Figure 5 all traffic will be then sniffed by the hacker without
230. esponds to a particular subnet although not necessarily VLANSs can enhance performance by conserving bandwidth and improve security by limiting traffic to specific domains A VLAN is a collection of end nodes grouped by logic instead of physical location End nodes that frequently communicate with each other are assigned to the same VLAN regardless of where they are physically on the network Logically a VLAN can be equated to a broadcast domain because broadcast packets are forwarded to only members of the VLAN on which the broadcast was initiated Notes about VLANs on the Switch No matter what basis is used to uniquely identify end nodes and assign these nodes VLAN membership packets cannot cross VLANSs without a network device performing a routing function between the VLANs The Switch supports IEEE 802 1Q VLANs The port untagging function can be used to remove the 802 1Q tag from packet headers to maintain compatibility with devices that are tag unaware The Switch s default is to assign all ports to a single 802 1Q VLAN named default The default VLAN has a VID 1 IEEE 802 10 VLANs Some relevant terms e Tagging The act of putting 802 1Q VLAN information into the header of a packet e Untagging The act of stripping 802 1Q VLAN information out of the packet header e Ingress port A port ona switch where packets are flowing into the Switch and VLAN decisions must be made e Egress port A port on a switch where pack
231. et connection or link at any of the ports When there is reception or transmission i e Activity Act of data occurring at an Ethernet connected port No link Powered device is connected Link Act Speed Green Amber Link Act Speed mode for Green Amber 1000BASE T ports LED Per 10 100 Mbps Port ight off Port has detected a error condition Powered Device may receive power from an AC power source or no 802 3af PD is found When there is a secure 1000Mbps connection or link at any of the ports When there is reception or transmission i e Activity Act of data occurring at a 1000Mbps connected port When there is a secure 10 100Mbps Fast Ethernet connection or link at any of the ports When there is reception or transmission i e Activity Act of data occurring at a Fast Ethernet connected port x eleg zilg g lg e z ig5 el 2 e lele silla le ele 5 5 2 5 2 5 9 3 S 5 2 2 S S e 2 Q 2 9 2 2 gt 2 O 2 2 O J O o a alo a 3 38 Jo 2 e Oly a 3 9 5 5 28 EISIE z O o 2 o GO o D ey o pas gt Oo 9 o 9 2 2 D O D O g 2 g 2 g LED Per GE Port Light off When there is a secure 1000Mbps connection or link at the ports When there is reception or transmission inki i e Activity Act of data occurring at a Link Act Speed 1000Mbps connected port mode for SFP Green Amber Soli When there is a secure 100Mbps olid Amber ports connection or link at an
232. et port or specified VLAN the Switch will set these ports as dynamic router ports Once set this will ensure that all packets with a multicast router as its destination will arrive at the multicast enabled router regardless of protocol If the Router s Aging Time expires and no routing control packets or query packets are received by the port that port will be removed from being a router port To configure the settings for MLD Router Ports click L2 Features gt MLD Snooping gt MLD Snooping Router Port Settings which will open the following window Total Entries 1 VLAN ID VLAN Name default Modi I Figure 7 32 MLD Snooping Router Port Settings window To configure the router ports settings for a specified VLAN click its corresponding Modify button which will produce the following window for the user to configure 116 1 poe See NENNEN GNE AN RN NR CORN TN TN TN O O Static o s 5 O 0 Pre NN o Static O 0 000 0 O O O O O 0 o Forbidden O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Apply show All Reuter Ports Entries Figure 7 33 Router Port window Modify The following parameters can be set Parameter Description VID VLAN ID This is the VLAN ID that along with the VLAN Name identifies the VLAN where the MLD multicast router is attached VLAN Name This is the name of the VLAN where the MLD multicast router is attached Port Settings Ports on the Switch that
233. ets Errors gt Received RX Poti Y il ut Rx Error Analysis Port 1000 o l CrcError Dl 800 Undersize i r Oversize 600 500 Jabber 400 Drop 300 200 100 Unitiseci Time Interval IE Record Number 200 ShowHide i CrcError Mw Undersize i OverSize I Fragment i Jabber iw Drop Figure 11 9 Rx Error Analysis window line graph To view the Received Error Packets Table click the link View Table which will show the following table 241 Packet Analysis of Port Port 1 lis y GrcErrar Ungdersize Oe tee Fragment Jabber Drop Figure 11 10 Rx Error Analysis window table The following fields can be set Parameter Description Time Interval Select the desired setting between 7s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second Record Number Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200 The default value is 200 Counts otherwise valid packets that did not end on a byte octet boundary The number of packets detected that are less than the minimum permitted packets size of 64 bytes and have a good CRC Undersize packets usually indicate collision fragments a normal network occurrence OverSize Counts packets received that were longer than 1518 octets or if a VLAN frame is 1522 octets and less than the MAX_PKT_LEN Internally MAX_PKT_LEN is equal to 1522 The number of packets less than 64 bytes with either bad framing or an
234. ets are flowing out of the Switch either to another switch or to an end station and tagging decisions must be made IEEE 802 10 tagged VLANs are implemented on the Switch 802 1Q VLANs require tagging which enables them to span the entire network assuming all switches on the network are IEEE 802 1Q compliant VLANs allow a network to be segmented in order to reduce the size of broadcast domains All packets entering a VLAN will only be forwarded to the stations over IEEE 802 1Q enabled switches that are members of that VLAN and this includes broadcast multicast and unicast packets for unknown destinations VLANs can also provide a level of security to your network IEEE 802 1Q VLANs will only deliver packets between stations that are members of the VLAN 85 Any port can be configured as either tagging or untagging The untagging feature of IEEE 802 1Q VLANs allows VLANs to work with legacy switches that don t recognize VLAN tags in packet headers The tagging feature allows VLANs to span multiple 802 1Q compliant switches through a single physical connection and allows Spanning Tree to be enabled on all ports and work normally The IEEE 802 1Q standard restricts the forwarding of untagged packets to the VLAN of which the receiving port is a member The main characteristics of IEEE 802 1Q are as follows Assigns packets to VLANs by filtering Assumes the presence of a single global spanning tree This switch supports MSTP e Us
235. fore being forwarded by the 165 Switch The replace priority feature can only be used with DSCP value and cannot be used with the Ethernet Rule For more information on priority queues CoS queues and mapping for 802 1p see the QoS section of this manual VLAN Name Allows the entry of a name for a previously configured VLAN Source MAC Enter a MAC Address for the source MAC address Destination MAC Enter a MAC Address mask for the destination MAC address 802 1p 0 7 Enter a value from 0 to 7 to specify that the access profile will apply only to packets with this 802 1p priority value Ethernet Type Specifies that the access profile will apply only to packets with this hexadecimal 802 1Q Ethernet type value hex OxO Oxffff in the packet header The Ethernet type value may be set in the form hex OxO Oxffff which means the user may choose any combination of letters and numbers ranging from a f and from 0 9999 Port Number Enter the switch port number s to which you wish this rule to apply Enter the specific time range when this access rule will be implemented on the Switch To view the settings of a previously correctly configured rule click 4 in the Access Rule Table to view the following window COD Www nm RR Perit Priority 5 Rx Rate 77kbps source WLAC Destnation WLAC 802 1P 5 Ethernet Type Portlist Time Range Show All Access Eule Entries Figure 9 11 Access Rule Display window Ethernet To
236. g and return shipping charges for any product that is not packaged and shipped in accordance with the foregoing requirements or that is determined by D Link not to be defective or non conforming What Is Not Covered This limited warranty provided by D Link does not cover Products that have been subjected to abuse accident alteration modification tampering negligence misuse faulty installation lack of reasonable care repair or service in any way that is not contemplated in the documentation for the product or if the model or serial number has been altered tampered with defaced or removed Initial installation installation and removal of the product for repair and shipping costs Operational adjustments covered in the operating manual for the product and normal maintenance Damage that occurs in shipment due to act of God failures due to power surge and cosmetic damage and Any hardware software firmware or other products or services provided by anyone other than D Link Disclaimer of Other Warranties EXCEPT FOR THE LIMITED WARRANTY SPECIFIED HEREIN THE PRODUCT IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY OF ANY KIND INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT IF ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY CANNOT BE DISCLAIMED IN ANY TERRITORY WHERE A PRODUCT IS SOLD THE DURATION OF SUCH IMPLIED WARRANTY SHALL BE LIMITED TO NINETY 90 DAYS EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY COVERED UNDE
237. gh SSH authenticated by AAA local enable method Successful Enable Admin through Console authenticated by AAA none method Successful Enable Admin through Web authenticated by AAA none method 274 Enable Admin failed through Web Warning from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA local enable method Username lt username gt Successful Enable Admin through Informational Web SSL from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA local_ enable method Username lt username gt Enable Admin failed through Web SSL from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA local_enable method Username lt username gt Successful Enable Admin through Informational Telnet from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA local_enable method Username lt username gt Enable Admin failed through Telnet from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA local_enable method Username lt username gt Successful Enable Admin through Informational SSH from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA local_enable method Username lt username gt Enable Admin failed through SSH from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA local_enable method Username lt username gt Successful Enable Admin through Informational Console authenticated by AAA none method Username lt username gt Successful Enable Admin through Informational Web from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA none method Username lt username gt Successful Enable Admin
238. group is a technique used to group TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server hosts into user defined categories for authentication using method lists The user may define the type of server group by protocol or by previously defined server group The Switch has four built in Authenti cation Server Groups that cannot be removed but can be modified Up to eight authentications server hosts may be added to any particular group To view the following window click Security gt Access Authentication Control gt Authentication Server Group Add Mote Maximum of 8 entries Total Entries 4 Authentication Server Group Group Name radius tacacs tacacet xlacacs Figure 10 36 Authentication Server Group window This window displays the Authentication Server Groups on the Switch To modify a particular group click its hyperlinked Group Name which will then display the following window 217 IP Address 0 0 0 0 Protocol RADIUS v Add to Group MNote Macirmm of amp entries show All Server Group Entries Figure 10 37 Add a Server Host to Server Group radius window To add an Authentication Server Host to the list enter its IP address in the IP Address field choose the protocol associated with the IP address of the Authentication Server Host and click Add to Group to add this Authentication Server Host to the group To add a user defined group to the list click the Add button in the Authenticatio
239. guration parameters can be retained while resetting all other configuration parameters to their factory defaults NOTE Only the Reset System option will enter the factory default Fant parameters into the Switch s non volatile RAM and then restart the Switch a All other options enter the factory defaults into the current configuration but do not save this configuration Reset System will return the Switch s L configuration to the state it was when it left the factory Reset Proceed wath system reset except IP address log user account O Reset Config Proceed with system reset Reset System Proceed with system reset reset all save reboot Figure 11 31 Reset window 259 Reboot System The following window is used to restart the Switch If you do not save the settings all changes made in this session will be lost Do you want to save the settings Yes O No Figure 11 32 Reboot System window Clicking the Yes radio button will instruct the Switch to save the current configuration to non volatile RAM before restarting the Switch Clicking the No radio button instructs the Switch not to save the current configuration before restarting the Switch All of the configuration information entered from the last time Save Changes was executed will be lost Click the Restart button to restart the Switch Save Changes The Switch has two levels of memory normal RAM and non volatile or NV RAM Configur
240. h the web management to configure the Switch Property To pop up a window to display the device information Candidate Switch Icon Add to group Property Add to group Property Figure 6 56 Right Clicking a Candidate icon The following options may appear for the user to configure e Collapse To collapse the group that will be represented by a single icon Expand To expand the SIM group in detail 75 Add to group Add a candidate to a group Clicking this option will reveal the following dialog for the user to enter a password for authentication from the Candidate Switch before being added to the SIM group Click OK to enter the password or Cancel to exit the window Input password Password Java Applet window Figure 6 57 Input password window Property To pop up a window to display the device information as shown below Menu Bar The Single IP Management window contains a menu bar for device configurations as seen below File Group Device View Help Figure 6 58 Menu Bar of the Topology View The five menus on the menu bar are as follows File E Print Setup Will view the image to be printed Print Topology Will print the topology map e Preference Will set display properties such as polling interval and the views to open at SIM startup Group Add to group Add a candidate to a group Clicking this option will reveal the following dialog for the user to enter a p
241. h using the SSH Configuration window After completing the preceding steps a SSH Client on a remote PC can be configured to manage the Switch using a secure in band connection SSH Server Configuration The following window is used to configure and view settings for the SSH server and can be opened by clicking Security gt SSH gt SSH Server Configuration SOSH Server Status Wax Session a Connection Timeout Auth Fail A session Rekeying Hever Listened Fort Number n SSH Server Status Disabled Max Session 1 8 8 Connection Timeout 120 600 120 Auth Fail 2 20 2 session Rekeying Never Figure 10 10 SSH Server Configuration window To configure the SSH server on the Switch modify the following parameters and click Apply 194 Parameter Description SSH Server Status Use the pull down menu to enable or disable SSH on the Switch The default is Disabled Max Session 1 8 Enter a value between 7 and 8 to set the number of users that may simultaneously access the owitch The default setting is 8 Time Out 120 600 Allows the user to set the connection timeout The user may set a time between 120 and 600 seconds The default setting is 120 seconds Auth Fail 2 20 Allows the Administrator to set the maximum number of attempts that a user may try to log on to the SSH Server utili
242. he maximum amount of time to be set between group specific query messages 1 25 sec This interval may be reduced to lower the amount of time it takes a router to detect the loss of a last listener group The user may set this interval between 7 and 25 seconds with a default setting of 7 second Node Timeout 1 16711450 Specifies the link node timeout in seconds After this timer expires this node will no sec longer be considered as listening node The user may specify a time between 7 and 16711450 with a default setting of 260 seconds Router Timeout 1 16711450 Specifies the maximum amount of time a router can remain in the Switch s routing sec table as a listening node of a multicast group without the Switch receiving a node listener report The user may specify a time between 7 and 16711450 with a default 115 setting oF 260 seconds Done Timer 1 16711450 sec Specifies the maximum amount of time a router can remain in the Switch after receiving a done message from the group without receiving a node listener report The user may specify a time between 7 and 16711450 with a default setting of 2 seconds Querier State This read only field describes the current querier state Querier Router Behavior This read only field describes the current querier router behavior of the Switch The Non Querier state will not send out Multicast Listener Query Messages Used to enable or disable MLD snooping for the specified VLAN This fie
243. he same as User Name by default This function allows the user to select a range of ports that will be included in the forwarding task and enable or disable their state To view this window click L2 Features gt IGMP Snooping gt IGMP Access Control 105 From O State Aly Enabled Pot v Port 1 wm D c ih Ja QQ r2 Wiz 5 l Ee E 5 Figure 7 19 IGMP Access Control window b il State Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Select the range of ports you wish to Enable or Disable and click Apply to implement changes made 106 Dynamic IP Multicast Learning To configure the Dynamic IP Multicast Learning Max Entry Settings on the Switch click L2 Features gt IGMP Snooping gt Dynamic IP Multicast Learning Data Driven Learning Max Entries Figure 7 20 Dynamic IP Multicast Learning Settings window 107 ISM VLAN Settings In a switching environment multiple VLANs may exist Every time a multicast query passes through the Switch the switch must forward separate different copies of the data to each VLAN on the system which in turn increases data traffic and may clog up the traffic path To lighten the traffic load multicast VLANs may be inc
244. he specified switch ports To configure the IP Multicast Filter Profile settings click L2 Features gt IGMP Snooping gt IP Multicast Filter Profile Settings Profile ID 1 24 Profile Name n Profile ID 1 24 Profile Name Modify Name Multicast Address List 1 EG E dit Group List Total Entries 1 Figure 7 25 IP Multicast Profile Settings window The following fields can be set Parameter Description Profile ID Use the drop down menu to choose a Profile ID Profile Name Enter a name for the IP Multicast Profile To edit and entry click the corresponding Edit button and to delete an entry click the corresponding Delete button Profile ID 1 24 Profile Name Show All IF Multicast Profile Table Settings Figure 7 26 IP Multicast Profile Settings Edit window To view the IP Multicast Profile Settings click the hyperlinked Show AII Multicast Profile Table Settings To configure the Group List Settings click the hyperlinked Group List 110 Profile ID 1 24 Profile Name Multicast Address List Multicast Address List Figure 7 27 IP Multicast Address Group List Settings Group List window Enter the multicast Address List starting with the lowest in the range and click Apply Limited Multicast Range Settings The Limited Multicast Range Settings enables the user to configure the ports on the switch that wi
245. hen replace priority is selected the Switch will rewrite the 802 1p default priority of a packet to the value entered into the priority field This value will meet the criteria specified before being forwarded on to a specified CoS queue Otherwise a packet will have its incoming 802 1p user priority re written to its original value before being forwarded by the Switch The replace priority feature can only be used with DSCP value For more information on priority queues CoS queues and mapping for 802 1p see the QoS section of this manual Allows the entry of a name for a previously configured VLAN Enter an IP Address mask for the source IP address Enter an IP Address mask for the destination IP address This field allows the user to enter a DSCP value in the space provided which will instruct the Switch to examine the DiffServ Code part of each packet header and use this as the or part of the criterion for forwarding The user may choose a value between 0 and 63 This field allows the user to modify the protocol used to configure the Access Rule Table depending on which protocol the user has chosen or configured in the Access Profile Table Enter the switch port number s to which you wish this rule to apply Enter the specific time range when this access rule will be implemented on the Switch To view the settings of a previously correctly configured rule click I in the Access Rule Table to view the following window 163
246. hrough Web Warning authenticated by AAA server from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt Enable Admin failed through Web due to Enable Admin failed through Web Warning AAA server timeout or improper from lt userlP gt due to AAA server configuration timeout or improper configuration Username lt username gt Successful Enable Admin through Successful Enable Admin through Informational Web SSL authenticated by AAA server Web SSL from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt Enable Admin failed through Web SSL Enable Admin failed through authenticated by AAA server Web SSL from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt 275 Enable Admin failed through Web SSL Enable Admin failed through Warning due to AAA server timeout or improper Web SSL due to AAA server configuration timeout or improper configuration Username lt username gt Successful Enable Admin through Telnet Successful Enable Admin through Informational authenticated by AAA server Telnet from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt Enable Admin failed through Telnet Enable Admin failed through Warning authenticated by AAA server Telnet from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt Enable Admin f
247. ht delays or for data from specified end users whose data transmissions warrant special consideration The Switch allows you to further tailor how priority tagged data packets are handled on your network Using queues to manage priority tagged data allows you to specify its relative priority to suit the needs of your network There may be circumstances where it would be advantageous to group two or more differently tagged packets into the same queue Generally however it is rec ommended that the highest priority queue Queue 3 be reserved for data packets with a priority value of 7 Packets that have not been given any priority value are placed in Queue 0 and thus given the lowest priority for delivery A weighted round robin system is employed on the Switch to determine the rate at which the queues are emptied of packets The ratio used for clearing the queues is 4 1 This means that the highest priority queue Queue 3 will clear 4 packets for every 1 packet cleared from Queue 0 The default setting is a strict round robin Remember the priority queue settings on the Switch are for all ports and all devices connected to the Switch will be affected This priority queuing system will be especially beneficial if your network employs switches with the capability of assigning priority tags Advantages of CoS CoS is an implementation of the IEEE 802 1p standard that allows network administrators a method of reserving bandwidth for important functio
248. ices Auto discovery feature automatically recognize the connection of PD device and immediately sends power to it Auto disable port if the port current is over 350mA while other ports remain active Active circuit protection automatically disables the port if there is a short while other ports remain active PD should be able to receive the power following the classification below aes m sonet ZEN puoro paw Reserved PSE should be provide the power following the classification below css ose ower oseas Po oso say PoE Specification Optional 15 4W DES 3028P DES 3052P should follow the standard PSE pin out standard of Alternative A which is sending out power over numbe 1 2 3 6 pins of 8 wires of CAT5 UTP cable DES 3028P DES 3052P works with all D Link 802 3af capable devices DES 3028P DES 3052P works with all non 802 3af capable D Link AP IP Cam and IP phone via DWL P50 264 LED indicators Location LED Indicative Color Per Device id Li Console Green inki Mode Select Button Link Act Speed ibi only for DES Description Power On Power Off Console on POST is in progress POST is failure Console off Link Act Speed Mode PoE Mode When there is a secure 100Mbps Fast Ethernet connection or link at any of the ports When there is reception or transmission Blinking Green i e Activity Act of data occurring at a Fast Ethernet connected port When there is a secure 10Mbps Ethern
249. ict if not specified Loose This mode provides a looser way of control If the user selects loose mode ARP packets and IP Broadcast packets will be sent to the CPU The packets will still be forwarded by the hardware until a specific source MAC address is blocked by the software The port will check ARP packets and IP Broadcast packets by IP MAC PORT Binding entries When the packet is found by the entry the MAC address will be set to dynamic If the packet is not found by the the entries for the ports The port will check ARP packets and IP packets by IP MAC PORT Binding entries When the packet is found by the entry the MAC address will be set to dynamic If the packet is not found by the entry the MAC address will be set to block Other entry the MAC address will be set to block Other packets will be bypassed Allow Zero IP Use the pull down menu to enable or disable this feature Allow zero IP configures the state which allows ARP packets with 0 0 0 0 source IP to bypass Forward DHCP By default the DHCP packet with broadcast DA will be flooded When set to disable the Packet broadcast DHCP packet received by the specified port will not be forwarded Max Entry Specifies the maximum number of IP MAC Port Binding entries By default per port max entry is 5 The Max entry threshold is 7 70 IMP Entry Settings This table is used to create Static IP MAC Binding Port entries on the switch To view this window click Security gt IP
250. ide your system To prevent static damage discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of the electronic components such as the microprocessor You can do so by periodically touching an unpainted metal surface on the chassis You can also take the following steps to prevent damage from electrostatic discharge ESD 1 When unpacking a static sensitive component from its shipping carton do not remove the component from the antistatic packing material until you are ready to install the component in your system Just before unwrapping the antistatic packaging be sure to discharge static electricity from your body 2 When transporting a sensitive component first place it in an antistatic container or packaging 3 Handle all sensitive components in a static safe area If possible use antistatic floor pads workbench pads and an antistatic grounding strap xli Introduction DES 3028 28P 28G 52 52P Switch Description Features Ports LED Indicators Front Panel Description Rear Panel Description Side Panel Description Installing SFP ports DES 3028 28P 28G 52 52P The DES 3028 DES 3028P DES 3028G DES 3052 and the DES 3052P are all members of the D Link Switch family These Switches provide unsurpassed performance fault tolerance scalable flexibility robust security standard based interoperability and impressive technology to future proof departmental and enterprise network deployments with an easy migratio
251. iew this window click L2 Features gt LLDP gt Basic LLDP Port Settings Notification TET Port system system System From To Admin Status i dau gt ae Apply State Description Name Description Capahilities Foti Parti Disabled TX Only Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Apply Notification State Admin Status Port Description System Name System Description System Capabilities 1 Disable LX and EX Disable Disable Disable Disable E Disable LX and EX Disable Disable Disable Disable 4 Disable TX and EX Disable Disable Disable Disable 4 Disable LX and EX Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable TX and EX Disable Disable Disable Disable b Disable LX and EX Disable Disable Disable Disable di Disable TX and EX Disable Disable Disable Disable z Disable LX and EX Disable Disable Disable Disable 3 Disable TX and EX Disable Disable Disable Disable 10 Disable LX and EX Disable Disable Disable Disable 11 Disable TX and EX Disable Disable Disable Disable 12 Disable LX and EX Disable Disable Disable Disable 13 Disable LX and EX Disable Disable Disable Disable 14 Disable LX and EX Disable Disable Disable Disable 15 Disable LX and EX Disable Disable Disable Disable l Disable TX and EX Disable Disable Disable Disable Ly Disable LX and EX Disable Disable Disable Disable 18 Disable TX and EX Disable Disable Disable Disable ls Disable LX and EX Disable Disable Disable Disable Al Disable LX and EX Disable Disable Disa
252. ific port until authorization is granted The 802 1X Access Control method consists of three roles each of which are vital to creating and maintaining a stable and working Access Control security method Authentication Client Anthenticator Server oe NIC Card Network Port AAA Server c medo ENEA E Wireless PC Card etc Ethernet Switch etc Any EAP Server Mostly RADIUS J EAP Over LAN Encapsulated EAP EAP Over Wireless Messages typically 802 3 or 002 11 on RADIUS Figure 10 15 The three roles of 802 1X The following section will explain the three roles of Client Authenticator and Authentication Server in greater detail 198 Authentication Server The Authentication Server is a remote device that is connected to the same network as the Client and Authenticator must be running a RADIUS Server program and must be configured properly on the Authenticator Switch Clients connected to a port on the Switch must be authenticated by the Authentication Server RADIUS before attaining any services offered by the Switch on the LAN The role of the Authentication Server is to certify the identity of the Client attempting to access the network by exchanging secure information between the RADIUS server and the Client through EAPOL packets and in turn informs the Switch whether or not the Client is granted access to the LAN and or switches services Authenticator The Authenticator the Switch i
253. ify the SSH user This User Name must be a previously configured user account on the Switch Auth Mode The administrator may choose one of the following to set the authorization for users attempting to access the Switch Host Based This parameter should be chosen to use a remote SSH server for authentication purposes Choosing this parameter requires the user to input the following information to identify the SSH user e Host Name Enter an alphanumeric string of no more than 31 characters to identify the remote SSH user Host IP Enter the corresponding IP address of the SSH user Password This parameter should be chosen to use an administrator defined password for authentication Upon entry of this parameter the Switch will prompt the administrator for a password and then to re type the password for confirmation Public Key This parameter should be chosen to use the publickey on a SSH server for authentication Enter the corresponding IP address of the SSH user This parameter is only used in conjunction with the Host Based choice in the Auth Mode field Enter an alphanumeric string of no more than 32 characters to identify the remote SSH user This parameter is only used in conjunction with the Host Based choice in the Auth Mode field Click Apply to implement changes made NOTE To set the SSH User Authentication parameters on the Switch a User Account must be previously configured For more information
254. illustrates the main differences between the two protocols Port Transition States An essential difference between the three protocols is in the way ports transition to a forwarding state and in the way this transition relates to the role of the port forwarding or not forwarding in the topology RSTP combines the transition states disabled blocking and listening used in 802 1d and creates a single state Discarding In either case ports do not forward packets In the STP port transition states disabled blocking or listening or in the RSTP port state discarding there is no functional difference the port is not active in the network topology Table 6 2 below compares how the two protocols differ regarding the port state transition All three protocols calculate a stable topology in the same way Every segment will have a single path to the root bridge All bridges listen for BPDU packets However BPDU packets are sent more frequently with every Hello packet BPDU packets are sent even if a BPDU packet was not received Therefore each link between bridges is sensitive to the status of the link Ultimately this difference results in faster detection of failed links and thus faster topology adjustment A drawback of 802 1d is this absence of immediate feedback from adjacent bridges Table 7 2 Comparing Port States 118 RSTP is capable of a more rapid transition to a forwarding state it no longer relies on timer configurations RSTP comp
255. indow contains the following fields to configure for PoE Parameter PoE System Sets the limit of power to be used from the Switch s power source to PoE ports The user may configure a Power Limit between 37 and 185W for the DES 3028P and 37 and 370W for the DES 3052P The default setting is 185W DES 3028P and 370W DES 3052P Description Power Limit Power Disconnect The PoE controller uses either Deny next port or Deny low priority port to offset the power Method limit being exceeded and keep the Switch s power at a usable level Use the drop down menu to select a Power Disconnect Method The default for the Power Disconnect Method is Deny next port Both Power Disconnection Methods are described below Deny next port After the power limit has been exceeded the next port attempting to power 66 up is denied regardless of its priority Deny low priority port After the power limit has been exceeded the next port attempting to power up causes the port with the lowest priority to shut down to allow the high priority and critical priority ports to power up PoE Configuration Select a range of ports from the pull down menus to be enabled or disabled for PoE State Use the pull down menu to enable or disable ports for PoE Use the pull down menu to select the priority of the PoE ports Power Limit Sets the power limit per PoE port Once this threshold has been reached on the port the PoE will go into the Po
256. ings MAC Notification is used to monitor MAC addresses learned and entered into the forwarding database To globally set MAC notification on the Switch click Administration gt MAC Notification Settings Global Settings Disabled The following parameters may be viewed and modified Parameter Description Enable or disable MAC notification globally on the Switch Interval The time in seconds between notifications sec History The maximum number of entries listed in the pues Size history log used for notification Up to 500 entries ce can be specified Disabled Disabled Disabled Port Settings Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled To change MAC notification settings for a port or group of ports on the Switch configure the following parameters EE NEN O Parameter Description UJ MY Select a port or group of ports to enable for MAC notification using the pull down menus Sy Sy oy Uh Ix Enable MAC Notification for the ports selected using the pull down menu o w co Click Apply to implement changes made E 30 ON MIS EFE HESSE ERE ie ES OO A th SB WN KS c Figure 6 22 MAC Notification Settings window 51 TFTP Services Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP services all
257. ining factor in deciding when incoming packets exceed the Threshold value The Interval may be set between 5 and 30 seconds with the default setting of 5 seconds Click Apply to implement the settings made NOTE Traffic Control cannot be implemented on ports that are set for Link Aggregation Port Trunking 183 NOTE Ports that are in the rest mode will be seen as Discarding in Spanning Tree windows and implementations though these ports will still be forwarding BPDUS to the Switch s CPU NOTE Ports that are in rest mode will be seen as link down in all windows and screens until it enters the auto revovery mode or the user recovers these ports by configuring the port state 184 Port Security A given ports or a range of ports dynamic MAC address learning can be locked such that the current source MAC addresses entered into the MAC address forwarding table can not be changed once the port lock is enabled Setting the Admin State pull down menu to Enabled and clicking Apply can lock the port Port Security is a security feature that prevents unauthorized computers with source MAC addresses unknown to the Switch prior to locking the port or ports from connecting to the Switch s locked ports and gaining access to the network To view this window click Security gt Port Security The following parameters can be set Parameter Description Lock Address Anoly Mode i
258. int being that Port 1 will only transmit on VLAN 2 Network resources such as printers and servers however can be shared across VLANs This is achieved by setting up overlapping VLANSs That is ports can belong to more than one VLAN group For example setting VLAN 1 members to ports 1 2 3 and 4 and VLAN 2 members to ports 1 5 6 and 7 Port 1 belongs to two VLAN groups Ports 8 9 and 10 are not configured to any VLAN group This means ports 8 9 and 10 are in the same VLAN group 88 Asymmetric VLANs The DES 3028 Switch Series has the capability to create and utilize Asymmetric VLANs on the Switch Asymmetric VLANs allow devices to transmit packets on one VLAN and receive it on another VLAN This configuration is accomplished through the use of three functions enabling Asymmetric VLANs VLAN creation and GVRP configuration Consider the example below VLAN V1 Ports1 24 Egress and Untagged bie she Ports 1 8 17 24 WLAN Ve DMS 1 0 i j Egress and Ports 1 16 Untagged Egress and Untagged Ports 1 8 17 24 Egress and End Stations of VLAN 3 IP Address 192 168 1 x D Gateway 192 168 1 1 Ports 17 24 Shared Server Internet Gateway End Stations of VLAN 2 IP Address IP Address IP Address 192 168 1 x 192 168 1 x 192 168 1 1 Gateway 192 168 1 1 Parts 1 B Parts 1 8 Ports 9 16 ian Egress Egress Egress 1 Untagged Untagged Untagged VLAN Egress Egress 2 Untagged Untagged
259. invalid CRC These are normally the result of collisions Jabber The number of packets with lengths more than the MAX PKT LEN bytes Internally MAX_PKT_LEN is equal to 1522 CAS The number of packets that are dropped by this port since the last Switch reboot Show Hide Check whether or not to display Cre Error Under Size Over Size Fragment Jabber and Drop errors Clicking this button clears all statistics counters on this window View Table Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a table rather than a line graph View Line Chart Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a line graph rather than a table 242 Transmitted TX The following graph displays error packets received by the Switch To select a port to view these statistics for select the port by using the Port pull down menu The user may also use the real time graphic of the Switch at the top of the web page by simply clicking on a port To view this window click Monitoring gt Packets Errors gt Transmitted TX Pot v Clear view Table Tx Error Analysis Port Port 1 1000 ann ExDeter ni Exi all BO SingColl 500 Call i 400 CRCError UL 100 Unit sec Time Interval E Record Number 200 ShowlHide i ExDefer W LateCall iw ExCall Iw SingCall iw Call iw CRCError Figure 11 11 Tx Error Analysis window line graph To view the Transmitted Error Packets Table click the link View Table which will sh
260. ion Profile ID This is the identifier number for this profile set Select Permit to specify that the Switch according to any additional rule forwards the packets that match the access profile added see below Select Deny to specify that packets that match the access profile are not forwarded by the 167 Switch and will be filtered Rx Rate No Limit 0 Enter an Rx Rate in kbps Access ID 1 65535 Type in a unique identifier number between 7 and 65535 for this access or use Auto Assign Auto Assign Checking this field will instruct the Switch to automatically assign an Access ID for the rule being created Type Selected profile based on Ethernet MAC Address P address or Packet Content Mask Ethernet instructs the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header IP instructs the Switch to examine the IP address in each frame s header Packet Content Mask instructs the Switch to examine the packet header Priority 0 7 This parameter is specified if you want to re write the 802 1p default priority previously set in the Switch which is used to determine the CoS queue to which packets are forwarded to Once this field is specified packets accepted by the Switch that match this priority are forwarded to the CoS queue specified previously by the user When replace priority is selected the Switch will rewrite the 802 1p default priority of a packet to the value entered into the priority field This value wi
261. iority Settings TOS Priority Settings DSCP Priority Settings Port Mapping Priority Settings MAC Priority The Switch supports 802 1p priority queuing Quality of Service The following section discusses the implementation of CoS Quality of Service and benefits of using 802 1p priority queuing Understanding IEEE 802 1p Priority Priority tagging is a function defined by the IEEE 802 1p standard designed to provide a means of managing traffic on a network where many different types of data may be transmitted simultaneously It is intended to alleviate problems associated with the delivery of time critical data over congested networks The quality of applications that are dependent on such time critical data such as video conferencing can be severely and adversely affected by even very small delays in transmission Network devices that are in compliance with the IEEE 802 1p standard have the ability to recognize the priority level of data packets These devices can also assign a priority label or tag to packets Compliant devices can also strip priority tags from packets This priority tag determines the packet s degree of expeditiousness and determines the queue to which it will be assigned Priority tags are given values from 0 to 7 with O being assigned to the lowest priority data and 7 assigned to the highest The highest priority tag 7 is generally only used for data associated with video or audio applications which are sensitive to even slig
262. iphersuite window To download certificates set the following parameters and click Apply Parameter Description Certificate Type Enter the type of certificate to be downloaded This type refers to the server responsible for issuing certificates This field has been limited to Local for this firmware release Server IP Enter the IP address of the TF TP server where the certificate files are located Certificate File Name Enter the path and the filename of the certificate file to download This file must have a der extension Ex c cert der Key File Name Enter the path and the filename of the key file to download This file must have a der extension Ex c pkey der To set up the SSL function on the Switch configure the following parameters and click Apply Parameter Description Configuration SSL Status Use the pull down menu to enable or disable the SSL status on the switch The default is Disabled Cache Timeout 60 This field will set the time between a new key exchange between a client and a host using 86400 sec the SSL function A new SSL session is established every time the client and host go through a key exchange Specifying a longer timeout will allow the SSL session to reuse the master key on future connections with that particular host therefore speeding up the negotiation process The default setting is 600 seconds 192 Ciphersuite RSA with RC4 128 This ciphersuite combines the RSA key exchang
263. iquely identify the MSTI Multiple Spanning Tree Instance If a configuration name is not set this field will show the MAC address to the device running MSTP Revision Level This value along with the Configuration Name will identify the MSTP region configured on the Switch The user may choose a value between 0 and 65535 with a default setting of 0 MSTI ID This field shows the MSTI IDs currently set on the Switch This field will always have the CIST MSTI which may be configured but not deleted Clicking the hyperlinked name will open a new window for configuring parameters associated with that particular MSTI VID List This field displays the VLAN IDs associated with the specific MSTI Clicking the Add button will reveal the following window to configure MSD Type Type Create v VID List 1 4094 O show MeT Co ation Table Figure 7 39 Instance ID Settings window Add 125 The user may configure the following parameters to create a MSTI in the Switch Parameter Description MSTI ID Enter a number between 7 and 4 to set a new MSTI on the Switch Type Create is selected to create a new MSTI No other choices are available for this field when creating a new MSTI VID List 1 4094 This field is used to specify the VID range from configured VLANs set on the Switch Supported VIDs on the Switch range from ID number 7 to 4094 Click Apply to
264. isable Disable Disable fe Disable Disable Disable Disable D Disable Disable Disable Disable 24 Disable Disable Disable Disable 25 Disable Disable Disable Disable 25 Disable Disable Disable Disable ST Disable Disable Disable Disable Ze Disable Disable Disable Disable Figure 7 50 802 3 Extension LLDP Port Settings Table window The following parameters can be set or displayed Parameter Description Select a port or group of ports using the pull down menus MAC PHY Use the drop down menu to toggle the MAC PHY Configuration Status between Enabled and 137 Configuration Status Disabled Link Aggregation Link Aggregation Use the drop down menu to Use the drop down menu to toggle Link Aggregation between Enabled and Disabled Use the drop down menu to toggle Link Aggregation between Enabled and Disabled Aggregation between Enabled and Disabled Maximum Frame Use the drop down menu to toggle Maximum Frame Size between Enabled and Disabled Size Click Apply to implement changes made LLDP Management Address Settings The following window is used to set up LLDP management address settings on the Switch To view this window click L2 Features gt LLDP gt LLDP Management Address Settings Pot Pot Disabled v TART PortID Enabled Management Address 1 NOME 2 NONE 3 NONE 4 NONE 5 NONE 6 NONE 7 NONE 8 NOME 9 NONE 10 NONE 11 NONE 12 NONE 13 NONE 1
265. isabled 64 Drop O 5 E Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop O 5 4 Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop O 5 Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop 0 6 Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop 0 E Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop O 5 E Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop 0 9 Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop O 5 10 Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop 0 5 11 Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop O 5 l2 Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop O 5 13 Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop O 5 ld Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop O 5 15 Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop 5 l Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop 0 1 Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop n 18 Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop 5 19 Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop O 5 40 Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop O 5 2l Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop 0 5 22 Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop O 5 25 Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop 0 5 24 Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop 0 25 Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop O 5 26 Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop 2 Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop 5 25 Disabled Disabled Disabled 64 Drop O 5 Threshold Khit sec Poti Port dg i Disabled Y em v 128 Count A Down Figure 10 1 Traffic Control Settings window Once the switch is in rest mode the method of recovering this port is to manually recoup it using the Port Configuration window in the Administration folder and selecting the disabled port and
266. isec Time Interval 15 Record Mumber 00 Show Hide Iv Bytes Iw Packets Figure 11 3 Rx Packets Analysis window line graph for Bytes and Packets To view the Received Packets Table click the link View Table which will show the following table 235 Packet Analysis of Port Port 1 lis y Bytes Packets Unicast Multicast Broadcast Bytes Packets Figure 11 4 Rx Packets Analysis Table The following fields may be set or viewed Parameter Description Time Interval Select the desired setting between 7s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second Record Number Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200 The default value is 200 Bytes Counts the number of bytes received on the port Counts the number of packets received on the port Counts the total number of good packets that were received by a unicast address Counts the total number of good packets that were received by a multicast address Broadcast Counts the total number of good packets that were received by a broadcast address Show Hide Check whether to display Bytes and Packets Clear Clicking this button clears all statistics counters on this window View Table Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a table rather than a line graph View Line Chart Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a line graph rather than a table 236 UMB Cast RX The following graph
267. itch including Time Range Access Profile Table and CPU Interface Filtering Section 10 Security A discussion on the Security functions on the Switch including Traffic Control Port Security Port Lock Entries IP MAC Port Binging SSL SSH 802 1X Trusted Host Access Authentication Control Traffic Segmentation and DoS Attack Prevention Section 11 Monitoring Features information on Monitoring including CPU Utilization Port Utilization Packets Packet Errors Packet Size MAC Address Switch Log IGMP Snooping Group Browse Router Port VLAN Status MLD Snooping Group Browse MLD Snooping Router Port Static ARP Settings ARP FDB Gratuitous ARP Settings Session Table and Port Access Control Appendix A Technical Specifications Technical specifications for the DES 3028 DES 3028P DES 3028G DES 3052 and the DES 3052P Appendix B System Log Entries Information on the System Log Entries Appendix C Cable Lengths Information on cable types and maximum distances Appendix D Glossary Lists definitions for terms and acronyms used in this document viii Intended Readers The DES 3028 DES 3028P DES 3028G DES 3052 DES 3052P User Manual contains information for setup and management of the Switch The term the Switch will be used when referring to all five switches This manual is intended for network managers familiar with network management concepts and terminology Typographical Conventions Convention Descriptio
268. itch that has a physical link to the SIM group but has not been recognized by the CS as a member of the SIM group A SIM group can only have one Commander Switch CS All switches in a particular SIM group must be in the same IP subnet broadcast domain Members of a SIM group cannot cross a router A SIM group accepts up to 33 switches numbered 0 32 including the Commander Switch numbered 0 There is no limit to the number of SIM groups in the same IP subnet broadcast domain however a single switch can only belong to one group If multiple VLANs are configured the SIM group will only utilize the system VLAN on any switch SIM allows intermediate devices that do not support SIM This enables the user to manage switches that are more than one hop away from the CS The SIM group is a group of switches that are managed as a single entity SIM switches may take on three different roles 1 Commander Switch CS This is a switch that has been manually configured as the controlling device for a group and takes on the following characteristics e It has an IP Address e It is not a commander switch or member switch of another Single IP group e It is connected to the member switches through its management VLAN 2 Member Switch MS This is a switch that has joined a single IP group and is accessible from the CS and it takes on the following characteristics It is not a CS or MS of another Single IP group E It is con
269. ithin an STP Group It is advisable to define an STP Group to correspond to a VLAN group of ports The following fields can be set Parameter Description A consecutive group of ports may be configured starting with the selected port Toggle from Disabled to Enabled to implement BPDU packet forwarding Cost 0 Auto External Cost This defines a metric that indicates the relative cost of forwarding packets to the specified port list Port cost can be set automatically or as a metric value The default value is O auto 0 auto Setting O for the external cost will automatically set the speed for forwarding packets to the specified port s in the list for optimal efficiency Default port cost 100Mbps port 200000 Gigabit port 20000 value 1 200000000 Define a value between 7 and 200000000 to determine the external cost The lower the number the greater the probability the port 123 NEN will be chosen to forward packets Hello Time This can be set from 1 to 2 seconds This is the interval between two transmissions of BPDU packets sent by the Root Bridge to tell all other switches that it is indeed the Root Setting this parameter as yes will set the ports to send out BPDU packets to other bridges requesting information on their STP setting If the Switch is configured for RSTP the port will be capable to migrate from 802 1d STP to 802 1w RSTP If the Switch is configured for MSTP the port is capable of migr
270. k to specify a mask to hide the content of the packet header Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the VLAN identifier of each packet header and use this as the full or partial criterion for forwarding Ethernet type Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the Ethernet type value in each frame s header Click Apply to set this entry in the Switch s memory 170 The following is the CPU Interface Filtering Configuration window for IP type code Profile ID 1 3 VLAN L H m 4 z Fd Ea 3 m OOOO Da g of m gi P a r L E L p km z jua m a m SCP Protocol Hype stc port mask HOU dest port mask flag mask bit urg ack psh rst 2yn fin src port mask UDP pem dest port mask Protocol ID user mask show All CPU Interface Filtering Table Entries Figure 9 18 CPU Interface Filtering Configuration window IP The following parameters can be modified Parameter Description Profile ID 1 3 Type in a unique identifier number for this profile set This value can be set from 1 3 Type Select profile based on Ethernet MAC Address P address or Packet Content Mask This will change the menu according to the requirements for the type of profile Select Ethernet to instruct the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header Select P to instruct the Switch to examine the IP address in each frame s header Select Packet C
271. ket is received the Switch will recover the port as a Designated Port in the Discarding State If another returning BPDU packet is received the port will remain in a blocked state the timer will reset to the specified value restart and the process will begin again For those who choose not to employ this function the LoopBack Recovery time must be set to zero In this case when a BPDU packet is returned to the Switch the port will be placed in a blocking state and a message will be sent to the Syslog of the switch To recover the port the administrator must disable the state of the problematic port and enable it again This 1s the only method available to recover the port when the LoopBack Recover Time is set to 0 Regulations and Restrictions for the LoopBack Detection Function e All versions of STP STP and RSTP can enable this feature e May be configured globally STP Global Bridge Settings e Neighbor switches of the Switch must have the capability to forward BPDU packets Switches the fail to meet this requirement will disable this function for the port in question on the Switch e The default setting for this function is disabled e The default setting for the LoopBack timer is 60 seconds e This setting will only be operational if the interface is STP enabled 119 The LoopBack Detection feature can only prevent BPDU loops on designated ports It can detect a loop condition occurring on the user s side connected to the edge p
272. l Port Displays the number of the physical port on the CS that the MS or CaS is connected to The CS will have no entry in this field Speed Displays the connection speed between the CS and the MS or CaS Remote Port Displays the number of the physical port on the MS or CaS that the CS is connected to The CS will have no entry in this field MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the corresponding Switch 71 Model Name Displays the full model name of the corresponding Switch To view the Topology Map click the View menu in the toolbar and then Topology which will produce the following window The Topology View will refresh itself periodically 20 seconds by default LT M 210 xi View default default 01 01 00 default 33 1 3 00 default 38 29 00 default 0 24 04 default 00 36 1 8 default 01 01 00 defaultB8 28 00 default 00 00 0f default 35 26 03 Java Applet Window Figure 6 49 Topology view This window will display how the devices within the Single IP Management Group are connected to other groups and devices Possible icons in this screen are as follows Icon Description T2 Non SIM devices Tool Tips In the Topology view window the mouse plays an important role in configuration and in viewing device information Setting the mouse cursor over a specific device in the topology window tool tip will display the same information about a specific device as the Tree view does S
273. ld is Disabled by default Fast Done This parameter allows the user to enable the fast done function Enabled this function will allow members of a multicast group to leave the group immediately when a done message is received by the Switch This field displays the version number NOTE The robustness variable of the MLD snooping querier is used in creating the following MLD message intervals Group Listener Interval The amount of time that must pass before a multicast router decides that there are no more listeners present of a group on a network Calculated as robustness variable query interval 1 query response interval Querier Present Interval The amount of time that must pass before a multicast router decides that there are no other querier devices present Calculated as robustness variable query interval 0 5 query response interval Last Listener Query Count The amount of group specific queries sent before the router assumes there are no local listeners in this group The default value is the value of the robustness variable Click Apply to implement changes made Click the Show All MLD Snooping Entries link to return to the MLD Snooping Settings window MLD Snooping Router Port Settings The following window is used to designate a port or range of ports as being connected to multicast enabled routers When IPv6 routing control packets such as OSPFv3 or MLD Query packets are found in an Ethern
274. le PC B s IP address will be written into the Target Protocol Address shown in Table 1 H W Protocol Protocol Operation Sender Sender Target Target type type address address H W address protocol yyy address protocol length address address 10 10 10 1 10 10 10 2 ARP request 00 20 5C 01 11 11 00 00 00 00 00 00 Table 1 ARP Payload The ARP request will be encapsulated into the Ethernet frame and sent out As can be seen in Table 2 the Source Address in the Ethernet frame will be PC A s MAC address Since the ARP request is sent via a broadcast method the Destination address is in the format of Ethernet broadcast FF FF FF FF FF FF Destination Source address Ether type address 00 20 5C 01 11 11 FF FF FF FF FF FF Table 2 Ethernet frame format When the switch receives the frame it will check the Source Address in the Ethernet frame s header If the address is not in its Forwarding Table the switch will learn PC A s MAC and the associated port and enter them in its Forwarding Table Forwarding Table Porti 00 20 5C 01 11 11 In addition when the switch receives the broadcasted ARP request it will flood the frame to all ports except the source port port see Figure 2 Who is 10 10 10 2 at sd HILL ne 00 20 50 01 11 11 pem 10 10 10 1 Port 2 00 20 5C 01 14 14 00 20 5C 01 22 22 10 10 10 4 10 10 10 2 Figure 2 When the switch floods the frame
275. lect the appropriate serial port COM port 1 or COM port 2 Set the data rate to 9600 baud Set the data format to 8 data bits 1 stop bit and no parity a Ide ges m Set flow control to none 14 10 11 12 13 14 Under Properties select VT100 for Emulation mode Select Terminal keys for Function Arrow and Ctrl keys Ensure that you select Terminal keys not Windows keys NOTE When you use HyperTerminal with the Microsoft Windows 2000 operating sys tem ensure that you have Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 or later installed Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 allows you to use arrow keys in HyperTerminal s VT100 emulation See www microsoft com for information on Windows 2000 service packs After you have correctly set up the terminal plug the power cable into the power receptacle on the back of the Switch The boot sequence appears in the terminal After the boot sequence completes the console login screen displays If you have not logged into the command line interface CLI program press the Enter key at the User name and password prompts There is no default user name and password for the Switch The administrator must first create user names and passwords If you have previously set up user accounts log in and continue to configure the Switch Enter the commands to complete your desired tasks Many commands require administrator level access privileges Read the next section for more information on setting up use
276. led Link Down Aute Enabled d Enabled Auto Disabled LOOM Ful one Auto Enabled 5 Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Auto Enabled 3 Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Auto Enabled 10 Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Auto Enabled 11 Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Auto Enabled Ve Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Auto Enabled 13 Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Auto Enabled 14 Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Auto Enabled 15 Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Auto Enabled 16 Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Auto Enabled 17 Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Auto Enabled 18 Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Auto Enabled 19 Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Auto Enabled 20 Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Auto Enabled 21 Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Auto Enabled 22 Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Auto Enabled 25 Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Auto Enabled 24 Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Auto Enabled 25 Enabled Auto Disabled LinkD own Auto Enabled AS F Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down N Enabled 26 Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Auto Enabled 426 F Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down N Enabled ACA Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Auto Enabled AE Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down N Enabled 2a Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Auto Enabled 2S P Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down NifA Enabled Figure 6 3 Port Configuration window The following parameters can be configured Parameter From To Speed Duplex Flow Control Medium Type MDIX Lea
277. led instance Frames designated for these VLANs will be processed quickly and completely throughout interconnected bridges utilizing any of the three spanning tree protocols STP RSTP or MSTP 117 This protocol will also tag BPDU packets so receiving devices can distinguish spanning tree instances spanning tree regions and the VLANs associated with them An MSTI ID will classify these instances MSTP will connect multiple spanning trees with a Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST The CIST will automatically determine each MSTP region its maximum possible extent and will appear as one virtual bridge that runs a single spanning tree Consequentially frames assigned to different VLANs will follow different data routes within administratively established regions on the network continuing to allow simple and full processing of frames regardless of administrative errors in defining VLANs and their respective spanning trees Each switch utilizing the MSTP on a network will have a single MSTP configuration that will have the following three attributes 1 A configuration name defined by an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters defined in the STP Bridge Global Settings window in the Configuration Name field 2 A configuration revision number named here as a Revision Level and found in the STP Bridge Global Settings window and 3 A 4096 element table defined here as a VID List in the MST Configuration Table window which will associate
278. lex operation the p2p status changes to operate as if the p2p value were False The default setting for this parameter is Auto BPDU This field can be Enabled or Disabled When Enabled it allows the forwarding of STP BPDU packets from other network devices The default is Enabled Use the pull down menu to enable or disable the loop back detection function on the owitch for the ports configured above For more information on this function see the STP LoopBack Prevention section Restricted Role A Boolean value set by management Two options are available for this parameter True and False If TRUE causes the Port not to be selected as Root Port for the CIST or any MSTI even it has the best spanning tree priority vector Such a Port will be selected as an Alternate Port after the Root Port has been selected This parameter should be FALSE by default If set it can cause lack of spanning tree connectivity It is set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network influencing the spanning tree active topology possibly because those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator Restricted TCN A Boolean value set by management Two options are available for this parameter True and False If TRUE causes the Port not to propagate received topology change notifications and topology changes to other Ports This parameter should be FALSE by default If set it can cause temporary loss of connectivi
279. liant bridges are sensitive to feedback from other RSTP compliant bridge links Ports do not need to wait for the topology to stabilize before transitioning to a forwarding state In order to allow this rapid transition the protocol introduces two new variables the edge port and the point to point P2P port Edge Port The edge port is a configurable designation used for a port that is directly connected to a segment where a loop cannot be created An example would be a port connected directly to a single workstation Ports that are designated as edge ports transition to a forwarding state immediately without going through the listening and learning states An edge port loses its status if it receives a BPDU packet immediately becoming a normal spanning tree port P2P Port A P2P port is also capable of rapid transition P2P ports may be used to connect to other bridges Under RSTP all ports operating in full duplex mode are considered to be P2P ports unless manually overridden through configuration 802 1D 802 1w 802 1s Compatibility MSTP or RSTP can interoperate with legacy equipment and is capable of automatically adjusting BPDU packets to 802 1d format when necessary However any segment using 802 1d STP will not benefit from the rapid transition and rapid topology change detection of MSTP or RSTP The protocol also provides for a variable used for migration in the event that legacy equipment on a segment is updated to use RSTP or MSTP
280. licking on a port To view this window click Monitoring gt Packet Size Poti Ub Tease Packet Size Analysis Port Port 1 1000 300 a 700 m 256 511 E 500 512 1023 Po j i 1024 1518 MN 200 100 O dem Unittsecs Time Interval IE Record Number 200 ShowlHide wv 64 iw 65 127 iw 128 255 iw 256 5171 iw 512 1023 iw 1024 1518 Figure 11 13 Rx Size Analysis window line graph To view the Packet Size Analysis Table click the link View Table which will show the following table 245 Packet Analysis of Port 1 Time Interval ERS 55 127 120 200 296 911 312 1023 1024 1518 Figure 11 14 Rx Size Analysis window table The following fields can be set or viewed Parameter Description Time Interval Select the desired setting between 7s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second Record Number Select the number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200 The default value is 200 The total number of packets including bad packets received that were 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets
281. ll be involved in the Limited IP Multicast Range The user can configure the range of multicast ports that will be accepted by the source ports to be forwarded to the receiver ports To view these settings click L2 Features gt IGMP Snooping gt Limited Multicast Range Settings 111 1 1 ow Add 01 0 Port Profile ID Access State 1 Permit E Permit 3 Permit 4 Permit Permit 5 Ferrut E Permit 5 Permit 3 Permit 1 Permit 11 Permit 12 Permit 13 Ferrut 14 Permit 15 Permit 16 Permit 14 Ferrit l Permit 13 Permit al Ferrut 21 Permit ep Permit 23 Permit 2j Permit AN Ferrut 2b Permit at Permit 20 Permit Figure 7 28 Limited Multicast Range Settings The following parameters can be set Parameter Description Select a range of ports to be granted access or denied access from receiving multicast information Use the drop down menu to select a profile ID 112 Access This field is set to Permit by default Max Multicast Group Settings The Max Multicast Group Settings enables the user to configure the ports on the switch that will be apart of the maximum filter group up to a maximum of 256 To configure these settings click L2 Features gt IGMP Snooping gt Max Multicast Group Settings or ot iw Max Multicast Group wc DO c Lh d ow ro a 3 eai E EE m O ee s e iy JE da em ee SS Figure 7 29 Max Multicast Group Settings window To add a Maximu
282. ll meet the criteria specified before being forwarded on to a specified CoS queue Otherwise a packet will have its incoming 802 1p user priority re written to its original value before being forwarded by the Switch The replace priority feature can only be used with DSCP value and cannot be used with the Packet Content Rule For more information on priority queues CoS queues and mapping for 802 1p see the QoS section of this manual This field will instruct the Switch to mask the packet header beginning with the offset value specified e You can specify an offset of between O and 76 bytes Port Number Enter the switch port number s to which you wish this rule to apply Time Range Enter the specific time range when this access rule will be implemented on the Switch To view the settings of a previously correctly configured rule click 4 in the Access Rule Table to view the following window 3 1 acions A Content Item Profile ID Actions Content Item Content Item3 Content Item4 Content Items Portlist Time Range show All Access Eule Entries Figure 9 14 Access Rule Display window Packet Content 168 CPU Interface Filtering Due to a chipset limitation and the need for extra switch security the DES 30xx switch series incorporates CPU Interface filtering This added feature increases the running security of the Switch by enabling the user to create a list of access rules for packets destined for th
283. lled on approved hardware and operated as contemplated in its documentation D Link further warrants that during the Warranty Period the magnetic media on which D Link delivers the Software will be free of physical defects D Link s sole obligation shall be to replace the non conforming Software or defective media with software that substantially conforms to D Link s functional specifications for the Software Except as otherwise agreed by D Link in writing the replacement Software is provided only to the original licensee and is subject to the terms and conditions of the license granted by D Link for the Software The Warranty Period shall extend for an additional ninety 90 days after any replacement Software is delivered If a material non conformance is incapable of correction or if D Link determines in its sole discretion that it is not practical to replace the non conforming Software the price paid by the original licensee for the non conforming Software will be refunded by D Link provided that the non conforming Software and all copies thereof is first returned to D Link The license granted respecting any Software for which a refund is given automatically terminates What You Must Do For Warranty Service Registration Card The Registration Card provided at the back of this manual must be completed and returned to an Authorized D Link Service Office for each D Link product within ninety 90 days after the product is purchased and or license
284. lowed to perform or be restricted from performing specific SNMP management functions The functions allowed or restricted are defined using the Object Identifier OID associated with a specific MIB An additional layer of security is available for SNMPv3 in that SNMP messages may be encrypted To read more about how to configure SNMPy3 settings for the Switch read the next section Traps Traps are messages that alert network personnel of events that occur on the Switch The events can be as serious as a reboot someone accidentally turned OFF the Switch or less serious like a port status change The Switch generates traps and sends them to the trap recipient or network manager Typical traps include trap messages for Authentication Failure Topology Change and Broadcast Multicast Storm MIBs The Switch in the Management Information Base MIB stores management and counter information The Switch uses the standard MIB II Management Information Base module Consequently values for MIB objects can be retrieved from any SNMP based network management software In addition to the standard MIB II the Switch also supports its own proprietary enterprise MIB as an extended Management Information Base Specifying the MIB Object Identifier may also retrieve the proprietary MIB MIB values can be either read only or read write The DES 3028 28P 28G 52 52P incorporates a flexible SNMP management for the switching environment SNMP management can be customi
285. lu 32 47 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 32 to byte valu 48 63 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 48 to byte value 64 79 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 64 to byte The CPU Access Rule may be configured on a per port basis by entering the port number of the Switch Time Range Click the check box and enter the name of the Time Range settings that has been previously configured in the Time Range window This will set specific times when this CPU access rule will be implemented on the Switch To view the settings of a previously correctly configured rule click Vier in the Access Rule Table to view the following window 1 Fermat Facket Content Offset 0 15 Os 00000000 Ox 00000000 OsQ0000000 Os 00000000 Offset 16 31 Oe Q0000000 Os 00000000 OsQ0000000 OXDODODOD Offset 32 47 Oe Q0000000 Os00000000 Os 00000000 OXDODODOD Offset 48 63 Os Q0000000 Os 00000000 Os 00000000 Os 00000000 Offset 64 79 Os 00000000 Os 00000000 OsQ0000000 Os 00000000 EE 3 2 a jg MEMES Fri e E Time Range ia zx D z E C2 nd c E 3 E termo Rule Entries Figure 9 29 CPU Interface Filtering Rule Display window Packet Content 180 Security Traffic Control Port Security Port Lock Entries IP MAC Port Binding SSL SSH 802 1X Trusted Host Access Authentication Control Traffic Segmentation DoS Attack Prevention Traffic Control On a
286. m Multicast Group range enter the information and click Apply 113 MLD Snooping Multicast Listener Discovery MLD Snooping is an IPv6 function used similarly to IGMP snooping in IPv4 It is used to discover ports on a VLAN that are requesting multicast data Instead of flooding all ports on a selected VLAN with multicast traffic MLD snooping will only forward multicast data to ports that wish to receive this data through the use of queries and reports produced by the requesting ports and the source of the multicast traffic MLD snooping is accomplished through the examination of the layer 3 part of an MLD control packet transferred between end nodes and a MLD router When the Switch discovers that this route is requesting multicast traffic it adds the port directly attached to it into the correct IPv6 multicast table and begins the process of forwarding multicast traffic to that port This entry in the multicast routing table records the port the VLAN ID and the associated multicast IPv6 multicast group address and then considers this port to be a active listening port The active listening ports are the only ones to receive multicast group data MLD Control Messages Three types of messages are transferred between devices using MLD snooping These three messages are all defined by three ICMPvV6 packet headers labeled 130 131 and 132 1 Multicast Listener Query Similar to the IGMPv2 Host Membership Query for IPv4 and labeled as 130 in
287. mage that occurs in shipment due to act of God failures due to power surge and cosmetic damage Any hardware software firmware or other products or services provided by anyone other than D Link and Products that have been purchased from inventory clearance or liquidation sales or other sales in which D Link the sellers or the liquidators expressly disclaim their warranty obligation pertaining to the product While necessary maintenance or repairs on your Product can be performed by any company we recommend that you use only an Authorized D Link Service Office Improper or incorrectly performed maintenance or repair voids this Limited Warranty Disclaimer of Other Warranties EXCEPT FOR THE LIMITED WARRANTY SPECIFIED HEREIN THE PRODUCT IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT IF ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY CANNOT BE DISCLAIMED IN ANY TERRITORY WHERE A PRODUCT IS SOLD THE DURATION OF SUCH IMPLIED WARRANTY SHALL BE LIMITED TO NINETY 90 DAYS EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY COVERED UNDER THE LIMITED WARRANTY PROVIDED HEREIN THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY SELECTION AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT IS WITH THE PURCHASER OF THE PRODUCT Limitation of Liability TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW D LINK IS NOT LIABLE UNDER ANY CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHER LEGAL OR EQUITABLE THEORY FOR ANY LOSS OF USE O
288. manager To manage the Switch the user must enter the IP address or the IP submask and then click the Apply button to implement the setting To remove an individual security IP address from the Switch click the corresponding button under the delete heading To remove all security IP addresses from the Switch click the Clear All button This window displays the following information Parameter Description Add Trusted Host IP Enter an IP Address or a list of IP Addresses including your own that will be given permission to access the Switch 214 Add Trusted Host IP Enter a list of Trusted Host IP Submasks that will be given permission to access the Switch Submask Access Authentication Control The TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS commands allow users to secure access to the Switch using the TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS protocols When a user logs in to the Switch or tries to access the administrator level privilege he or she is prompted for a password If TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS authentication is enabled on the Switch it will contact a TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server to verify the user If the user is verified he or she is granted access to the Switch There are currently three versions of the TACACS security protocol each a separate entity The Switch s software supports the following versions of TACACS E TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Provides password checking and authentic
289. me in days hours and minutes since the Switch was last restarted Log Text Displays text describing the event that triggered the history log entry 249 IGMP Snooping Group This window allows the Switch s IGMP Snooping Group Table to be viewed IGMP Snooping allows the Switch to read the Multicast Group IP address and the corresponding MAC address from IGMP packets that pass through the Switch The number of IGMP reports that were snooped is displayed in the Reports field To view the IGMP Snooping Group window click Monitoring gt IGMP Snooping Group T o L Data Driven Learning YLAN Name Delete All Data Driven learning Entries VLAN ID Multicast Group MAC Address Reports 0 000 0 OO DO OO OO OO OC J Port Map pop ss to ss Total Entries 0 Figure 11 17 IGMP Snooping Group window The user may search the IGMP Snooping Group Table by VID by entering it in the top left hand corner and clicking Search The user may also delete Data Driven learning entries by entering the VLAN Name and clicking Delete or Delete All Data Driven learning Entries The following parameters can be viewed Parameter Description Port Map These are the ports where the IGMP packets were snooped are displayed NOTE To configure IGMP snooping for the Switch go to the L2 Features folder and select IGMP Snooping Configuration and other information concerning IGMP snooping may be f
290. meters can be set or are displayed 146 Parameter Description A consecutive group of ports may be configured starting with the selected port Type This drop down menu allows you to select between AX receive TX transmit and Both This setting will determine whether the bandwidth ceiling is applied to receiving transmitting or both receiving and transmitting packets No Limit This drop down menu allows you to specify that the selected port will have no bandwidth limit Enabled disables the limit port The user may choose a rate between 64 and 1024000 Kbit s This field allows you to enter the data rate in Kbit s that will be the limit for the selected Click Apply to set the bandwidth control for the selected ports Results of configured Bandwidth Settings will be displayed in the Port Bandwidth Table 802 1p Default Priority The Switch allows the assignment of a default 802 1p priority to each port on the Switch To view this window click CoS gt 802 1p Default Priority 147 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 i 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 pes E se exe O a MS E A sem MU m ES ME MA A a cen A E A es ql cem ur se ee MS E Mi O em Figure 8 3 802 1p Default Priority window This window allows you to assign a default 802 1p priority to any given port on the Switch The priority tags are numbered from 0 the lowest priority to 7 the highest priority To implement a new default priority choose a
291. mines timeout conditions in the exchanges between the Authenticator and the client The default setting is 30 seconds ServerTimeout This value determines timeout conditions in the exchanges between the Authenticator and the authentication server The default setting is 30 seconds MaxReq The maximum number of times that the Switch will retransmit an EAP Request to the client before it times out of the authentication sessions The default setting is 2 ReAuthPeriod A constant that defines a nonzero number of seconds between periodic reauthentication of the client The default setting is 3600 seconds ReAuth Determines whether regular reauthentication will take place on this port The default setting is Disabled Click Apply to implement configuration changes 207 Local Users This window will allow the user to set different local users on the Switch To view this window click Security gt 802 1X gt 802 1X User I O otal Entries 1 1 Et Figure 10 25 Local Users Configuration window Enter a User Name Password and confirmation of that password Properly configured local users will be displayed in the Local Users Table at the bottom of the same window to delete an entry click on the corresponding button 208 802 1X Capability Settings This window will allow the user to set the capability settings for individual ports or range of ports on the my To Capability i Switch
292. ministration gt Port Configuration gt Port Deep to view de Plowing widow e Desert Taoie NN Use the Fram and To pull down menu to choose a port or range of ports to describe and then enter a description of the port s Click Apply to set the descriptions in the Port Description Table The Medium Type applies only to the Combo ports If configuring the Combo ports this defines the type of tranport medium being configured SFP ports should be nominated Fiber and the Combo 1000BASE T ports should be nominated Copper The result will be displayed in the appropriate switch port number slot C for copper ports and F for fiber ports Figure 6 4 Port Description window Port Error Disabled The following window will display the information about ports that have had their connection status disabled for reasons such as STP loopback detection or link down status To view this window click Administration gt Port Configuration gt Port Error Disabled Figure 6 5 Port Error Disabled window The following parameters are displayed 33 Parameter Description Port Displays the port that has been error disabled State 8 Describes the current running state of the port whether Enabled or Disabled This field will show if a port has been disabled due to an error detected in the port Reason Describes the reason why the port has been error disabled such as a STP loopback occurrence Description This field further
293. mmands config ipif System ipaddress xxx xxx xxx xxx yyy yyy yyy yyy Where the x s represent the IP address to be assigned to the IP interface named System and the y s represent the corresponding subnet mask Alternatively you can enter config ipif System ipaddress xxx xxx xxx xxx z Where the x s represent the IP address to be assigned to the IP interface named System and the z represents the corresponding number of subnets in CIDR notation The IP interface named System on the Switch can be assigned an IP address and subnet mask and then be used to connect a management station to the Switch s Telnet or Web based management agent 19 DES 3028G 4 config ipif System ipaddress 10 90 90 91 255 0 0 0 Command config ipif System ipaddress 10 90 90 91 8 Success DES 3028G 4 Figure 4 5 Assigning the Switch an IP Address In the above example the Switch was assigned an IP address of 10 90 90 91 with a subnet mask of 255 0 0 0 the CIDR form was used to set the address 10 90 90 91 8 The system message Success indicates that the command was executed successfully The Switch can now be configured and managed via Telnet and the CLI or via the Web based management 20 Web based Switch Configuration Introduction Login to Web manager Web Based User Interface Basic Setup Reboot Basic Switch Setup Network Management Switch Utilities Network Monitoring IGMP Snooping Status Introduction All software functions of the Switch
294. mpliant network device Ingress Filtering A port on a switch where packets are flowing into the Switch and VLAN decisions must be made is referred to as an ingress port If ingress filtering is enabled for a port the Switch will examine the VLAN information in the packet header if present and decide whether or not to forward the packet If the packet is tagged with VLAN information the ingress port will first determine if the ingress port itself is a member of the tagged VLAN If it is not the packet will be dropped If the ingress port is a member of the 802 1Q VLAN the Switch then determines if the destination port is a member of the 802 1Q VLAN If it is not the packet is dropped If the destination port is a member of the 802 1Q VLAN the packet is forwarded and the destination port transmits it to its attached network segment 87 If the packet is not tagged with VLAN information the ingress port will tag the packet with its own PVID as a VID The switch then determines if the destination port is a member of the same VLAN has the same VID as the ingress port If it does not the packet is dropped If it has the same VID the packet is forwarded and the destination port transmits it on its attached network segment This process is referred to as ingress filtering and is used to conserve bandwidth within the Switch by dropping packets that are not on the same VLAN as the ingress port at the point of reception This eliminates the subsequ
295. n In a command line square brackets indicate an optional entry For example copy filename means that optionally you can type copy followed by the name of the file Do not type the brackets Bold font Indicates a button a toolbar icon menu or menu item For example Open the File menu and choose Cancel Used for emphasis May also indicate system messages or prompts appearing on your screen For example You have mail Bold font is also used to represent filenames program names and commands For example use the copy command Boldface Indicates commands and responses to prompts that must be typed exactly as printed in the Typewriter Font manual Initial capital letter Indicates a window name Names of keys on the keyboard have initial capitals For example Click Enter Italics Indicates a window name or a field Also can indicate a variables or parameter that is replaced with an appropriate word or string For example type filename means that you should type the actual filename instead of the word shown in italic Menu Name gt Menu Menu Name gt Menu Option Indicates the menu structure Device gt Port gt Port Option Properties means the Port Properties menu option under the Port menu option that is located under the Device menu Notes Notices and Cautions A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your device a A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data a
296. n Server Group window which will display the following window LL 5 show All Server Group Table Entries Figure 10 38 Authentication Server Group Table Add Settings Simply enter a group name of no more than 15 alphanumeric characters to define the user group to add After clicking Apply the new user defined group will be displayed in the Authentication Server Group window Here it can be configured as the user desires NOTE The user must configure Authentication Server Hosts using the Authentication Server Hosts window before adding hosts to the list Authentication Server Hosts must be configured for their specific protocol on a remote centralized server before this function can work properly NOTE The four built in server groups can only have server hosts running the same TACACS daemon TACACS XTACACS TACACS protocols are separate entities and are not compatible with each other Authentication Server Host This window will set user defined Authentication Server Hosts for the TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS security protocols on the Switch When a user attempts to access the Switch with Authentication Policy enabled the Switch will send authentication packets to a remote TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server host on a remote host The TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server host will then verify or deny the request and return the appropriate message to the Switch More than one authentication protocol can be run on the same
297. n path The following manual describes the installation maintenance and configurations concerning the DES 3028 DES 3028P DES 3028G DES 3052 and DES 3052P These five Switches are identical in configuration and very similar in basic hardware and consequentially most of the information in this manual will be universal to the total group of switches Corresponding screen pictures of the web manager may be taken from any one of these switches but the configuration will be identical except for varying port counts For the remainder of this document we will use the DES 3028G as the Switch in question for examples screen shots configurations and explanations Features IEEE 802 3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol support e IEEE 802 1 X Port based and Host based Access Control IEEE 802 1Q VLAN IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree and IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree support Access Control List ACL support Single IP Management support Access Authentication Control utilizing TACACS XTACACS and TACACS Internal Flash Drive for saving configurations and firmware o Simple Network Time Protocol support MAC Notification support o System and Port Utilization support System Log Support Support port based enable and disable Address table Supports up to 8K MAC addresses per device E Supports a packet buffer of up to 512K bytes Supports Port based VLAN Groups Port Trunking wi
298. n to become the Root Bridge If it turns out that your switch has the lowest Bridge Identifier it will become the Root Bridge The user may choose a time between 6 and 40 seconds The default value is 20 Bridge Hello Time 1 2 The Hello Time can be set from 7 to 2 seconds This is the interval between two Sec transmissions of BPDU packets sent by the Root Bridge to tell all other switches that it is indeed the Root Bridge Bridge Forward Delay 4 The Forward Delay can be from 4 to 30 seconds Any port on the Switch spends this 30 Sec time in the listening state while moving from the blocking state to the forwarding state Max Hops 6 40 Used to set the number of hops between devices in a spanning tree region before the BPDU bridge protocol data unit packet sent by the Switch will be discarded Each switch on the hop count will reduce the hop count by one until the value reaches zero The Switch will then discard the BPDU packet and the information held for the port will age out The user may set a hop count from 6 to 40 The default is 20 STP Version Use the pull down menu to choose the desired version of STP to be implemented on the Switch There are three choices STPCompatability Select this parameter to set the Spanning Tree Protocol STP globally on the switch RSTP Select this parameter to set the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP globally 121 on the Switch MSTP Select this parameter to set the Multiple
299. nd 3 The default SNMP setting is enabled and cannot be disabled The three versions of SNMP vary in the level of security provided between the management station and the network device In SNMP v 1 and v 2 user authentication is accomplished using community strings which function like passwords The remote user SNMP application and the Switch SNMP must use the same community string SNMP packets from any station that has not been authenticated are ignored dropped The default community strings for the Switch used for SNMP v 1 and v 2 management access are e public Allows authorized management stations to retrieve MIB objects e private Allows authorized management stations to retrieve and modify MIB objects SNMPv3 uses a more sophisticated authentication process that is separated into two parts The first part is to maintain a list of users and their attributes that are allowed to act as SNMP managers The second part describes what each user on that list can do as an SNMP manager The Switch allows groups of users to be listed and configured with a shared set of privileges The SNMP version may also be set for a listed group of SNMP managers Thus you may create a group of SNMP managers that are allowed to view read only information or receive traps using SNMPvl while assigning a higher level of security to another group granting read write privi leges using SNMPv3 Using SNMPv3 individual users or groups of SNMP managers can be al
300. nd tells you how to avoid the problem A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage personal injury or death 1X Safety Instructions Use the following safety guidelines to ensure yonr own personal safety and to help protect your system from potential damage Throughout this document the caution icon is used to indicate cautions and precautions that you need to review and follow Safety Cautions To reduce the risk of bodily injury electrical shock fire or damage to the equipment observe the following precautions e Observe and follow service markings Do not service any product except as explained in your system documentation E Opening or removing covers that are marked with the triangular symbol with a lightning bolt may expose you to electrical shock E Only a trained service technician should service components inside these compartments e If any of the following conditions occur unplug the product from the electrical outlet and replace the part or contact your trained service provider The power cable extension cable or plug is damaged An object has fallen into the product The product has been exposed to water The product has been dropped or damaged e The product does not operate correctly when you follow the operating instructions e Keep your system away from radiators and heat sources Also do not block cooling vents e Do not spill food or liquids on your system components
301. nd then slide the component into the rack Do not overload the AC supply branch circuit that provides power to the rack The total rack load should not exceed 80 percent of the branch circuit rating Ensure that proper airflow is provided to components in the rack Do not step on or stand on any component when servicing other components in a rack NOTE A qualified electrician must perform all connections to DC power and to safety grounds All electrical wiring must comply with applicable local regional or national codes and practices CAUTION Never defeat the ground conductor or operate the equipment in the absence of a suitably installed ground conductor Contact the appropriate electrical inspection authority or an electrician if you are uncertain that suitable grounding is available Xi CAUTION The system chassis must be positively grounded to the rack cabinet frame Do not attempt to connect power to the system until grounding cables are connected A qualified electrical inspector must inspect completed power and safety ground wiring An energy hazard will exist if the safety ground cable is omitted or disconnected CAUTION Do not replace the battery with an incorrect type The risk of explosion exists if the replacement battery is not the correct lithium battery type Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions Protecting Against Electrostatic Discharge Static electricity can harm delicate components ins
302. ndonesia Tel 1800 882 880 Malaysia Tel 65 66229355 Singapore Tel 66 2 719 8978 9 Thailand 24 7 for English Support Only http www dlink com sg support e mail support dlink com sg Korea Tel 82 2 2028 1815 Monday to Friday 9 00am to 6 00pm http www d link co kr e mail arthur d link co kr New Zealand Tel 0800 900 900 24 7 24Hrs 7days a week technical support http www dlink co nz D Link Building Networks for People Technical Support You can find software updates and user documentation on the D Link website Tech Support for customers in Egypt Tel 202 2919035 or 202 2919047 Sunday to Thursday 9 00am to 5 00pm http support dlink me com Email support eg dlink me com Iran Te 98 21 88880918 19 Saturday to Thursday 9 00am to 5 00pm http support dlink me com Email support ir dlink me com support dlink ir Israel Magshimim 20 St Matalon center Petach Tikva Israel 49348 Consumer support line 03 9212886 Business support line 03 9212608 Pakistan Tel 92 21 4548158 or 92 21 4548310 Monday to Friday 10 00am to 6 00pm http support dlink me com E mail zkashif dlink me com South Africa and Sub Sahara Region Tel 27 12 665 2165 08600 DLINK for South Africa only Monday to Friday 8 30am to 9 00pm South Africa Time http www d link co za Turkey Tel 90 212 2895659 Monday to Friday 9 00am to 6 00pm http www dlink com tr e mail turkiye dlink me com e mail suppor
303. ne an Enable Login Method List set the following parameters and click Apply Parameter Description Enter a method list name defined by the user of up to 15 characters The user may add one or a combination of up to four of the following authentication 223 methods to this method list local_enable Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the local enable password database on the Switch The user in the next section entitled Local Enable Password must set the local enable password none Adding this parameter will require an authentication to access the Switch radius Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the RADIUS protocol from a remote RADIUS server tacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the TACACS protocol from a remote TACACS server xtacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the XTACACS protocol from a remote XTACACS server tacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the TACACS protocol from a remote TACACS server server_group Adding a previously configured server group will require the user to be authenticated using a user defined server group previously configured on the Switch 224 Configure Local Enable Password This window will configure the locally enabled password for the Enable Admin command When a user chooses the local
304. nected to the CS through the CS management VLAN 3 Candidate Switch CaS This is a switch that is ready to join a SIM group but is not yet a member of the SIM group The Candidate Switch may join the SIM group of a switch by manually configuring it to be a MS of a SIM group A switch configured as a CaS is not a member of a SIM group and will take on the following characteristics E It is not a CS or MS of another Single IP group It is connected to the CS through the CS management VLAN After configuring one switch to operate as the CS of a SIM group additional switches may join the group through a direct connection to the Commander switch Only the Commander switch will allow entry to the candidate switch enabled for SIM The CS will then serve as the in band entry point for access to the MS The CS s IP address will become the path to all MS s of the group and the CS s Administrator s password and or authentication will control access to all MS s of the SIM group With SIM enabled the applications in the CS will redirect the packet instead of executing the packets The applications will decode the packet from the administrator modify some data then send it to the MS After execution the CS may receive a response packet from the MS which it will encode and send it back to the administrator When a CS becomes a MS it automatically becomes a member of the first SNMP community include read write and read only to which the CS belongs Howev
305. ned by the Switch MAC Address The MAC address of the entry in the forwarding database table that has been permanently learned by the Switch Pot The ID number of the port that has permanently learned the MAC address The type of MAC address in the forwarding database table Click the in this field to delete the corresponding MAC address that was permanently learned by the Switch 186 IP MAC Port Binding The IP network layer uses a four byte address The Ethernet link layer uses a six byte MAC address Binding these two address types together allows the transmission of data between the layers The primary purpose of IP MAC binding is to restrict the access to a switch to a number of authorized users Only the authorized client can access the Switch s port by checking the pair of IP MAC addresses with the pre configured database If an unauthorized user tries to access an IP MAC binding enabled port the system will block the access by dropping its packet The maximum number of IP MAC binding entries is dependant on chip capability e g the ARP table size and storage size of the device For this series of switches Active and inactive entries use the same database The maximum entry number is 500 The creation of authorized users can be manually configured by CLI or Web The function is port based meaning a user can enable or disable the function on the individual port IMP Global Settings This window is used to enable or disable
306. neral Precautions for Rack Mountable Products e etr A BREED o T PI ML bMAI TIR RUM MARIA S Xi Protechne Avamst EIecteostauc DISC Dat Pe is user dp IRSE PERA NOE SEO poem dt Ria umu edm deu sp T RE NEU DI MN IE xii NTA OF OCMC sri eR 1 DESTA aca 1 PS UU CS sats este E E E E E E E EA A AE E E E E T E NN l POr RP UM RC 2 EPD Indicators unen a 3 Front Panel DESPUES 5 Rear Ranel DesertptIOlcuo sse ceeds a E E la OE ctae dois 6 Sde Panel Deser pi o A Terr 6 Cia Die OID Or Olle ana E NN 7 Stalin bus but or Teese ane meen peta Du tM roa A nen rete OE MrT hr teen LA eec rene TS 8 Installation incita 9 Package Contents ssasssirumsdantesasenntctqncausesseqentname dee eenneainea tends winonanapleumadambesquamsatanaatiaactecttnomadansosaneunsebanaseonanese nosed tiscauennsaaegmoodananacs 9 Before You Connect tothe INCDVOLE s ocium e od etia et este te ees ne Pu Coe IUE epe Pau De eU ceasvecuceguseec seme epe Pau Te et esa dU acces Gus suecus E 9 Instalhine the 5witeli Without Ehe Rae Kcu ta oec asta 10 Istallitis the Mateo Rae rta da ee Mu ohh dob llo dia 10 Mountime thes witch m a Standard I9 Rack eee A A Ere So eS uta dE ae 1 CONMECHING CHE Nd 12 BO AIRE e End NOdO eh eade addet Tm rT Mettre Rude eee deae en det 12 SWATCH to Biol o X Mon AIL ERE TT 13 Introduction to Switch Management c eee eee eee
307. nfigured access rules the profile ID establishes relative priority of the rules The value can be set from 7 to 256 however there is a limit to the total number of profiles that can be created Select profile based on Ethernet MAC Address IP address or packet content mask This will change the menu according to the requirements for the type of profile Select Ethernet to instruct the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header Select P to instruct the Switch to examine the IP address in each frame s header Select Packet Content Mask to specify a mask to hide the content of the packet header VLAN Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the VLAN identifier of each packet header and use this as the full or partial criterion for forwarding Source MAC Enter a MAC address mask for the source MAC address Destination MAC Enter a MAC address mask for the destination MAC address 802 1p Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the 802 1p priority value of each packet header and use this as the or part of the criterion for forwarding 158 Ethernet Type Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the Ethernet type value in each frame s header The window shown below is the Access Profile Configuration window for IP Profile ID 1 256 YLAN source IP Mask Destination IP Mask DSCP Protocol Type UDP Protocol ID Mask Show Al Access Protle Ta
308. ng IGMP snooping state of this VLAN will also be enabled Users cannot disable the IGMP feature for an enabled ISM VLAN 6 One IP multicast address cannot be added to multiple ISM VLANs yet multiple Ranges can be added to one ISM VLAN The following windows will allow users to create and configure multicast VLANs for the switch To view these windows click L2 Features gt IGMP Snooping gt ISM VLAN Settings add new entry clear all entries IGMP snooping Multicast VLAN Table g Disabled Modify gt Modit m A Total Entries 1 Figure 7 21 IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN Table window The previous window displays the settings for previously created Multicast VLANs To view the settings for a previously created multicast VLAN click the Modify button of the corresponding ISM VLAN you wish to modify To create a new Multicast VLAN click the add new entry link in the top left hand corner of the screen which will produce the following window to be configured show IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN Entries Figure 7 22 IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN Settings Add window Enter a name for the ISM VLAN into the VLAN Name field and choose a VID between 2 and 4094 Entries in these two fields must not have been previously configured on the switch or an error message will be prompted to the user Once these two fields have been filled click the Apply button which will automatically adjust the current window to resemble the
309. ns that require a large bandwidth or have a high priority such as VoIP voice over Internet Protocol web browsing applications file server applications or video conferencing Not only can a larger bandwidth be created but other less critical traffic can be limited so excessive bandwidth can be saved The Switch has separate hardware queues on every physical port to which packets from various applications can be mapped to and in turn prioritized View the following map to see how the Switch implements basic 802 1P priority queuing 143 Implementation of CoS 802 1p Priority Tagging CoS Class 3 CoS Class 2 CoS Priority Tags Packets without CoS tags Incoming packets tagged will be forwarded to the with the CoS priorities 0 7 CoS class based on the will be forwarded to the Co Class as shown above CoS 802 1p default priority set per individual port FE Port 1 GE Port d Link Act AE 13 15 17 19 21 23 Combol 25 27 8 12 16 20 24 sanna 2s x LF 1 6 10 14 18 22 e 7 NS 13 23 MV E EIE J 14 16 18 20 22 24 Combos 2b NES Figure 8 1 An Example of the Default CoS Mapping on the Switch The picture above shows the default priority setting for the Switch Class 3 has the highest priority of the four priority classes of service on the Switch In order to implement CoS the user is required to instruct the Switch to examine the header of a packet to see if it has the proper identifying tag Th
310. nt of time that will constitute your local DST offset Time Offset in 30 60 90 or 120 minutes Minutes 49 Time Zone Offset Use these pull down menus to specify your local time zone s offset from Greenwich Mean from GMT in Time GMT HH MM DST Repeating Settings Using repeating mode will enable DST seasonal time adjustment Repeating mode requires that the DST beginning and ending date be specified using a formula For example specify to begin DST on Saturday during the second week of April and end DST on Sunday during the last week of October From Which Week Enter the week of the month that DST will start of the Month From Which Day of Enter the day of the week that DST will start on the Week From Which Month Enter the month DST will start on From What Time Enter the time of day that DST will start on HH MM To Which Week Enter the week of the month the DST will end To Which Day Enter the day of the week that DST will end To Which Month Which Month Enter the month that Enter the month that DST wil end 0 will end To What Time Enter the time DST will end HH MM DST Annual Settings Using annual mode will enable DST seasonal time adjustment Annual mode requires that the DST beginning and ending date be specified concisely For example specify to begin DST on April 3 and end DST on October 14 Click Apply to implement changes made to the Time Zone and DST window 50 MAC Notification Sett
311. nt picture default 38 29 00 3 This version will support multiple switch upload and downloads for firmware configuration files and log files as follows e Firmware The switch now supports multiple MS firmware downloads from a TFTP server e Configuration Files This switch now supports multiple downloading and uploading of configuration files both to for configuration restoration and from for configuration backup MS s using a TFTP server e Log The switch now supports uploading multiple MS log files to a TFTP server 4 The user may zoom in and zoom out when utilizing the topology window to get a better more defined view of the configurations SIM Settings All switches are set as Candidate CaS switches as their factory default configuration and Single IP Management will be disabled To enable SIM for the Switch using the Web interface click Administration gt Single IP Settings gt SIM Settings Figure 6 45 SIM Settings window disabled Change the SIM State to Enabled using the pull down menu and click Apply The window will then refresh to look like this 69 SIM State Enabled v Role State Candidate v Discovery Interval Good Hold Time MM 100 255 sec Figure 6 46 SIM Settings window enabled If the Switch Administrator wishes to configure the Switch as a Commander
312. ny errors on the copper cables and the position where the errors may have occurred Use the pull down menu to enter the port or range of ports to be tested and click the Test Now button which will display the the results in the Cable Diagnostics Information table below To view this window click Administration gt Cable Diagnostics Pot v Type Link Status ST NNNM 25 FE Link Down Ho Cable HA FE Link Down Ho Cable HA FE Link Up OK 5 FE Link Down Ho Cable HA HE Link Down Ho Cable Nira lala Link Down Ho Cable Nira The cable diagnostics feature is designed primarily tor administrators or customer service representatives to verify and test copper cables it can rapidly determine the quality of the cables and the types of error Notes 1 cable length is displayed as MA tt means the cable length is Hot Available This is due to the FE port being unable to obtain cable length either because its link partner is powered off or the cables used are broken and or bad in quality 2 The maximum cable length is limited to 120 meters 5 Deviation is 5 meters therefore Mo Cable may be displayed under Test Result when the cable used is less than meters in length 4 It also measures cable fault and identities the fault in length according to the distance from this swatch Figure 6 14 Cable Diagnostic Table window The following parameters may be configured or viewed Parameter Descri
313. ny times the device will resend 1 255 an authentication request when the Radius server timeout occurs The default setting is 2 seconds Choose the desired RADIUS server to configure First Second or Third RADIUS Server Set the RADIUS server IP Authentic Port Set the RADIUS authentic server s UDP port The default port is 1812 Accounting Port Set the RADIUS account server s UDP port The default port is 1813 Key Set the key the same as that of the RADIUS server Confirm Key Confirm the shared key is the same as that of the RADIUS server This allows users to set the RADIUS Server as Valid Enabled or nvalid Disabled Trusted Host To view the Trusted Host settings on the switch click Security gt Trusted Host Add Trusted Host IP 0 0 0 0 Add Trusted Host IP Submask 0 0 0 0 Total Entries Note 10 Entries Maximum Trusted Host IP Address Srusten Past IE Address lete Submask Note Create a list of IP addresses that can access the switch Your local host IP address must be one of the IP addresses to avoid disconnection Figure 10 33 Trusted Host window Use the Security IP Management to permit remote stations to manage the Switch If one or more designated management stations are chosen to define only the chosen stations as defined by their IP addresses will be allowed management privileges through the web manager the Telnet session or the SNMP
314. o D Link The repaired or replaced packages will be shipped to the customer via UPS Ground or any common carrier selected by D Link Return shipping charges shall be prepaid by D Link if you use an address in the United States otherwise we will ship the product to you freight collect Expedited shipping is available upon request and provided shipping charges are prepaid by the customer D Link may reject or return any product that is not packaged and shipped in strict compliance with the foregoing requirements or for which an RMA number is not visible from the outside of the package The product owner agrees to pay D Link s reasonable handling and return shipping charges for any product that is not packaged and shipped in accordance with the foregoing requirements or that is determined by D Link not to be defective or non conforming What Is Not Covered The Limited Warranty provided herein by D Link does not cover Products that in D Link s judgment have been subjected to abuse accident alteration modification tampering negligence misuse faulty installation lack of reasonable care repair or service in any way that is not contemplated in the documentation for the product or if the model or serial number has been altered tampered with defaced or removed Initial installation installation and removal of the product for repair and shipping costs Operational adjustments covered in the operating manual for the product and normal maintenance Da
315. of Access Control used on the Switch which are Port Based Access Control This method requires only one user to be authenticated per port by a remote RADIUS server to allow the remaining users on the same port access to the network 2 Host Based Access Control Using this method the Switch will automatically learn up to sixteen MAC addresses by port and set them in a list Each MAC address must be authenticated by the Switch using a remote RADIUS server before being allowed access to the Network Understanding 802 1X Port based and Host based Access Control The original intent behind the development of 802 1 X was to leverage the characteristics of point to point in LANs As any single LAN segment in such infrastructures has no more than two devices attached to it one of which is a Bridge Port The Bridge Port 200 detects events that indicate the attachment of an active device at the remote end of the link or an active device becoming inactive These events can be used to control the authorization state of the Port and initiate the process of authenticating the attached device if the Port is unauthorized This is the Port Based Network Access Control 802 1X Port based Access Control ig RADIUS Server Ethernet Switch AP BEE c 2H A amp S 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X 802 1X Client Client Client Client Client Client Client Client Client Network access controlled port 3 Ne
316. of the ARP request to the network all PCs will receive and examine the frame but only PC B will reply to the query because the destination IP matches see Figure 3 i a Sender n Who is 10 10 10 27 00 20 5C 01 33 33 D0 20 5C 01 11 11 10 10 10 3 a 10 10 10 1 b B T s 00 20 5C 01 44 44 lam 10 10 10 2 00 20 5C 01 22 22 10 10 10 4 10 10 10 2 Figure 3 When PC B replies to an ARP request its MAC address will be written into the Target H W Address table in the ARP payload shown in Table 3 The ARP reply will be then encapsulated into the Ethernet frame again and sent back to the sender The ARP reply is the form of a Unicast communication HAN Protocol Protocol Operation Sender Sender Target Target type type address address H W address protocol H W address protocol length address address 10 10 10 1 10 10 10 2 ARP reply 00 20 5C 01 11 11 00 20 5C 01 22 22 Table 3 ARP Payload When PC B replies to the query Destination Address in the Ethernet frame it will change to PC A s MAC address The Source Address will be changed to PC B s MAC address see Table 4 Table 4 Ethernet frame format The switch will also examine the Source Address of the Ethernet frame and if it finds that the address is not in the Forwarding Table the switch will learn PC B s MAC and update its Forwarding Table Forwarding Table Port 00 20 5C 01 11 11 Port 00 20 5C 01 22 22 How ARP spo
317. ofing attacks a network ARP spoofing also known as ARP poisoning is a method to attack an Ethernet network which may allow an attacker to sniff data frames on a LAN modify the traffic or stop the traffic altogether known as a Denial of Service DoS attack The principle of ARP spoofing is to send the fake or spoofed ARP messages to an Ethernet network Generally the aim is to associate the attacker s or random MAC addresses with the IP address of another node such as the default gateway Any traffic meant for that IP address would be mistakenly re directed to the node specified by the attacker IP spoofing attacks are caused by Gratuitous ARPs that occur when a host sends an ARP request to resolve its own IP address Figure 4 shows a hacker within a LAN to initiate ARP spoofing attack IP 10 10 10 3 MAC Q0 Z0 5C 01 35 33 n IP 10 10 10 254 ES MAC 00 20 5C 0 1 54 54 IP 10 10 10 253 IP 10 10 10 1 MAC 00 20 5C 01 53 53 MAC 00 20 5C 01 11 11 nea i Port 2 Hacker A Ti 10 10 102 wrong ARP entry spreads over the network to spoof all PCs y MAC O0 20 50 01 22 22 Figure 4 In the Gratuitous ARP packet the Sender protocol address and Target protocol address are filled with the same source IP address itself The Sender H W Address and Target H W address are filled with the same source MAC address The destination MAC address is the Ethernet broadcast address FF FF FF FF FF FF All nod
318. og Server configuration click Apply To delete an entry from the System Log Host window click the corresponding under the Delete heading of the entry to delete To return to the System Log Host window click the Show All System Log Servers link 46 Log Settings The Log settings can be changed by clicking the System Log Settings link to open the following window On Demand v On Demand Figure 6 19 Log Settings window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description Log Mode Use this drop down menu to choose the method that will trigger a log entry You can choose between On Demand Log Trigger and Time Interval Time Interval Enter a time interval in seconds for which you would like a log entry to be made 47 SNTP Settings Time Settings This window is used to configure the time settings for the Switch To view this window click Administration gt SNTP Settings gt Time Settings Time Source SNTP State SNTP Secondary Server SNTP Poll Interval in Seconds Figure 6 20 Time Settings window The following parameters can be set or are displayed Parameter Description Current Time SNTP Settings Use this pull down menu to enable or disable the SNTP settings Enabling and configuring SNTP support will override any manually configured system time settings This is the IP address of the primary server
319. ol used by the server host The user may choose one of the following TACACS Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the TACACS protocol e XTACACS Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the XTACACS protocol 219 TACACS Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the TACACS protocol RADIUS Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the RADIUS protocol Port 1 65535 Enter a number between 7 and 65535 to define the virtual port number of the authentication protocol on a server host The default port number is 49 for TACACS XTACACS TACACS servers and 1813 for RADIUS servers but the user may set a unique port number for higher security Timeout 1 255 Enter the time in seconds the Switch will wait for the server host to reply to an authentication request The default value is 5 seconds Retransmit 1 255 Enter the value in the retransmit field to change how many times the device will resend an authentication request when the TACACS server does not respond Key Authentication key to be shared with a configured TACACS or RADIUS servers only Specify an alphanumeric string up to 254 characters Click Apply to add the server host E NOTE More than one authentication protocol can be run on the same physical server i host but remember that TACACS XTACACS TACACS are separate entities and are not compatible with each other 220 Login Method Lists This command will configure a us
320. on client on the client side of the RADIUS authentication protocol It has one row for each RADIUS authentication server that the client shares a secret with To view the RADIUS Authentication click Monitoring gt Port Access Control gt RADIUS Authentication Clear RADIUS Authentication Time Interval lis y Serverindex InvalidServer Identifier ServerlPAddr UDP Port Timeouts Requests Challenges Accepts Rejects 1 Figure 11 29 RADIUS Authentication window s 29 The user may also select the desired time interval to update the statistics between s and 60s where stands for seconds The default value is one second To clear the current statistics shown click the Clear button in the top left Band corner The following fields can be viewed 256 Parameter Description Server The identification number assigned to each RADIUS Authentication server that the client shares a secret with UDP Port The UDP port the client is using to send requests to this server Timeouts The number of authentication timeouts to this server After a timeout the client may retry to the same server send to a different server or give up A retry to the same server is counted as a retransmit as well as a timeout A send to a different server is counted as a Request as well as a timeout Requests The number of RADIUS Access Request packets sent to this server This does not include retransmissions Challenges The number of RADIUS A
321. on configuring local User Accounts on the Switch see the User Accounts section of this manual located in the Administration section 197 802 1X 802 1X Port Based and Host Based Access Control The IEEE 802 1X standard is a security measure for authorizing and authenticating users to gain access to various wired or wireless devices on a specified Local Area Network by using a Client and Server based access control model This is accomplished by using a RADIUS server to authenticate users trying to access a network by relaying Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN EAPOL packets between the Client and the Server The following figure represents a basic EAPOL packet NOTE If the client is authenticated with 802 1X authentication it allows the user to force down the authenticated client via SNMP on R2 with the Radius command item in auth mib OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 3 7 by port based or Host based NOTE If the session timeout attribute on the radius server is set the client will be off line when the client authenticated over the timeout value has been configured on the radius server Ethernet Frame Destination 5 Type ree Protocol version Packet body z EAPOL packet Figure 10 14 The EAPOL Packet Utilizing this method unauthorized devices are restricted from connecting to a LAN through a port to which the user is connected EAPOL packets are the only traffic that can be transmitted through the spec
322. onse Success Fail Timeout Idle Initialize and N A The status of the administrative controlled direction either n or Both Port Status A read only field indicating a port on the Switch Initializing Ports for Host Based 802 1X To initialize ports for the Host side of 802 1X the user must first enable 802 1X by MAC address in the DES 30xx Web Management Tool window Click Security gt 802 1X gt Initialize Port s to open the following window Nac Address d Figure 10 29 Initialize Ports Host based 802 1X To initialize ports choose the range of ports in the From and To field Then the user must specify the MAC address to be initialized by entering it into the MAC Address field and checking the corresponding check box To begin the initialization click Apply NOTE The user must first globally enable 802 1X in the DES 30xx Web Management Tool window before initializing ports Information in the Initialize Ports Table cannot be viewed before enabling 802 1X 211 Reauthenticate Port s for Port Based 802 1X This window allows reauthentication of a port or group of ports by using the pull down menus From and To and clicking Apply The Reauthenticate Port Table displays the current status of the reauthenticated port s once Apply has been clicked Click Security gt 802 1X gt Reauthenticate Port s to open the Reauthenticate Port s window From To Apply Poti v Port
323. ontent Mask to specify a mask to hide the content of the packet header VLAN Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the VLAN part of each packet header and use this as the criterion or part of the criterion for forwarding Source IP Mask Enter an IP address mask for the source IP address Destination IP Mask Enter an IP address mask for the destination IP address DSCP Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the DiffServ Code part of each packet header and use this as the or part of the criterion for forwarding Protocol Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the protocol type value in each frame s header You must then specify what protocol s to include according to the following guidelines 171 Select CMP to instruct the Switch to examine the Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP field in each frame s header e Select Type to further specify that the access profile will apply an ICMP type value or specify Code to further specify that the access profile will apply an ICMP code value Select GMP to instruct the Switch to examine the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP field in each frame s header e Select Type to further specify that the access profile will apply an IGMP type value Select TCP to use the TCP port number contained in an incoming packet as the forwarding criterion Selecting TCP requires that you specify a source port mask and or a destination port mask The
324. open this window and will have the password is incorrect web management will stay at the login page to enter an authentication password Possible 24 wait for user to login again authentication methods for this function include TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS user Enable Admin defined server groups local enable local account on the Switch or no authentication none Because Figure 10 49 Enable Admin window XTACACS and TACACS do not support the enable function the user must create a special account on the Connect to 10 90 90 90 server host which has the username enable and a password configured by the administrator that will support the enable function This function becomes inoperable when the authentication policy is disabled M DES 3028P When this window appears click the Enable Admin button revealing a dialog box for the user to enter Baie i admin authentication password username as seen below A pes um successful entry will promote the user to Administrator level privileges on the Switch Remember my password To view the following window click Security gt Access Authentication Control gt Enable Admin Figure 10 50 Enter Network Password dialog box 2275 Traffic Segmentation Traffic segmentation is used to limit traffic flow from a single port to a group of ports on a single Switch This method of segmenting the flow of traffic is similar to using VLANs to limit traffic
325. option 82 data Finally the relay agent removes the option 82 field and forwards the packet to the switch port that connects to the DHCP client that sent the DHCP request Disabled If the field is toggled to Disabled the relay agent will not insert and remove DHCP relay information option 82 field in messages between DHCP servers and clients and the 35 LLL check and policy settings will have no effect DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 Check DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 Policy DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 Remote ID This field can be toggled between Enabled and Disabled using the pull down menu It is used to enable or disable the Switches ability to check the validity of the packet s option 82 field Enabled When the field is toggled to Enable the relay agent will check the validity of the packet s option 82 field If the switch receives a packet that contains the option 82 field from a DHCP client the switch drops the packet because it is invalid In packets received from DHCP servers the relay agent will drop invalid messages Disabled When the field is toggled to Disabled the relay agent will not check the validity of the packet s option 82 field This field can be toggled between Replace Drop and Keep by using the pull down menu It is used to set the Switches policy for handling packets when the DHCP Agent Information Option 82 Check is set to Disabled The default is Replace
326. ording to expected packet loss If packet loss on the VLAN is expected to be high the Robustness Variable should be increased to accommodate increased packet loss This entry field allows an entry of 7 to 255 Default 2 Last Member Query This field specifies the maximum amount of time between group specific query messages Interval including those sent in response to leave group messages Default 7 Host Timeout This is the maximum amount of time in seconds allowed for a host to continue membership in a multicast group without the Switch receiving a host membership report Default 260 Router Timeout This is the maximum amount of time in seconds a route is kept in the forwarding table without receiving a membership report Default 260 Leave Timer This specifies the maximum amount of time in seconds between the Switch receiving a leave group message from a host and the Switch issuing a group membership query If no response to the membership query is received before the Leave Timer expires the multicast forwarding entry for that host is deleted The default setting is 2 Robustness Value Note The leave timer does not need to be configured as its action has no effect on the IGMP snooping settings Querier State Choose Enabled to enable transmitting IGMP Query packets or Disabled to disable The default is Disabled Querier Router This read only field describes the behavior of the router for sending query packets Queri
327. orporated These multicast VLANs will allow the Switch to forward this multicast traffic as one copy to recipients of the multicast VLAN instead of multiple copies Regardless of other normal VLANs that are incorporated on the Switch users may add any ports to the multicast VLAN where they wish multicast traffic to be sent Users are to set up a source port where the multicast traffic is entering the switch and then set the ports where the incoming multicast traffic is to be sent The source port cannot be a recipient port and if configured to do so will cause error messages to be produced by the switch Once properly configured the stream of multicast data will be relayed to the receiver ports in a much more timely and reliable fashion Restrictions and Provisos The Multicast VLAN feature of this switch does have some restrictions and limitations such as 1 Multicast VLANs can be implemented on edge and non edge switches 2 Member ports and source ports can be used in multiple ISM VLANs But member ports and source ports cannot be the same port in a specific ISM VLAN 3 The Multicast VLAN is exclusive with normal 802 1q VLANs which means that VLAN IDs VIDs and VLAN Names of 802 1q VLANs and ISM VLANs cannot be the same Once a VID or VLAN Name is chosen for any VLAN it cannot be used for any other VLAN 4 The normal display of configured VLANs will not display configured Multicast VLANs 5 OnceanISM VLAN is enabled the correspondi
328. ort but it cannot detect the LoopBack condition on the elected root port of STP on another switch STP Bridge Global Settings To view the STP Bridge Global Settings window click L2 features gt Spanning Tree gt STP Bridge Global Settings Spanning Tree Protocol Disabled v Bridge Max Age 6 40 Sec Bridge Hello Time 1 2 Sec Bridge Forward Delay 4 30 Sec Maa STP Version Pere TX Hold Count 1 10 6 Forwarding BPDU Loopback Detection LED Recover Time 0 Disable AD Note Forward Delay i gt Max Age Max Age gt Hello Time i Figure 7 34 STP Bridge Global Settings window RSTP spanning Tree Protocol Disabled Y Bridge Max Age 6 40 Sec 20 Bridge Forward Delay 4 30 Sec 115 Mans G SIP Version MSTP TX Hold Count 1 10 E Forwarding EPDU Enabled v Loopback Detection Enabled v LED Recover Time 0 Disable B Note Forward Delav 1 gt Max Age Max Age Rello T
329. orts that are present within each switch A O dnastsggd2ssclMlMlllNMMNMNNN NN DES 3028 and DES 3028P DES 3028G DES 3052 and DES 3052P Twenty four 10 100BASE T Twenty four 10 100BASE T Forty eight 10 100Mbps Ports Two 1000Base T SFP Combo Four 1000Base T SFP Combo Two 1000Base T SFP Combo Ports Ports Ports Two 1000Base T Ports Two 1000Base T Ports One female DCE RS 232 DB 9 One female DCE RS 232 DB 9 One female DCE RS 232 DB 9 console port console port console port The following table lists the features and compatibility for each type of port present in the DES 3028 28P 28G 52 52P i 10 100 1000BASE T SFP Combo 1000BASE T Combo ea A Sa SS Se SSS SE IEEE 802 3 compliant SFP Transceivers Supported EEE 802 3 compliant DEM 310GT 1000BASE LX IEEE 802 3u compliant DEM 311GT 1000BASE SX IEEE 802 3u compliant IEEE 802 3x flow control DEM 314GT 1000BASE LH IEEE 802 3ab compliant support in full duplex DEM 315GT 1000BASE 2X IEEE 565 37 compliant Auto MDOONDEN ess ee oae d 100BASE FX IEEE 802 3x flow control over supported except DEM 211 Mult Mode z support in full duplex for speed 1000M force 100BASE FX mode WDM Transceiver Supported DEM 330T TX 1550 RX 1310nm up to 10km Single Mode DEM 330R TX 1310 RX 1550nm up to 10km Single Mode DEM 331T TX 1550 RX 1310nm up to 40km Single Mode DEM 331R TX 1310 RX 1550nm up to 40km Single Mode Compliant to the following standards
330. ough its Authentication Server Hosts and no authentication is returned the Switch will then go to the next technique listed in the server group for authentication until the authentication has been verified or denied or the list is exhausted Please note that users granted access to the Switch will be granted normal user privileges on the Switch To gain access to administrator level privileges the user must access the Enable Admin window and then enter a password which was previously configured by the administrator of the Switch ES NOTE TACACS XTACACS and TACACS are separate entities and are not dE compatible The Switch and the server must be configured exactly the same using the AV same protocol For example if the Switch is set up for TACACS authentication so must be the host server 215 Authentication Policy and Parameter Settings This command will enable an administrator defined authentication policy for users trying to access the Switch When enabled the device will check the Login Method List and choose a technique for user authentication upon login To access the following window click Security gt Access Authentication Control gt Authentication Policy and Parameter Settings Authentication Policy Disabled Response Timeout 0 255 User Attempts 1 255 Figure 10 34 Authentication Policy and Parameters Settings window The following parameters can be se
331. ound in Section 7 of this manual under IGMP Snooping 250 Browse Router Port This window displays which of the Switch s ports are currently configured as router ports A router port configured by a user using the console or Web based management interfaces 1s displayed as a static router port designated by S A router port that is dynamically configured by the Switch is designated by D To view this window click Monitoring Browse Router Port Total Entries 1 VLAN ID VLAN Name 1 default Ports 1p pee E E E p 9 Tu d i Figure 11 18 Browse Router Port window VLAN Status This window allows the VLAN status for each of the Switch s ports to be viewed by VLAN This window displays the ports on the Switch that are currently Egress E or Tag T ports This window displays the ports on the Switch that are currently Egress E or Tag T ports To view this window click Monitoring VLAN Status Total VLAN Entries 1 YLAN Name detault Figure 11 19 VLAN Status window MLD Snooping Group The following window allows the user to view MLD Snooping Groups present on the Switch MLD Snooping is an IPv6 function comparable to IGMP Snooping for IPv4 The user may browse this table by VLAN Name present in the Switch by entering that VLAN Name in the empty field shown below and clicking the Find button The results will be shown on the MLD IGMP Snooping Group Table To view the MLD Snooping Gr
332. oup window click Monitoring gt MLD Snooping Group 251 YLAWN Name Total Entnes 0 Figure 11 20 MLD Snooping Group window The following field can be viewed Parameter Description Mode ispaye tne curent modo ofthe MLD m is NOTE To configure MLD snooping for the Switch go to the L2 Features folder and select MLD Snooping gt MLD Snooping Settings Browse MLD Snooping Router Port This window displays which of the Switch s ports are currently configured as router ports in IPv6 A router port configured by a user using the console or Web based management interfaces is displayed as a static router port designated by S A router port that is dynamically configured by the Switch is designated by D while a Forbidden port is designated by F Use the Next or Previous button to view all the MLD Snooping Router Port entries To view the Browse MLD Snooping Router Port window click Monitoring gt Browse MLD Snooping Router Port Previous Figure 11 21 Browse MLD Snooping Router Port window 252 Static ARP Settings This window will show current ARP entries on the Switch To clear the ARP Table click Clear All To view this window click Monitoring gt Static ARP Settings static ARP Settings 10 0 0 0 FF FF FF FF FF FF LocalBroadcast Modiy 10 44 8 253 00 44 08 FD 09 09 Dynamic X 10 63 67 7 00 09 41 D8 15 0E Dynamic Modity X 10 54 51 178 00 11 D8 3B D6 A4 Dynamic Modify X 10 7
333. ow the Switch s firmware to Active a BT ame E be upgraded by transferring a new firmware file from a TFTP server to the ETzw 2 E iets D Switch A configuration file can also be loaded into the Switch from a TFTP CHN server Switch settings can be saved to Image ID IM the TFTP server and a history log can be uploaded from the Switch to the TFTP Increment server The TFTP server must be running TFTP server software to perform the file transfer Figure 6 23 TFTP Services window The user also has the option of transferring firmware and configuration files to and from the internal Flash drive located on the Switch Using this window the user can add a configuration or firmware file from a TFTP server to the flash memory or transfer that firmware or configuration file to a TFTP server More about configuring the internal Flash drive can be found in the next section entitled Flash File Services TFTP server software 1s a part of many network management software packages such as NetSight or can be obtained as a separate program To update the Switch s firmware or configuration file click Administration gt TFTP Services The following parameters can be configured Parameter Description Active Select a service for the TFTP server to perform from the drop down window Download Firmware Enter the IP address of the TFTP server and specify the location of the new firmw
334. ow the following table 243 Packet Analysis of Port Port 1 lis y ExDefer LatelColl Ex all SingColl oll Pe eer Figure 11 12 Tx Error Analysis window table The following fields may be set or viewed Parameter Description Time Interval Select the desired setting between 7s and 60s where s stands for seconds The default value is one second Record Number Select number of times the Switch will be polled between 20 and 200 The default value is 200 Counts the number of packets for which the first transmission attempt on a particular interface was delayed because the medium was busy CRC Error Counts otherwise valid packets that did not end on a byte octet boundary LateColl Counts the number of times that a collision is detected later than 512 bit times into the transmission of a packet ExColl Excessive Collisions The number of packets for which transmission failed due to excessive collisions Single Collision Frames The number of successfully transmitted packets for which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision 244 Packet Size The Web Manager allows packets received by the Switch arranged in six groups and classed by size to be viewed as either a line graph or a table Two windows are offered To select a port to view these statistics for select the port by using the Port pull down menu The user may also use the real time graphic of the Switch at the top of the web page by simply c
335. ower supply Unplug the power cable before removing the power supply If the system has multiple sources of power disconnect power from the system by unplugging all power cables from the power supplies Move products with care ensure that all casters and or stabilizers are firmly connected to the system Avoid sudden stops and uneven surfaces General Precautions for Rack Mountable Products Observe the following precautions for rack stability and safety Also refer to the rack installation documentation accompanying the system and the rack for specific caution statements and procedures Systems are considered to be components in a rack Thus component refers to any system as well as to various peripherals or supporting hardware Before working on the rack make sure that the stabilizers are secured to the rack extended to the floor and that the full weight of the rack rests on the floor Install front and side stabilizers on a single rack or front stabilizers for joined multiple racks before working on the rack Always load the rack from the bottom up and load the heaviest item in the rack first Make sure that the rack is level and stable before extending a component from the rack Use caution when pressing the component rail release latches and sliding a component into or out of a rack the slide rails can pinch your fingers After a component is inserted into the rack carefully extend the rail into a locking position a
336. plex operations 6 IEEE 802 3x Flow Control support for Full Duplex mode back pressure when Half Duplex mode and Head of line blocking prevention SFP Transceivers Supported 266 DEM 310GT 1000BASE LX DEM 311GT 1000BASE SX DEM 314GT 1000BASE LH DEM 315GT 1000BASE ZX DEM 210 Single Mode 100BASE FX DEM 211 Multi Mode 100BASE FX WDM Transceiver Supported 1 DEM 330T TX 1550 RX 1310nm up to 10km Single Mode 2 DEM 330R TX 1310 RX 1550nm up to 10km Single Mode 3 DEM 331T TX 1550 RX 1310nm up to 40km Single Mode 4 DEM 331R TX 1310 RX 1550nm up to 40km Single Mode Compliant to following standards 1 IEEE 802 3z compliance 2 EEE 802 3u compliance 1000BASE T ports compliant to following standards 1 IEEE 802 3 compliance 2 IEEE 802 3u compliance 1000BASE T ports in the front panel 3 IEEE 802 3ab compliance 4 Support Full Duplex operations 5 IEEE 802 3x Flow Control support for Full Duplex mode back pressure when Half Duplex mode and Head of line blocking prevention Pin Assignment for Data Power Pairs alternative A MDI X COI o tmm IC IN IO ICA IS IE ICO TO E YAA IC INS IE 267 System Log Entries The following table lists all possible entries and their corresponding meanings that will appear in the System Log of this Switch Category Event Description Log Content Configuration saved to flash Configuration saved to flash Informational Username
337. protocol LLDP allows the transmitter and the receiver to be separately enabled making it possible to configure an implementation to restrict the local LLDP agent either to transmit only or receive only or to allow the local LLDP agent to both transmit and receive LLDP information LLDP Global Settings The following window is used to set up LLDP on the Switch To view this window click L2 Features gt LLDP gt LLDP Global Settings 131 LLDP Operation State Disabled v LLDP Forward Message State Disabled v Message TX Interval 5 32768 3000 Message TX Hold Multipher 2 10 4 Relnit Delay 1 10 TX Delay 1 8192 Notification Interval 5 3600 Chassis LD Subtype MAC ADDRESS i 00 21 91 98 60 77 system Name system Description Fast Ethernet Switch system Capabilities Repeater Bridge Figure 7 47 LLDP Operation State Settings window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description LLDP Operation When this function is Enabled the switch can start to transmit LLDP packets and receive and State process the LLDP packets The specific function of each port will depend on the per port LLDP setting For the advertisement of LLDP packets the switch announces the inform
338. ption Specifies a port or range of ports to be tested Type FE ports have two pairs of cable will be diagnosed GE ports have four pairs of cable that will be diagnosed Link Status Link Up When a port is in link up status the test will be able to determine the distance of the cable as well as any problems it may have Due to the fact the port is in link up status it will not have any Short or Open problems but the test may still detect if there is a Crosstalk problem Link Down When a particular port is in link down status the link down may be caused by many factors e When the port has a normal cable connection but the remote partner is powered off the cable diagnosis can still diagnose the health of the cable as if the remote partner was powered on When the port does not have any cable connection the result of the test will indicate no cable The test will detect the type of error and the position where the error has occurred 42 Test Results If there are no problems with the cable the test results will show that the cable is OK if there are no cables connected to the port the results will show No Cable However there are three types of errors that may occur Open Short or Crosstalk Open means that the cable in the error pair does not have a connection at the specified position Short means that the cable in the error pair has a short problem at the specified position Crosstalk means that the cable in the er
339. ption 82 in the DES 3028 28P 28G 52 S2P switches The config dhcp relay option 82 command configures the DHCP relay agent information option 82 setting of the switch The formats for the circuit ID sub option and the remote ID sub option are as follows So X wee uso qp x NOTE For the circuit ID sub option of a standalone switch the module field is always zero Circuit ID sub option format l eA 3 4 5 6 d fete ow 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes l byte 1 byte Sub option type Length Circuit ID type Length VLAN the incoming VLAN ID of DHCP client packet Module For a standalone switch the Module is always 0 For a stackable switch the Module is the Unit ID Port The incoming port number of DHCP client packet port number starts from 1 Remote ID sub option format 1 l 2 3 4 5 A o 0 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 6 bytes 1 Sub option type 2 Length 3 Remote ID type 4 Length 5 MAC address The Switch s system MAC address Figure 6 7 Circuit ID and Remote ID Sub option Format 1 Remote ID sub option format 2 1 2 os 4 5 1 byte l byte 1 byte 1 byte 6 bytes 1 Sub option type 37 Length the string length of the Remote ID suboption Remote ID type Length the string length of the user defined string oo dee A User defined string Figure 6 8 Circuit ID and Remote ID Sub option Format 2 DHCP BOOTP Relay Interface Settings This window allows the user to set up a ser
340. quirements Class 1 Laser Product EN60825 1 A2 2001 or later European laser standard FCC 21 CFR Chapter 1 Subchapter J in accordance with FDA amp CDRH requirements Warranties Registration LIMITED WARRANTY D Link provides this limited warranty for its product only to the person or entity who originally purchased the product from D Link or its authorized reseller or distributor D Link would fulfill the warranty obligation according to the local warranty policy in which you purchased our products Limited Hardware Warranty D Link warrants that the hardware portion of the D Link products described below Hardware will be free from material defects in workmanship and materials from the date of original retail purchase of the Hardware for the period set forth below applicable to the product type Warranty Period if the Hardware is used and serviced in accordance with applicable documentation provided that a completed Registration Card is returned to an Authorized D Link Service Office within ninety 90 days after the date of original retail purchase of the Hardware If a completed Registration Card is not received by an authorized D Link Service Office within such ninety 90 period then the Warranty Period shall be ninety 90 days from the date of purchase Product Type Warranty Period Product including Power Supplies and Fans One 1 Year Spare parts and pare kits Ninety 90 days D Link s sole obligation shall be to
341. r accounts See the DES 3028 28P 28G 52 52P CLI Manual on the documentation CD for a list of all commands and additional information on using the CLI When you have completed your tasks exit the session with the logout command or close the emulator program Make sure the terminal or PC you are using to make this connection 1s configured to match these settings If you are having problems making this connection on a PC make sure the emulation is set to VT 100 You will be able to set the emulation by clicking on the File menu in you HyperTerminal window clicking on Properties in the drop down menu and then clicking the Settings tab This is where you will find the Emulation options If you still do not see anything try rebooting the Switch by disconnecting its power supply Once connected to the console the screen below will appear on your console screen This is where the user will enter commands to perform all the available management functions The Switch will prompt the user to enter a user name and a password Upon the initial connection there is no user name or password and therefore just press enter twice to access the command line interface DES 3028G Fast Ethernet Switch Command Line Interface Firmware Build 2 00 B26 Copyright C 2009 D Link Corporation All rights reserved UserName Figure 4 1 Initial screen after first connection 15 First Time Connecting to the Switch The Switch supports user based security that can
342. r of security is available for SNMP v 3 in that SNMP messages may be encrypted To read more about how to configure SNMP v 3 settings for the Switch read the section entitled Management Traps Traps are messages that alert network personnel of events that occur on the Switch The events can be as serious as a reboot someone accidentally turned OFF the Switch or less serious like a port status change The Switch generates traps and sends them to the trap recipient or network manager Typical traps include trap messages for Authentication Failure Topology Change and Broadcast Multicast Storm MIBs The Switch in the Management Information Base MIB stores management and counter information The Switch uses the standard MIB II Management Information Base module Consequently values for MIB objects can be retrieved from any SNMP based network management software In addition to the standard MIB II the Switch also supports its own proprietary enterprise MIB as an extended Management Information Base Specifying the MIB Object Identifier may also retrieve the proprietary MIB MIB values can be either read only or read write IP Address Assignment Each Switch must be assigned its own IP Address which is used for communication with an SNMP network manager or other TCP IP application for example BOOTP TFTP The Switch s default IP address is 10 90 90 90 You can change the default Switch IP address to meet the specification of your networking a
343. r will require the user to be authenticated using the TACACS protocol from a remote TACACS server radius Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the RADIUS protocol from a remote RADIUS server server_group Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using a user defined server group previously configured on the Switch local Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the local user account database on the Switch none Adding this parameter will require an authentication to access the Switch The Enable Method List Settings window is used to set up Method Lists to promote users with user level privileges to Administrator Admin level privileges using authentication methods on the Switch Once a user acquires normal user level privileges on the Switch he or she must be authenticated by a method on the Switch to gain administrator privileges on the Switch which is defined by the Administrator A maximum of eight Enable Method Lists can be implemented on the Switch one of which is a default Enable Method List This default Enable Method List cannot be deleted but can be configured The sequence of methods implemented in this command will affect the authentication result For example if a user enters a sequence of methods like TACACS XTACACS Local Enable the Switch will send an authentication request to the first TACACS host in the server group If no v
344. rade window Configuration Backup Restore This screen is used to upgrade configuration files from the Commander Switch to the Member Switch using a TFTP server Member Switches will be listed in the table and will be specified by Port port on the CS where the MS resides MAC Address Model Name and Version To specify a certain Switch for upgrading configuration files click its corresponding check box in the first column of the table To update the configuration file enter the Server IP Address where the file resides and enter the Path Filename of the configuration file Click Download to initiate the file transfer from a TFTP server to the Switch Click Upload to backup the configuration file to a TFTP server To access the following window click Administration gt Single IP Management Settings gt Configuration Backup Restore T1 Lp n ae j ke 4 EA ka A q Ld Fe ITIN TT A T T Dor MAC Address Model Name Version Yo 1 25 00 19 5B EF 78 B5 DES 3028P L2 Switch 2 00 B20 Server IP Address 0 Path Filename Figure 6 62 Configuration File Backup Restore window Upload Log The following window is used to upload log files from SIM member switches to a specified PC To upload a log file enter the IP address of the PC and then enter a path on your PC where you wish to save this file Select the member switches which will upload log files by clicking th
345. ransfer Mode A connection oriented transmission protocol based on fixed length cells packets ATM is designed to carry a complete range of user traffic including voice data and video signals auto negotiation A feature on a port which allows it to advertise its capabilities for speed duplex and flow control When connected to an end station that also supports auto negotiation the link can self detect its optimum operating setup backbone port A port which does not learn device addresses and which receives all frames with an unknown address Backbone ports are normally used to connect the Switch to the backbone of your network Note that backbone ports were formerly known as designated downlink ports backbone The part of a network used as the primary path for transporting traffic between network segments bandwidth Information capacity measured in bits per second that a channel can transmit The bandwidth of Ethernet is 10Mbps the bandwidth of Fast Ethernet is 100Mbps baud rate The switching speed of a line Also known as line speed between network segments BOOTP The BOOTP protocol allows you to automatically map an IP address to a given MAC address each time a device is started In addition the protocol can assign the subnet mask and default gateway to a device bridge A device that interconnects local or remote networks no matter what higher level protocols are involved Bridges form a single logical network centralizing net
346. reated in the previous window The following parameters can set Parameter Description View Name Type an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters This is used to identify the new SNMP view being created Subtree OID Type the Object Identifier OID Subtree for the view The OID identifies an object tree MIB tree that will be included or excluded from access by an SNMP manager View Type Select ncluded to ensure this object is included in the list of objects that an SNMP manager can access Select Excluded to exclude this object from the list of objects that an SNMP manager can access 60 To implement your new settings click Apply To return to the SNMP View Table click the Show All SNMP View Table Entries link SNMP Group Table An SNMP Group created with this table maps SNMP users identified in the SNMP User Table to the views created in the previous menu To view the SNMP Group Table window click Administration gt SNMP Manager gt SNMP Group Table Add Total Entries 9 Note Itis allowed insert 30 entries into the table only SNMP Group Table Group Name security Level Delete SINMPYI No AuthNoPrv SINMPYZ MoAuthHoPrnv SNMP NoAuthMHoPrv SINMPYI MoAuthMHoPrv IN RAP NoAuthNoPriv IRAP y 1 Mo AuthNoPrv I LAP No Auth oPriv SINMPSI Mo AuthMNoPrv IN RAP NoAuthNoPriv x X X X X X X Figure 6 36 SNMP Group Table window To delete an existing SNMP Group Table entry click the corresponding
347. ress Egress or Both and change the Status drop down menu to Enabled 3 Click Apply to let the changes take effect NOTE You cannot mirror a fast port onto a slower port For example if you try to mirror the traffic from a 100 Mbps port onto a 10 Mbps port this can cause throughput problems The port you are copying frames from should always support an equal or lower speed than the port to which you are sending the copies Also the target port for the mirroring cannot be a member of a trunk group Please note a target port and a source port cannot be the same port 44 System Log Settings The Switch can send Syslog messages to up to four designated servers using the System Log Server To view this window click Administration gt System Log Settings to view the window shown below Figure 6 16 System Log Host window The parameters configured for adding and editing System Log Server settings are the same See the table below for a description ico mse Sre V UDP Port 514 or 6000 65535 51 4 Disabled Show All System Log Servers Figure 6 17 System Log Host Add window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description S Syslog server settings index 1 4 HostIP The IP address The IP address ofthe Syslog server the The IP address ofthe Syslog server server
348. riority based scheduling any packets residing in the higher priority classes of service are transmitted first Multiple strict priority classes of service are emptied based on their priority tags Only when these classes are empty are packets of lower priority transmitted 144 For weighted round robin queuing the number of packets sent from each priority queue depends upon the assigned weight For a configuration of eight CoS queues A H with their respective weight value 8 1 the packets are sent in the following sequence Al B1 C1 D1 El Fl Gl H1 A2 B2 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A3 B3 C3 D3 E3 F3 A4 B4 C4 D4 E4 AS B5 C5 DS A6 B6 C6 A7 B7 A8 Al BI CI DI EI Fl Gl HI For weighted round robin queuing if each CoS queue has the same weight value then each CoS queue has an equal opportunity to send packets just like round robin queuing For weighted round robin queuing if the weight for a CoS is set to 1 then it will continue processing the packets from this CoS until there is one packet for this CoS The other CoS queues that have been given a value and depending upon the weight will follow a common weighted round robin scheme Remember that the Switch has four configurable priority queues and four Classes of Service for each port on the Switch 145 Port Bandwidth The bandwidth control settings are used to place a ceiling on the transmitting and receiving data rates for any selected port To view this win
349. rmation about the host MAC address switch port number the switch IP and the multicast group IP When an access accept request is answered from the authentication server the switch learns the multicast group If an access reject request is answered from the authentication server the switch will not learn the multicast group port and will not process the packet any further The entry will then be put on the authentication failed list If there 1s no answer from the authentication server after a specific period of time the switch will resend the access request to the server If the switch doesn t receive any response after a specific number of times the request is denied and the entry is entered into the authentication failed list When the multicast group port is already learned by the switch it will not do the authentication again NOTE User Name string MAC address of the computer which will send the IGMP report IGMP leave packet MN NAS Port The switch port number NAS IP Address The switch IP address Framed IP Address The multicast group IP that makes the join leave attempt 1 In RFC2865 the attribute Framed IP Address indicates that the NAS should use that value as the user s IP address In this function we use that value as the multicast group IP address 2 The attribute User Name indicates the hosts MAC address in the format 000102030405 3 The attribute User Password indicates the password to be authenticated The vaule is t
350. rning Description Use the pull down menus to select the port or range of ports to be configured Toggle this field to either enable or disable a given port or group of ports Toggle the Speed Duplex field to either select the speed and duplex state of the port Auto denotes auto negotiation between 10 and 100 Mbps devices in full or half duplex The Auto setting allows the port to automatically determine the fastest settings the device the port is connected to can handle and then to use those settings The other options are 10M Half 10M Full 100M Half and 100M Full 1000M Full M and 1000M Full S There is no automatic adjustment of port settings with any option other than Auto The fiber port Speed Duplex only supports Auto and 1000M Full The Switch allows the user to configure two types of gigabit connections 7000M Full M and 1000M Full S Gigabit connections only support full duplex connections and take on certain characteristics that are different from the other choices listed The 7000M Full M master and 1000M Full_S slave parameters refer to connections running a 1000BASE T cable for connection between the Switch port and other device capable of a gigabit connection The master setting 1000M Full M will allow the port to advertise capabilities related to duplex speed and physical layer type The master setting will also determine the master and slave relationship between the two connected physical layers This relationship is
351. ror pair has a crosstalk problem at the specified position Cable Length M Determines the length of a cable for a particular port Enter the appropriate information and click Test Now the results will be displayed in the Cable Diagnostics Information table 43 Port Mirroring The Switch allows you to copy frames transmitted and received on a port and redirect the copies to another port You can attach a monitoring device to the mirrored port such as a sniffer or an RMON probe to view details about the packets passing through the first port This is useful for network monitoring and troubleshooting purposes To view the Port Mirroring window click Administration gt Port Mirroring T NN RR NR NN NM T v NE Ingress LINE NEL NEU MEL Egress LINE NEL MEL MEL o o o oc 2 O O O TOITNEINCNUN M NN O O O O OO LEE SEC O None Ingress O O O O O Egress O O Q O Both O O Target Port Port ow qe EEE eet oo tte JEDE etse JEDE PEE EEE do LEE J Status Disabled v Note l lhe Source Port and Target Port should be different or the setup will be invalid Note Z The Target Port should be a non trunked port Figure 6 15 Port Mirroring window To configure a mirror port 1 Select the Source Port from where you want to copy frames and the Target Port which receives the copies from the source port 2 Select the Source Direction Ing
352. rs Click Apply to implement changes made NOTE Address Resolution Protocol ARP is the standard for finding a host s hardware address MAC Address However ARP is vulnerable as it can be easily spoofed and utilized to attack a LAN For a more detailed explanation on how ARP works and how to employ D Link s advanced unique Packet Content ACL to prevent ARP spoofing attack please see Appendix E at the end of this manual To establish the rule for a previously created Access Profile To edit or add a rule to a previously created profile click the corresponding Add Modify button under the Access Rule heading in the Access Profile Table window the following window will be displayed If no entry exists only the Add button will be displayed however when an entry already exists a corresponding Modify button will also be displayed Add Profle ID Show All Access Profile Entries Figure 9 6 Access Rule Table window To create a new rule set for an access profile click the Add button A new window is displayed To remove a previously created rule click the corresponding button 2 Permit Deny Rx Rate Mo Limit 0 kbps Auto Assign replace priority YLAN Name source IP Destination IP DSC P 0 63 Portlist Time Range Show Al Access Rule Entries Figure 9 7 Access Rule Configuration window IP Configure the following Acce
353. s Profile Table window 157 To add an entry to the Access Profile Table click the Add button This will open the Access Profile Configuration window as shown below There are three Access Profile Configuration windows one for Ethernet or MAC address based profile configuration one for IP address based profile configuration and one for the Packet Content Mask You can switch between the three Access Profile Configuration windows by using the Type drop down menu or clear all entries by clicking the Clear All button The window shown below is the Access Profile Configuration window for Ethernet a rule created in one profile and a rule created in a different profile Please read the CLI Reference Manual chapter discussing Access Control List ACL Commands P Note The Profile ID is used for relative priority for an Access Profile should a conflict arise between Profile ID 1 256 Ethernet LI a LI Show All Access Profile Table Entries Figure 9 3 Access Profile Configuration window Ethernet The following parameters can be set for the Ethernet type Parameter Description Profile ID 1 256 Type in a unique identifier number for this profile set The number is used to set the relative priority for the profile Priority is set relative to other profiles where the lowest profile ID has the highest priority If a conflict occurs among co
354. s an intermediary between the Authentication Server and the Client The Authenticator servers two purposes when utilizing 802 1X The first purpose is to request certification information from the Client through EAPOL packets which is the only information allowed to pass through the Authenticator before access is granted to the Client The second purpose of the Authenticator is to verify the information gathered from the Client with the Authentication Server and to Authentication Server Figure 10 16 The Authentication Server then relay that information back to the Client Three steps must be implemented on the Switch to properly configure the Authenticator L 3 The 802 1X State must be Enabled DES 30xx Web Management Tool 2 The 802 1X settings must be implemented by port Security 802 1X Configure 802 1X Authenticator Parameter A RADIUS server must be configured on the Switch Security 802 1X Authentic RADIUS Server Switch Authenticator RADIUS Server Workstation Authentication Server Client Figure 10 17 The Authenticator 199 Client The Client is simply the endstation that wishes to gain access to the LAN or switch services All endstations must be running software that is compliant with the 802 1X protocol For users running Windows XP that software is included within the operating system All other users are required to attain 802 1X client software from an outside source The Cli
355. s the maximum time limit for Threshold 0 65535 routing a DHCP BOOTP packet If a value of O is entered the Switch will not process the value in the seconds field of the BOOTP or DHCP packet If a non zero value is entered the Switch will use that value along with the hop count to determine whether to forward a given BOOTP or DHCP packet DHCP Relay Agent This field can be toggled between Enabled and Disabled using the pull down menu It is Information Option 82 used to enable or disable the DHCP Agent Information Option 82 on the Switch The default State is Disabled Enabled When this field is toggled to Enabled the relay agent will insert and remove DHCP relay information option 82 field in messages between DHCP servers and clients When the relay agent receives the DHCP request it adds the option 82 information and the IP address of the relay agent if the relay agent is configured to the packet Once the option 82 information has been added to the packet it is sent on to the DHCP server When the DHCP server receives the packet if the server is capable of option 82 it can implement policies like restricting the number of IP addresses that can be assigned to a single remote ID or circuit ID Then the DHCP server echoes the option 82 field in the DHCP reply The DHCP server unicasts the reply to the back to the relay agent if the request was relayed to the server by the relay agent The switch verifies that it originally inserted the
356. s the total number of good packets that were received by a broadcast address Show Hide Check whether or not to display Multicast Broadcast and Unicast Packets Clear Clicking this button clears all statistics counters on this window View Table Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a table rather than a line graph View Line Chart Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a line graph rather than a table 238 Transmitted TX The following graph displays the packets transmitted from the Switch To select a port to view these statistics for use the Port pull down menu The user may also use the real time graphic of the Switch at the top of the web page by simply clicking on a port To view this window click Monitoring gt Packets gt Transmitted TX Pot w id gs Tx Packets Analysis Port Port 1 1000 900 aut roo 600 500 400 200 100 Dnitisec Time Interval 15 Record Number 200 Show Hide W Bytes iw Packets Figure 11 7 Tx Packets Analysis window line graph for Bytes and Packets To view the Transmitted TX Table click the link View Table which will show the following table 239 View Line hart Packet Analysis of Port Port 1 lis Bytes Packets Unicast Multicast Broadcast Bytes Packet Figure 11 8 Tx Packets Analysis window table for Bytes and Packets The following fields may be set or viewed Parameter Description Time Interval Select
357. sARPMacAddr AGENT GENERAL MIB agentGratuitousARPPortNumber agentGratuitousARPInterfaceNa me swDoSAttackDetected swDoSCtrlT ype V2 DOS PREV MIB 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 12 59 4 0 1 swDoSNotifyVarlpAddr swDoSNotifyVarPortNumber Proprietary Trap List project dependent Trap Name OID Variable Bind EL MIB Name swL2macNotification swL2macNotifyInfo des3028 l2mgmt 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 11 63 6 2 20 0 2 des3028p l2mgmt 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 11 63 7 2 20 0 2 des3052 I2mgmt 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 11 63 8 2 20 0 2 des3052p I2mgmt 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 11 63 9 2 20 0 2 des3028g l2mgmt 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 11 63 11 2 20 0 2 swL2PortSecurityViolationTrap swL2PortSecurityPortlndex des3028 l2mgmt 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 11 63 6 2 20 0 1 swL2PortSecurityViolationMac des3028p l2mgmt 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 11 63 7 2 20 0 1 des3052 l2mgmt 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 11 63 8 2 20 0 1 des3052p l2mgmt 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 11 63 9 2 20 0 1 des3028g l2mgmt 219 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 11 63 11 2 20 0 1 280 Appendix C Cable Lengths Use the following table to as a guide for the maximum cable lengths Mini GBIC 1000BASE LX Single mode fiber module 1000BASE SX Multi mode fiber module 1000BASE LHX Single mode fiber module 1000BASE ZX Single mode fiber module 1000BASE T Category 5e UTP Cable Category 5 UTP Cable 1000 Mbps 100BASE TX Category 5 UTP Cable 100 Mbps 10BASE T Category 3 UTP Cable 10 Mbps 281 Appendix D Password Recovery Procedure This document describes the procedure for re
358. se of lost passwords or password corruption please refer to the Appendix D of this manual entitled Password Recovery Procedure which will guide you through the steps necessary to resolve this issue SNMP Settings Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is an OSI Layer 7 Application Layer designed specifically for managing and monitoring network devices SNMP enables network management stations to read and modify the settings of gateways routers switches and other network devices Use SNMP to configure system features for proper operation monitor performance and detect potential problems in the Switch switch group or network Managed devices that support SNMP include software referred to as an agent which runs locally on the device A defined set of variables managed objects is maintained by the SNMP agent and used to manage the device These objects are defined in a Management Information Base MIB which provides a standard presentation of the information controlled by the on board SNMP agent SNMP defines both the format of the MIB specifications and the protocol used to access this information over the network The DES 3028 28P 28G 52 52P supports SNMP versions 1 2c and 3 You can specify which version of SNMP you want to use to monitor and control the Switch The three versions of SNMP vary in the level of security provided between the management station and the network device In SNMP v 1 and v 2 user authentication is
359. serlP gt due to AAA server timeout or improper configuration Username lt username gt Successful login through SSH from Informational lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt Warning lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt Login failed through SSH from Warning lt userlP gt due to AAA server timeout or improper Configuration Username lt username gt Successful Enable Admin through Informational Console authenticated by AAA local_enable method Username lt username gt Enable Admin failed through Console authenticated by AAA local_enable method Username lt username gt Successful Enable Admin through Web authenticated by AAA local enable method Successful Enable Admin through Informational Web from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA local enable method Username lt username gt Enable Admin failed through Web authenticated by AAA local enable method Successful Enable Admin through Web SSL authenticated by AAA local enable method Enable Admin failed through Web SSL authenticated by AAA local enable method Successful Enable Admin through Telnet authenticated by AAA local enable method Enable Admin failed through Telnet authenticated by AAA local enable method Successful Enable Admin through SSH authenticated by AAA local enable method Enable Admin failed throu
360. set on the Switch Instance Status Displays the current status of the corresponding MSTI ID Instance Priority Displays the priority of the corresponding MSTI ID The lowest priority will be the root bridge Click Apply to implement changes made 127 Click the Modify button to change the priority of the MSTI This will open the Instance ID Settings window to configure MISTI ID Show SIF Instance Table Figure 7 43 Instance ID Settings modify priority window The following parameters can be viewed or set Parameter Description MSTI ID Displays the MSTI ID of the instance being modified An entry of O in this field denotes the CIST default MSTI The Type field in this window will be permanently set to Set Priority Only Priority 0 61440 Enter the new priority in the Priority field The user may set a priority value between O 61440 Click Apply to implement the new priority setting MSTP Port Information This window displays the current MSTP Port Information and can be used to update the port configuration for an MSTI ID If a loop occurs the MSTP function will use the port priority to select an interface to put into the forwarding state Set a higher priority value for interfaces to be selected for forwarding first In instances where the priority value is identical the MSTP function will implement the lowest MAC address in
361. setting passwords on D Link Switches Authenticating any user who tries to access networks is necessary and important The basic authentication method used to accept qualified users is through a local login utilizing a Username and Password Sometimes passwords get forgotten or destroyed so network administrators need to reset these passwords This document will explain how the Password Recovery feature can help network administrators reach this goal The following steps explain how to use the Password Recovery feature on D Link devices to easily recover passwords Complete these steps to reset the password l For security reasons the Password Recovery feature requires the user to physically access the device Therefore this feature is only applicable when there is a direct connection to the console port of the device It is necessary for the user needs to attach a terminal or PC with terminal emulation to the console port of the switch 2t Power on the switch After the runtime image is loaded to 100 the Switch will allow 2 seconds for the user to press the hotkey Shift 6 to enter the Password Recovery Mode Once the Switch enters the Password Recovery Mode all ports on the Switch will be disabled Boot Procedure V1 00 B06 Power On Self Test uccsswoz Ea E oed ah e ave a Oe e 1005 MAC Address 00 19 5B EC 32 15 H W Version A1 Please wait loading V2 00 B23 Runtime image 00 The switch is now entering
362. snooping allows the Switch to recognize IGMP queries and reports sent between network stations or devices and an IGMP host When enabled for IGMP snooping the Switch can open or close a port to a specific device based on the IGMP messages passing through the Switch In order to use IGMP Snooping it must first be enabled for the entire Switch see Advanced Settings You may then fine tune the settings for each VLAN When enabled for IGMP snooping the Switch can open or close a port to a specific Multicast group member based on IGMP messages sent from the device to the IGMP host or vice versa The Switch monitors IGMP messages and discontinues forwarding multicast packets when there are no longer hosts requesting that they continue Use the IGMP Snooping window to view IGMP Snooping status To modify settings click the Modify button for the VLAN Name entry you want to change To view this window click L2 Features gt IGMP Snooping gt IGMP Snooping Use the IGMP Snooping window to view IGMP Snooping settings To modify the settings click the Modify button of the VLAN ID you wish to change Total Entries 1 WD Via ame Bs CINE default Disabled 2 abled E Figure 7 15 IGMP Snooping window Clicking the Modify button will open the IGMP Snooping Settings menu shown below VLAN Name Query Interval 1 65535 Max Response Time 1 25 Robustness Value 1 255 Last M
363. ss Rule Configuration settings 162 Parameter Profile ID Access ID 1 65535 Type Priority 0 7 VLAN Name Destination IP DSCP 0 63 Protocol Port Number Time Range Description This is the identifier number for this profile set Select Permit to specify that the Switch according to any additional rule forward the packets that match the access profile added see below Select Deny to specify that packets that match the access profile are not forwarded by the Switch and will be filtered Rx Rate No Limit 0 Enter an Rx Rate in kbps Type in a unique identifier number for this access This value can be set from 7 to 65535 Auto Assign Checking this field will instruct the Switch to automatically assign an Access ID for the rule being created Selected profile based on Ethernet MAC Address IP address or Packet Content Mask Ethernet instructs the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header IP instructs the Switch to examine the IP address in each frame s header Packet Content Mask instructs the Switch to examine the packet header This parameter is specified if you want to re write the 802 1p default priority previously set in the Switch which is used to determine the CoS queue to which packets are forwarded to Once this field is specified packets accepted by the Switch that match this priority are forwarded to the CoS queue specified previously by the user W
364. steps 1 Users must first enter a static destination MAC address into the Forwarding Database FDB of the switch To accomplish this go to the Unicast Forwarding table in the Forwarding Filtering folder under the Configuration menu and click on the Unicast Forwarding link which will display a window for users to enter this information 2 Once a destination MAC has been added to the FDB users must then configure the appropriate queue to be mapped to this destination MAC address using the following window 3 Once the previous parameters are set users should go to the Priority Settings window located in this folder and set the egress ports on the switch to MAC Priority These ports must only be set for MAC Priority and not for any other priority choice Please be advised that the default priority setting is for 802 1p and users must change the priority to MAC Priority for this function to work properly Be sure that the device with this destination MAC address is connected to the port for which this priority is configured To view this window click CoS MAC Priority WLAC Address U0 00 00 00 00 00 WLAC Address Class ID Figure 8 11 MAC Priority window Enter the destination MAC Address that you have previously entered into the Unicast Forwarding window and select a Class ID where packets containing this destination MAC address will be sent Click Apply to implement changes made 156 ACL Time Rang
365. t default default v default default Figure 10 35 Application Authentication Settings window The following parameters can be set 216 Parameter Description Application Lists the configuration applications on the Switch The user may configure the Login Method List and Enable Method List for authentication for users utilizing the Console Command Line Interface application the Telnet application SSH and the WEB HTTP application Login Method List Using the pull down menu configure an application for normal login on the user level utilizing a previously configured method list The user may use the default Method List or other Method List configured by the user See the Login Method Lists window in this section for more information Enable Method List Using the pull down menu configure an application for normal login on the user level utilizing a previously configured method list The user may use the default Method List or other Method List configured by the user See the Enable Method Lists window in this section for more information Click Apply to implement changes made Authentication Server Group This window will allow users to set up Authentication Server Groups on the Switch A server
366. t Parameters Description Authentication Policy Use the pull down menu to enable or disable the Authentication Policy on the Switch Response Timeout 0 This field will set the time the Switch will wait for a response of authentication from the 255 user The user may set a time between 0 and 255 seconds The default setting is 30 seconds User Attempts 1 255 This command will configure the maximum number of times the Switch will accept authentication attempts Users failing to be authenticated after the set amount of attempts will be denied access to the Switch and will be locked out of further authentication attempts Command line interface users will have to wait 60 seconds before another authentication attempt Telnet and web users will be disconnected from the Switch The user may set the number of attempts from 7 to 255 The default setting is 3 Click Apply to implement changes made Application Authentication Settings This window is used to configure switch configuration applications console Telnet SSH web for login at the user level and at the administration level Enable Admin utilizing a previously configured method list To view the following window click Security gt Access Authentication Control gt Application Authentication Settings T ogin Method List Enable Method List default w default d efault defaul
367. t by the multicast listening port stating that it is no longer interested in receiving multicast data from a specific multicast group address therefore stating that it is done with the multicast data from this address Once this message is received by the Switch it will no longer forward multicast traffic from a specific multicast group address to this listening port IF i gi x NOTE The DES 3028 series supports MLD v1 snooping but for MLD v2 snooping is carried out in awareness state MLD Snooping Settings To configure the settings for MLD snooping click L2 Features gt MLD Snooping gt MLD Snooping Settings which will open the following window Total Entries 1 VLANID VLAN Name State Querier State Moa default Disabled Disabled Modit Figure 7 30 MLD Snooping Settings window This window displays the current MLD Snooping settings set on the Switch defined by VLAN To configure a specific VLAN for MLD snooping click the VLAN s corresponding Modify button which will display the following window for the user to configure 114 VLAN ID d YLAN Name default Query Interval 1 65535 sec 125 Max Response Time 1 25 sec 10 Robustness Variable 1 255 Last Listener Query Interval 1 25 sec Node Timeout 1 16711450 sec Router Timeout 1 16711450 sec Done Timer 1
368. t d link co za U A E and North Africa Tel 971 4 4278127 U A E Sunday to Thursday 9 00AM to 6 00PM GMT 4 Web http www dlink me com E mail support me dlink me com Saudi ARABIA KSA Telephone 966 01 217 0008 Facsimile 966 01 217 0009 e mail Support sa dlink me com Saturday to Wednesday 9 30AM to 6 30PM Thursdays 9 30AM to 2 00 PM D Link Building Networks for People TexHuueckaa noAanepxka OOHOBNeHUA nporpaMMHOro ObecneyeHUA n AOKYyMEeHTauna nDnocrynHbi Ha l HrepHer ca re D Link D Link npenocraBnser 6ecnnarHytro nonaepxky ANA KNUeHTOB B TeyeHne rapaHTMMHOTro cpoka KnineHTbi Moryr OOPaTuTECA B rpynny TeEXHNUYeECKON nonnepxkn D Link no Tened ouy unn uepes l HrTepHer TexHunueckaa noanepxka D Link 7 495 744 00 99 TexHunueckaa nonaepxxka uepes3 lAHrTepHeT http www dlink ru e mail support dlink ru D Link Building Networks for People SOPORTE TECNICO Usted puede encontrar actualizaciones de softwares o firmwares y documentacion para usuarios a traves de nuestro sitio www dlinkla com SOPORTE TECNICO PARA USUARIOS EN LATINO AMERICA Soporte tecnico a traves de los siguientes telefonos de D Link Argentina 0800 12235465 Lunes a Viernes 08 00am a 21 00pm Chile 800 835465 6 02 5941520 Lunes a Viernes 08 00am a 21 00pm Colombia 01800 9525465 Lunes a Viernes 06 00am a 19 00pm Lunes a Viernes 05 00am a 18 00pm El Salvador 800 6335 Lunes a Viernes 05 00am a 18 00pm Guatemala 1800 8
369. t it is not practical to repair or replace the defective Hardware the price paid by the original purchaser for the defective Hardware will be refunded by D Link upon return to D Link of the defective Hardware All Hardware or part thereof that is replaced by D Link or for which the purchase price is refunded shall become the property of D Link upon replacement or refund Limited Software Warranty D Link warrants that the software portion of the product Software will substantially conform to D Link s then current functional specifications for the Software as set forth in the applicable documentation from the date of original delivery of the Software for a period of ninety 90 days Warranty Period if the Software is properly installed on approved hardware and operated as contemplated in its documentation D Link further warrants that during the Warranty Period the magnetic media on which D Link delivers the Software will be free of physical defects D Link s sole obligation shall be to replace the non conforming Software or defective media with software that substantially conforms to D Link s functional specifications for the Software Except as otherwise agreed by D Link in writing the replacement Software 1s provided only to the original licensee and is subject to the terms and conditions of the license eranted by D Link for the Software The Warranty Period shall extend for an additional ninety 90 days after any replacement Soft
370. t to the Network The site where you install the Switch may greatly affect its performance Please follow these guidelines for setting up the Switch Install the Switch on a sturdy level surface that can support at least 4 24kg 9 35lbs of weight Do not place heavy objects on the Switch E The power outlet should be within 1 82 meters 6 feet of the Switch E Visually inspect the power cord and see that it is fully secured to the AC DC power port Make sure that there is proper heat dissipation from and adequate ventilation around the Switch Leave at least 10 cm 4 inches of space at the front and rear of the Switch for ventilation Install the Switch in a fairly cool and dry place for the acceptable temperature and humidity operating ranges Install the Switch in a site free from strong electromagnetic field generators such as motors vibration dust and direct exposure to sunlight When installing the Switch on a level surface attach the rubber feet to the bottom of the device The rubber feet cushion the Switch protect the casing from scratches and prevent it from scratching other surfaces Installing the Switch without the Rack When installing the Switch on a desktop or shelf the rubber feet included with the Switch should first be attached Attach these cushioning feet on the bottom at each corner of the device Allow enough ventilation space between the Switch and any other objects in the vicinity
371. t will serve as the SNMP host for the Switch SNMP Version V1 To specifies that SNMP version 1 will be used V2 To specify that SNMP version 2 will be used V3 NoAuth NoPriv To specify that the SNMP version 3 will be used with a NoAuth NoPriv security level V3 Auth NoPriv To specify that the SNMP version 3 will be used with an Auth NoPriv security level V3 Auth Priv To specify that the SNMP version 3 will be used with an Auth Priv security level Community String Type in the community string or SNMP V3 user name as appropriate SNMP V3 User Name To implement your new settings click Apply To return to the SNMP Host Table click the Show All SNMP Host Table Entries link SNMP Engine ID The Engine ID is a unique identifier used for SNMP V3 implementations This is an alphanumeric string used to identify the SNMP engine on the Switch To display the Switch s SNMP Engine ID click Administration gt SNMP Manger gt SNMP Engine ID 8000005030021 4 9860 Figure 6 42 SNMP Engine ID Configuration window To change the Engine ID type the new Engine ID in the space provided and click the Apply button 64 PoE System The DES 3028P and DES 3052P support Power over Ethernet PoE as defined by the IEEE 802 3af specification Ports 1 24 1 48 can supply 48 VDC power to Power Devices PDs over Category 5 or Category 3 UTP Ethernet cables Both the DES 3028P and DES 3052P follow the standard PSE Pow
372. tack UDP Flood DoS attack Ping of Death and Smurf attack DoS Attack Prevention allows the user to protect against malicious attacks bogus service requests and denial of service attacks DoS while also providing log and counter information of DoS attacks for users To configure these settings click Security gt DoS Attack Prevention the following window will be displayed 221 Land Attack Elat Attack Smurf Attack ITOP Mull Scan ITOP Xmascan TCP SYNEFIN ITOP SYN SrcPortless 1024 All Drop w sate AA Land Attack Enabled Drop J Clear Blat Attack Enabled Drop Clear omurt Attack Enabled Drop J Clear TCP Null Scan Enabled Drop Clear TCP Xmascan Enabled Drop J Clear BCS e DES T Enabled Drop J Clear TCP SYN SrcPort less 1024 Disabled Drop J Clear Clear all Figure 10 53 DoS Attack Prevention window The following parameters may be set Parameter Description Select the type of attack from the list below or choose All to select all attack types Land Attack A Land attack works by sending a spoofed packet to a machine with the source host IP address the same as the destination host IP address the system then attempts to reply to itself which causes the system to lock up Blat Attack A Blat attack works by sending a spoofed packet to a machine with the source host port the same as the destination host port the system then attempts to reply to itself which
373. tagged with the last six digits of the MAC Address to identify it Module Name Displays the full module name of the switch that was right clicked MAC Address Displays the MAC Address of the corresponding Switch Remote Port No Displays the number of the physical port on the MS or CaS that the CS is connected to The CS will have no entry in this field Local Port No Displays the number of the physical port on the CS that the MS or CaS is connected to The CS will have no entry in this field Port Speed Displays the connection speed between the CS and the MS or CaS Click Close to close the Property window 74 Commander Switch Icon default 35 26 a0h default35 26 a0 Figure 6 54 Right Clicking a Commander Icon The following options may appear for the user to configure Collapse To collapse the group that will be represented by a single icon Expand To expand the SIM group in detail Property To pop up a window to display the group information Member Switch Icon A Expand 14 Collapse Remove from group Remove from group Configure Property Configure Property Figure 6 55 Right Clicking a Member icon The following options may appear for the user to configure Collapse To collapse the group that will be represented by a single icon Expand To expand the SIM group in detail Remove from group Remove a member from a group Configure Launc
374. tch The server doesn t respond to the verification query At this point the Switch receives the timeout from the server and then moves to the next method of verification configured in the method list The Switch has four built in Authentication Server Groups one for each of the TACACS XTACACS TACACS and RADIUS protocols These built in Authentication Server Groups are used to authenticate users trying to access the Switch The users will set Authentication Server Hosts in a preferable order in the built in Authentication Server Groups and when a user tries to gain access to the Switch the Switch will ask the first Authentication Server Hosts for authentication If no authentication is made the second server host in the list will be queried and so on The built in Authentication Server Groups can only have hosts that are running the specified protocol For example the TACACS Authentication Server Groups can only have TACACS Authentication Server Hosts The administrator for the Switch may set up six different authentication techniques per user defined method list TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS local none for authentication These techniques will be listed in an order preferable and defined by the user for normal user authentication on the Switch and may contain up to eight authentication techniques When a user attempts to access the Switch the Switch will select the first technique listed for authentication If the first technique goes thr
375. tch events to mail recipients based on e mail addresses entered using the commands below The Switch is to be configured as a client of SMTP while the server is a remote device that will receive messages from the Switch place the appropriate information into an e mail and deliver it to recipients configured on the Switch This can benefit the Switch administrator by simplifying the management of small workgroups or wiring closets increasing the speed of handling emergency Switch events and enhancing security by recording questionable events occurring on the Switch The Switch plays four important roles as a client in the functioning of SMTP The server and server virtual port must be correctly configured for this function to work properly This is accomplished in the SMTP Service Settings window by properly configuring the SMTP Server Address and SMTP Server Port fields Mail recipients must be configured on the Switch This information is sent to the server which then processes the information and then e mails Switch information to these recipients Up to 8 e mail recipients can be configured on the Switch using the SMTP Service Settings window by configuring the Mail Receiver Address field The administrator can configure the source mail address from which messages are delivered to configured recipients This can offer more information to the administrator about Switch functions and problems The personal e mail can be configured using the SMTP Servi
376. te The strict mode is only supported at the highest queue and the other lower queues will still work at WEE mode Figure 8 5 CoS Scheduling Mechanism and CoS Scheduling Mechanism Table window NOTICE The default CoS scheduling arrangement is a strict priority schedule for the 5 highest class Class 3 which means the Switch will consider the highest class of service to have strict scheduling only while the other queues empty in a round robin method 149 The Scheduling Mechanism has the following parameters Parameter Description Denoting a Strict scheduling will set the highest queue to be emptied first while the other queues will follow the weighted round robin scheduling scheme Use the weighted round robin WAR algorithm to handle packets in an even distribution in priority classes of service Click Apply to let your changes take effect CoS Output Scheduling CoS can be customized by changing the output scheduling used for the hardware classes of service in the Switch As with any changes to CoS implementation careful consideration should be given to how network traffic in lower priority classes of service is affected Changes in scheduling may result in unacceptable levels of packet loss or significant transmission delay If you choose to customize this setting it is important to monitor network performance especially during peak demand as bottlenecks can quickly develop if the CoS settings are not suitable To
377. tection 5 Enabled 0 Low 0 15400 ser Defined OF Interim state during line detection 3 Enabled 0 Low 0 154000 ser Defined O 0 OF Interim state during line detection 10 Enabled Low 0 154000 ser Defined O 0 OF Interim state during line detection 11 Enabled 0 Low 0 15400 ser Defined O 0 OF Interim state during line detection 12 Enabled 0 Low 0 15400 ser Defined i OF Interim state during line detection 13 Enabled 0 Low 0 15400 ser Defined i OF Interim state during line detection 14 Enabled 0 Low 0 15400 ser Defined O i OF Interim state during line detection 15 Enabled Low D 15400 ser Defined O i OF Interim state during line detection 16 Enabled 0 Low D 15400 ser Defined O i OF Interim state during line detection 17 Enabled 0 Low D 15400 User Defined O i OF Interim state during line detection 18 Enabled Low U 15400 User Defined O OF Interim state during line detection 19 Enabled Low 0 15400 User Defined O OH Interim state during line detection 20 Enabled Low 0 15400 User Defined O 0 OH Interim state during line detection 2l Enabled 0 Low 0 15400 ser Defined O i OE Interim state during line detection 22 Enabled 0 Low 0 15400 ser Defined O i OE Interim state during line detection 2S Enabled 0 Low 0 15400 U ser Defined O i OE Interim state during line detection 24 Enabled 0 Low 0 15400 ser Defined O i OF Interim state during line detection Figure 6 44 PoE Port Configuration window The previous w
378. th flexible load distribution and fail over function E IGMP Snooping support o SNMP support Secure Sockets Layer SSL and Secure Shell SSH support E Port Mirroring support e MIB support for e RFC1213 MIB II RFC1493 Bridge RFC2819 RMON RFC2665 Ether like MIB RFC2863 Interface MIB Private MIB RFC2674 for 802 1p IEEE 802 1X MIB IEEE 802 3x flow control in full duplex mode IEEE 802 1p Priority Queues IEEE 802 3u I100BASE TX compliant RS 232 DCE console port for Switch management Provides parallel LED display for port status such as link act speed etc IEEE 802 3 IOBASE T compliant High performance switching engine performs forwarding and filtering at wire speed maximum 14 881 packets sec on each 10Mbps Ethernet port maximum 148 810 packet sec on 100Mbps Fast Ethernet port and 1 488 100 for each Gigabit port Full and half duplex for both 10Mbps and 100Mbps connections Full duplex allows the switch port to simultaneously transmit and receive data It only works with connections to full duplex capable end stations and switches Connections to a hub must take place at half duplex Support Broadcast Multicast storm control Non blocking store and forward switching scheme capability to support rate adaptation and protocol conversion Supports by port Egress Ingress rate control Efficient self learning and address recognition mechanism enables forwarding rate at wire speed Ports The following table lists the relative p
379. the RADIUS with a value of 0 or more than the effective bandwidth 100Mbps on an Ethernet port or I Gbps on a Gigabit port of the port will be set to no limit To assign 802 1p default priority by RADIUS server proper parameters should be configured on the RADIUS Server See below for the parameters of a user account The parameters of the Vendor Specific attribute are Vendor Specific attribute Description Value Usage Vendor ID Defines the vendor 171 DLINK The definition of this 4 Required attribute Used to assign the 0 7 Required 802 1p default priority of the port If the user has configured the 802 1p priority attribute of the RADIUS server for example priority 7 and the 802 1X authentication is successful the device will assign the correct 802 1p default priority according to the RADIUS server to the port However if the user does not configure the priority attribute but authenticates successfully the device will not assign a priority to this port If the priority attribute configured on the RADIUS is a value out of range 77 it will not be set to the device Vendor Type Attribute Specific field Guest VLANs ENABLE GUEST VLAN On 802 1X security enabled networks there is a need for non 802 1 X supported devices to gain limited access to the network due to lack of the proper 802 1X software or incompatible devices such as computers running Windows 98 or lower operating systems or the need for g
380. the Trap Log State and DHCP Snoop state on the switch The Trap Log field will enable and disable the sending of trap log messages for IP MAC binding When enabled the Switch will send a trap message to the SNMP agent and the Switch log when an ARP packet is received that doesn t match the IP MAC binding configuration set on the Switch To view this window click Security gt IP MAC Port Binding gt IMP Global Settings ACL Mode Trap Log Disabled i DHCP Snoop State Disabled v Figure 10 4 IMP Global Settings window The following parameters can be set Parameter Description Trap Log This field will enable and disable the sending of trap log messages for IP MAC binding When enabled the Switch will send a trap log message to the SNMP agent and the Switch log when an ARP packet is received that doesn t match the IP MAC binding configuration set on the Switch DHCP Snoop State Use the pull down menu to enable or disable the DHCP Snoop State for IP MAC Binding Click Apply to implement the settings made IMP Port Settings Select a port or a range of ports with the From Port and To Port fields Enable or disable the port with the State Allow Zero IP and Forward DHCP packet field and configure the port s Max entry To view this window click Security gt IP MAC Port Binding gt IMP Port Settings 187 Port 1 h Port d Disabled 3 Disabled Disabled Y 5 Max
381. the users knowledge Broadcasting spoofed MAC address Athan ker Kian in the middle Figure 5 Prevent ARP spoofing via packet content ACL Concerning the common DoS attack today caused by the ARP spoofing D Link managed switches can effectively mitigate it via its unique Packet Content ACL The reason for this is that basic ACLs can only filter ARP packets based on packet type VLAN ID Source and Destination MAC information therefore there is a need for further inspections of ARP packets To prevent ARP spoofing attacks we will demonstrate here using the Packet Content ACL on the DES 3028 to block the invalid ARP packets which contain faked gateway s MAC and IP binding IP 10 90 90 90 MAC 01 02 03 04 05 06 IP 10 90 90 100 MAC 00 00 00 00 CD EF CD EF lt 0cO0cOcOdOdOd k 10 90 90 90 is at OcOcOcOdOd0d IP 10 90 90 110 MAC Oc Oc Oc Od Od Od Example Topology Configuration The design of the Packet Content ACL on the DES 3028 series can inspect any specified content in the first 20 bytes of an ARP packet up to 80 bytes in total at one time It utilizes offsets to match individual fields in the Ethernet Frame An offset contains 16 bytes and the switch supports 5 offsets with each offset being divided into a four 4 byte values in a HEX format The offset ranges from 0 76 Refer to the configuration example below for details In addition the configuration logics are 1 Only if the
382. through Web Successful Enable Admin through Informational SSL authenticated by AAA none Web SSL from lt userlP gt method authenticated by AAA none method Username lt username gt Successful Enable Admin through Telnet Successful Enable Admin through Informational authenticated by AAA none method Telnet from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA none method Username lt username gt Successful Enable Admin through SSH Successful Enable Admin through Informational authenticated by AAA none method SSH from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA none method Username lt username gt Successful Enable Admin through Successful Enable Admin through Informational Console authenticated by AAA server Console authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt Enable Admin failed through Console Enable Admin failed through authenticated by AAA server Console authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt Enable Admin failed through Console due Enable Admin failed through to AAA server timeout or improper Console due to AAA server configuration timeout or improper configuration Username lt username gt Successful Enable Admin through Web Successful Enable Admin through Informational authenticated by AAA server Web from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt Enable Admin failed through Web Enable Admin failed t
383. ting Request packets sent This does not include retransmissions The number of RADIUS packets received on the accounting port from this server RoundTripTime The time interval between the most recent Accounting Response and the Accounting Request that matched it from this RADIUS accounting server AccessRetrans The number of RADIUS Access Request packets retransmitted to this RADIUS authentication server PendingRequests The number of RADIUS Accounting Request packets sent to this server that have not yet timed out or received a response This variable is incremented when an Accounting Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of an Accounting Response a timeout or a retransmission MalformedResponses The number of malformed RADIUS Accounting Response packets received from this server Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length Bad authenticators and unknown types are not included as malformed accounting responses BadAuthenticators The number of RADIUS Accounting Response packets which contained invalid authenticators received from this server 258 UnknownTypes The number of RADIUS packets of unknown type which were received from this server on the accounting port PacketsDropped The number of RADIUS packets which were received from this server on the accounting port and dropped for some other reason Reset The Reset function has several options when resetting the Switch Some of the current confi
384. to state Trademarks D Link is a registered trademark of D Link Systems Inc Other trademarks or registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners Copyright Statement No part of this publication or documentation accompanying this product may be reproduced in any form or by any means or used to make any derivative such as translation transformation or adaptation without permission from D Link Corporation D Link Systems Inc as stipulated by the United States Copyright Act of 1976 and any amendments thereto Contents are subject to change without prior notice Copyright 2004 by D Link Corporation D Link Systems Inc All rights reserved CE Mark Warning This is a Class A product In a residential environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures FCC Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a commercial installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communication However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation Operation of this equipment in a residential environment is likely to ca
385. to the forwarding state and other interfaces will be blocked Remember that lower priority values mean higher priorities for forwarding packets To view the following window click L2 Features gt Spanning Tree gt MSTP Port Information Port MATI Designated Bridge Internal Path Cost Priority Status Role 00000 128 Disabled Disabled 3 Nita AO 128 Disabled Disabled Figure 7 44 MSTP Port Information window To view the MSTI settings for a particular port select the Port number located in the top left hand corner of the window and click Apply To modify the settings for a particular MSTI Instance click on its hyperlinked MSTI ID which will reveal the following window 128 Show METE Port Information Table Port 1 Figure 7 45 MSTI Settings window The following parameters can be viewed or set Parameter Description Displays the MSTI ID of the instance being configured An entry of O in this field denotes the CIST default MSTI Internal cost This parameter is set to represent the relative cost of forwarding packets to specified ports 0 Auto when an interface is selected within a STP instance The default setting is O auto There are two options 0 auto Selecting this parameter for the internalCost will set quickest route automatically and optimally for an interface The default value is derived from the
386. toggle between Enabled and Disabled Protocol Identity Use the drop down menu to toggle among EAPOL LACP GVRP STP and All Use the drop down menu to toggle between Enabled and Disabled Click Apply to implement changes made 802 3 Extension LLDP Port Settings The following window is used to set up 802 3 extension LLDP on individual port s on the Switch To view this window click L2 Features gt LLDP gt 802 3 Extension LLDP Port Settings 136 TAC l P 4 From To ATA B m a Power Via MDILink Aggregation Maximum Frame Size Apply Configuration status Foti Port Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Apply Li r I 1 IvIaximum Frame Size Port ID MAC PHY Configuration status Power Via MDI 1 Disable Disable Disable Disable E Disable Disable Disable Disable 4 Disable Disable Disable Disable 4 Disable Disable Disable Disable 5 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable 7 Disable Disable Disable Disable 5 Disable Disable Disable Disable 3 Disable Disable Disable Disable 10 Disable Disable Disable Disable 11 Disable Disable Disable Disable LE Disable Disable Disable Disable 13 Disable Disable Disable Disable 14 Disable Disable Disable Disable 15 Disable Disable Disable Disable l Disable Disable Disable Disable 17 Disable Disable Disable Disable le Disable Disable Disable Disable 18 Disable Disable Disable Disable 2t Disable Disable Disable Disable al Disable D
387. tration gt Ping Test Target IP Address Repeat Pmging for Infinite times O times 1 255 Time Out 1 seconds 1 9 2 Figure 6 26 Ping Test window The user may use Infinite times radio button in the Repeat Pinging for field which will tell the ping program to keep sending ICMP Echo packets to the specified IP address until the program is stopped The user may opt to choose a specific number of times to ping the Target IP Address by clicking its radio button and entering a number between and 255 Click Start to initiate the Ping program Safeguard Engine Periodically malicious hosts on the network will attack the Switch by utilizing packet flooding ARP Storm or other methods To alleviate this problem the Safeguard Engine function was added to the Switch s software The Safeguard Engine can help the overall operability of the Switch by minimizing the workload of the Switch while the attack is ongoing thus making it capable to forward essential packets over its network in a limited bandwidth When the Switch either a receives too many packets to process or b exerts too much memory it will enter an Exhausted mode When in this mode the Switch will drop all ARP and IP broadcast packets for a calculated time interval Every five seconds the Switch will check to see if there are too many packets flooding the Switch If the threshold has been crossed the Switch will initially stop
388. twork access uncontrolled port Figure 10 20 Example of Typical Port Based Configuration Once the connected device has successfully been authenticated the Port then becomes Authorized and all subsequent traffic on the Port is not subject to access control restriction until an event occurs that causes the Port to become Unauthorized Hence if the Port is actually connected to a shared media LAN segment with more than one attached device successfully authenticating one of the attached devices effectively provides access to the LAN for all devices on the shared segment Clearly the security offered in this situation is open to attack 201 802 1X Host based Access Control 3 RADIUS Server Ethernet Switch i mM END NE EEEE AeA Hl fm bh nk eee R QOEM ae A A GUN UNDA A A A AA PE gt 802 1X 8021X 802 1X 8001X 8021X 802 1X 8001X 8021X 802 1X 802 1X 8021X 802 1X Client Client Client Client Client Client Client Client Client Client Client Client Network access controlled port Network access uncontrolled port Figure 10 21 Example of Typical Host Based Configuration In order to successfully make use of 802 1X in a shared media LAN segment it would be necessary to create logical Ports one for each attached device that required access to the LAN The Switch would regard the single physical Port connecting it to the shared media segment as consisting of a number of distinct logical Ports
389. ty after changes in a spanning trees active topology as a result of persistent incorrectly learned station location information It is set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network causing address flushing in that region possibly because those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator or MAC Operational for the attached LANs transitions frequently Click Apply to implement changes made 124 MST Configuration Identification The following windows in the MST Configuration Identification section allow the user to configure a MSTI instance on the Switch These settings will uniquely identify a multiple spanning tree instance set on the Switch The Switch initially possesses one C ST or Common Internal Spanning Tree of which the user may modify the parameters for but cannot change the MSTI ID for and cannot be deleted To view the MST Configuration Identification window click L2 Features gt Spanning Tree gt MST Configuration Identification Add MST Configuration Identification Configuration Name Revision Level D 2 T9 1 98 60 77 0 CIST 1 4094 X MST Configuration Identification Settings Configuration Name 00 21 31 98 60 77 Revision Level 0 65535 I Figure 7 38 MST Configuration Identification window The window above contains the following information Parameter Description Configuration Name A previously configured name set on the Switch to un
390. uests to gain access to the network without full authorization To supplement these circumstances this switch now implements Guest 802 1X VLANs These VLANs should have limited access rights and features separate from other VLANs on 302 1x the network Authentication Process Authentication Accepted To implement Guest 802 1X VLAN the user must first create a VLAN on the network with limited rights and then enable it as an 802 1X guest VLAN Then the administrator must configure the guest accounts accessing the Switch to be placed in a Guest VLAN when trying to access the Switch Upon initial entry to the Switch the client wishing to have services on the Switch will need to be authenticated by a remote RADIUS Server on the Switch to be placed in a fully operational VLAN If authenticated and the authenticator posseses the VLAN placement information that client will be accepted into the fully operational target VLAN and normal switch functions will be open to the client Yet if the client is denied authentication by the authenticator it will be placed in the Guest VLAN where it has limited rights and access The adjacent figure should give the user a better understanding of the Guest VLAN process 203 VLAN Identification Process by Authenticator Authentication Denied A Identified VLAN Unidentified VLAN f X ClientPlacedin ClientPlacedin Guest VLAN VLAN Specified by Client Placed in X A
391. ugh Telnet authenticated by AAA server Login failed through Telnet authenticated by AAA server Login failed through Telnet due to AAA server timeout or improper configuration Successful login through SSH authenticated by AAA server Login failed through SSH due to AAA server timeout or improper configuration Successful Enable Admin through Console authenticated by AAA local enable method Enable Admin failed through Console authenticated by AAA local enable method 273 Login failed through SSH authenticated by Login failed through SSH from Login failed through Web from Warning lt userlP gt due to AAA server timeout or improper configuration Username lt username gt Successful login through Informational Web SSL from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt Login failed through Web SSL Warning from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt Login failed through Web SSL Warning from lt userlP gt due to AAA server timeout or improper configuration Username lt username gt Successful login through Telnet Informational from lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt Login failed through Telnet from Warning lt userlP gt authenticated by AAA server lt serverlP gt Username lt username gt Login failed through Telnet from Warning lt u
392. une TI Figure 7 35 STP Bridge Global Settings window MSTP 120 Spanning Tree Protocol Disabled Bridge Max Age 6 40 Sec Bridge Hello Time 1 2 Sec Bridge Forward Delay 4 30 Sec Max Hops 6 40 IP Version STF Compatible TX Hold Count 1 10 Forwarding BPDU Enabled v Loopback Detection Enabled v LED Recover Time 0 Disable EO Note Forward Delay i gt Max Age Max Age gt Rello Time i Figure 7 36 STP Bridge Global Settings window STP Compatible The following parameters can be set Parameter Description Spanning Tree Protocol Use the pull down menu to enable or disable STP globally on the Switch The default is Disabled Bridge Max Age 6 40 The Max Age may be set to ensure that old information does not endlessly circulate Sec through redundant paths in the network preventing the effective propagation of the new information Set by the Root Bridge this value will aid in determining that the Switch has spanning tree configuration values consistent with other devices on the bridged LAN If the value ages out and a BPDU has still not been received from the Root Bridge the Switch will start sending its own BPDU to all other switches for permissio
393. use harmful interference to radio or television reception If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help For detailed warranty information applicable to products purchased outside the United States please contact the corresponding local D Link office Product Registration Register your D Link product online at http support dlink com register Product registration is entirely voluntary and failure to complete or return this form will not diminish your warranty rights LIMITED WARRANTY D Link provides this limited warranty for its product only to the person or entity who originally purchased the product from D Link or its authorized reseller or distributor D Link would fulfill the warranty obligation according to the local warranty policy in which you purchased our products Limited Hardware Warranty D Link warrants that the hardware portion of the D Link products described below Hardware will be free from material defects in workmanship and materials from th
394. uthenticator Guest VLAN a ja Md T Y Figure 10 22 Guest VLAN Authentication Process Limitations Using the Guest VLAN je ge oe ee uo Guest VLANs are only supported for port based Host based cannot undergo this procedure Ports supporting Guest VLANs cannot be GVRP enabled and vice versa A port cannot be a member of a Guest VLAN and a static VLAN simultaneously Once a client has been accepted into the target VLAN it can no longer access the Guest VLAN If a port is a member of multiple VLANs it cannot become a member of the Guest VLAN 204 802 1X Authenticator Settings To configure the 802 1 X Authenticator Settings click Security gt 802 1X gt 802 1X Authenticator Settings clara Quiet E Server ReAuth ReAuth f Ctrl Stat Dd B laxkhe both 3 eu 5 di auto i af E S600 no B both auto 30 60 30 30 2 S600 fo E both auto 30 Tu 3 30 3600 fo 4 both auto 3n 60 3n 3n A S600 no B both auto 30 60 30 30 E 3600 fo 6 both auto 3n Tu 30 30 Z S600 no e both auto 30 e 30 30 2 S600 fo 8 both auto 3n on 30 3n E 3600 no El both auto 30 60 30 30 d 3600 fo 10 both auto 3n 60 30 30 A 3600 no 11 both auto 30 60 30 30 B S600 fo le both auto 30 Tu 3 30 B S600 fo We both auto 30 60 30 30 a S600 fo 14 both auto 30 Tu 30 30 z S600 fo E both auto 30 60 30 30 2 S600 fo l both auto 30 Tu 30 30 2 S600 fo 17 both auto 3n on 3n 3n E S600 no 18 both auto 30 60 30 30 d S600 fo 1 both auto 3n
395. vanced Encryption Standard AES128 encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining The default is Enabled AES192 CBC Use the pull down to enable or disable the Advanced Encryption Standard AES192 encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining The default is Enabled AES256 CBC Use the pull down to enable or disable the Advanced Encryption Standard AES 256 encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining The default is Enabled ARC4 Use the pull down to enable or disable the Arcfour encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining The default is Enabled Cast128 CBC Use the pull down to enable or disable the Cast128 encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining The default is Enabled Twofish128 Use the pull down to enable or disable the twofish128 encryption algorithm The default is Enabled Twofish192 Use the pull down to enable or disable the twofish192 encryption algorithm The default is Enabled Twofish256 Use the pull down to enable or disable the twofish256 encryption algorithm The default is Enabled Data Integrity Algorithm HMAC SHA1 Use the pull down to enable or disable the HMAC Hash for Message Authentication Code mechanism utilizing the Secure Hash algorithm The default is Enabled HMAC MD5 Use the pull down to enable or disable the HMAC Hash for Message Authentication Code mechanism utilizing the MD5 Message Digest encryption algorithm The default is Enabled Public Key Algorithm HMAC RSA Use th
396. ver by IP address for relaying DHCP BOOTP information to the Switch The user may enter a previously configured IP interface on the Switch that will be connected directly to the DHCP BOOTP server using the following window Properly configured settings will be displayed in the BOOTP Relay Table at the bottom of the following window once the user clicks the Add button under the Apply heading The user may add up to four server IPs per IP interface on the Switch Entries may be deleted by clicking it s corresponding To enable and configure DHCP BOOTP Relay Interface Settings on the Switch click Administration gt DHCP BOOTP Relay gt DHCP BOOTP Relay Interface Settings A ASS 0 0 0 0 Add Figure 6 9 DHCP BOOTP Relay Interface Settings and DHCP BOOTP Relay Interface Table window The following parameters may be configured or viewed Parameter Description Interface The IP interface on the Switch that will be connected directly to the Server Server IP Enter the IP address of the DHCP BOOTP server Up to four server IPs can be configured per IP Interface DHCP Local Relay Settings The DHCP Local Relay Settings are used on request packets from the Client to the Server As a result of the customer s networking environment DCHP Local Relay is implemented so that it is independent from the original behavior of DHCP relay The DHCP Local Relay is also independent from the option82 module in the forwarding way and the content of
397. ver an insecure network It allows a secure login to remote host computers a safe method of executing commands on a remote end node and will provide secure encrypted and authenticated communication between two non trusted hosts SSH with its array of unmatched security features is an essential tool in today s networking environment It is a powerful guardian against numerous existing security hazards that now threaten network communications The steps required to use the SSH protocol for secure communication between a remote PC the SSH client and the Switch the SSH server are as follows 1 Create a user account with admin level access using the User Accounts window in the Security Management folder This is identical to creating any other admin level User Account on the Switch including specifying a password This password is used to logon to the Switch once a secure communication path has been established using the SSH protocol 2 Configure the User Account to use a specified authorization method to identify users that are allowed to establish SSH connections with the Switch using the SSH User Authentication window There are three choices as to the method SSH will use to authorize the user which are Host Based Password and Public Key 3 Configure the encryption algorithm that SSH will use to encrypt and decrypt messages sent between the SSH client and the SSH server using the SSH Algorithm window 4 Finally enable SSH on the Switc
398. vity and management information necessary to identify to those management entities the station s point of attachment to the LAN or network The information distributed via this protocol is stored by its recipients in a standard management information base MIB making it possible for the information to be accessed by a network management system NMS using a management protocol such as the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP LLDP standard specifies the necessary protocol and management elements to 1 Facilitate multi vendor inter operability and the use of standard management tools to discover and make available physical topology information for network management 2 Make it possible for network management to discover certain configuration inconsistencies or malfunctions that can result in impaired communication at higher layers 3 Provide information to assist network management in making resource changes and or reconfigurations that correct configuration inconsistencies or malfunctions identified above LLDP is a one way protocol transmit and receive are separated An LLDP agent can transmit information about the capabilities and current status of the system associated with its MSAP identifier The LLDP agent can also receive information about the capabilities and current status of the system associated with a remote MSAP identifier However LLDP agents are not provided any means of soliciting information from other LLDP agents via this
399. ware 1s delivered If a material non conformance 1s incapable of correction or if D Link determines in its sole discretion that it 1s not practical to replace the non conforming Software the price paid by the original licensee for the non conforming Software will be refunded by D Link provided that the non conforming Software and all copies thereof is first returned to D Link The license granted respecting any Software for which a refund is given automatically terminates What You Must Do For Warranty Service Registration Card The Registration Card provided at the back of this manual must be completed and returned to an Authorized D Link Service Office for each D Link product within ninety 90 days after the product is purchased and or licensed The addresses telephone fax list of the nearest Authorized D Link Service Office is provided in the back of this manual FAILURE TO PROPERLY COMPLETE AND TIMELY RETURN THE REGISTRATION CARD MAY AFFECT THE WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT submitting A Claim Any claim under this limited warranty must be submitted 1n writing before the end of the Warranty Period to an Authorized D Link Service Office The claim must include a written description of the Hardware defect or Software nonconformance in sufficient detail to allow D Link to confirm the same The original product owner must obtain a Return Material Authorization RMA number from the Authorized D Link Service Office and if requested provide writt
400. wer Disconnect Method as described above The user may set a limit between 1000 and 15400mW Click Apply to implement changes made to the PoE settings The port status of all PoE configured ports is displayed in the table in the bottom half of the screen shown above 67 Single IP Settings Simply put D Link Single IP Management is a concept that will stack switches together over Ethernet instead of using stacking ports or modules There are some advantages in implementing the Single IP Management feature 1 SIM can simplify management of small workgroups or wiring closets while scaling the network to handle increased bandwidth demand SIM can reduce the number of IP address needed in your network 3 SIM can eliminate any specialized cables for stacking connectivity and remove the distance barriers that typically limit your topology options when using other stacking technology Switches using D Link Single IP Management labeled here as SIM must conform to the following rules SIM is an optional feature on the Switch and can easily be enabled or disabled through the Command Line Interface or Web Interface SIM grouping has no effect on the normal operation of the Switch in the user s network E There are three classifications for SIM The Commander Switch CS which is the master switch of the group Member Switch MS which is a switch that is recognized by the CS a member of a SIM group and a Candidate Switch CaS which is a Sw
401. will be used SNMPv2 Specifies that SNMP version 2c will be used The SNMPv2 supports both centralized and distributed network management strategies It includes improvements in the Structure of Management Information SMI and adds some security features SNMPv3 Specifies that the SNMP version 3 will be used SNMPv3 provides secure access to devices through a combination of authentication and encrypting packets over the network Security Level The Security Level settings only apply to SNMPv3 NoAuthNoPriv Specifies that there will be no authorization and no encryption of packets sent between the Switch and a remote SNMP manager AuthNoPriv Specifies that authorization will be required but there will be no encryption of packets sent between the Switch and a remote SNMP manager AuthPriv Specifies that authorization will be required and that packets sent between the Switch and a remote SNMP manger will be encrypted To implement your new settings click Apply To return to the SNMP Group Table click the Show All SNMP Group Table Entries link SNMP Community Table Configuration Use this table to create an SNMP community string to define the relationship between the SNMP manager and an agent The community string acts like a password to permit access to the agent on the Switch One or more of the following characteristics can be associated with the community string An Access List of IP addresses of SNMP managers that are p
402. wisted pair Category 3 4 or 5 UTP STP cable The end node should be connected to any of the ports of the Switch 29 30 31 32 eiom 33 35 37 38 39 40 43 a Eom ma SuSE No BuU Wm HH mym NH 3 1 2 3 3 5 5 1 8 3 UV 5 2 8 5 Nr YE T S S A LZ Z Z2 2 2 1 I 25 EJ ae TA 39 50 5 57 3 8 m m m m m E n E m E H H m ES yEyE EE y BE mE n a mum 47 8 Socom Comboi o B E My m Managed Switch 4 ig yl r E Sd E ar Al a i E E ge Uink ActS peed PoE LL UL UL LL a LI Console Ad V d Ld Lo E n 6 8 10 12 7a 16 18 20 22 1 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 Hm ComboZ 50 RJ 45 Connector Figure 3 1 Switch connected to an end node The Link Act LEDs for each UTP port will light green or amber when the link is valid A blinking LED indicates packet activity on that port 12 Switch to Hub or Switch These connections can be accomplished in a number of ways using a normal cable A 10BASE T hub or switch can be connected to the Switch via a twisted pair Category 3 4 or 5 UTP STP cable A 100BASE TX hub or switch can be connected to the Switch via a twisted pair Category 5 UTP STP cable A 1000BASE T switch can be connected to the Switch via a twisted pair Category 5e UTP STP cable A switch supporting a fiber optic uplink can be connected to the Switch s SFP ports via fiber optic cabling jm WU
403. work administration broadcast A message sent to all destination devices on the network broadcast storm Multiple simultaneous broadcasts that typically absorb available network bandwidth and can cause network failure console port The port on the Switch accepting a terminal or modem connector It changes the parallel arrangement of data within computers to the serial form used on data transmission links This port is most often used for dedicated local management CSMA CD Channel access method used by Ethernet and IEEE 802 3 standards in which devices transmit only after finding the data channel clear for some period of time When two devices transmit simultaneously a collision occurs and the colliding devices delay their retransmissions for a random amount of time data center switching The point of aggregation within a corporate network where a switch provides high performance access to server farms a high speed backbone connection and a control point for network management and security Ethernet A LAN specification developed jointly by Xerox Intel and Digital Equipment Corporation Ethernet networks operate at IOMbps using CSMA CD to run over cabling Fast Ethernet 100Mbps technology based on the Ethernet CMS A CD network access method Flow Control IEEE 802 3z A means of holding packets back at the transmit port of the connected end station Prevents packet loss at a congested switch port forwarding The process of sending
404. y of the ports When there is reception or transmission inki i e Activity Act of data occurring at the ports Light off Power 265 Internal Power Supply AC Input 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz Performance Wire speed on all FE GE ports Full wire speed full duplex operation on all FE GE ports Forwarding Mode Store and Forward NIE speci 12 8Gbps for DES 3028 DES 3028P DES 3028G 17 6Gbps for DES 3052 DES 3052P 64 Byte system packet forwarding rate 9 5 million packets per second for DES 3028 DES 3028P DES 3028G 13 1 million packets per second for DES 3052 DES 3052P Priority Queues 4 Priority Queues per port MAC Address Table Supports 8K MAC address Packet Buffer Memory 012K Bytes Port Functions DCE RS 232 DB 9 for out of band configuration of the software features Console Port Compliant to following standards 1 IEEE 802 3 compliance IEEE 802 3u compliance 24 x 10 100BaseT ports 2 48 x 10 100BaseT ports 3 Support Half Full Duplex operations Power over LAN support 4 All ports support Auto MDI X MDI II cross over 5 IEEE 802 3x Flow Control support for Full Duplex mode Back Pressure when Half Duplex mode and Head of line blocking prevention 6 Compliant IEEE802 3af standard only for PoE combo 1000BASE T SFP ports 1000BASE T ports compliant to following standards 2 IEEE 802 3 compliance 3 IEEE 802 3u compliance Comb rts in the front vetet d adios 4 IEEE 802 3ab compliance 5 Support Full Du
405. y of the types of DoS click on the hyperlinked name in the DoS Attack Prevention List which will reveal a detailed summary for that DoS type O IONEENNM Rx Rate Khit sec Frame Counts show Dot Attack Prevention Settings Figure 10 54 DoS Land Attack Prevention window Summary window DoSTye E ii iiac mm Priory 7 Ex Rate Khbit sec Frame Counts d show Dot Attack Prevention Settings Figure 10 55 DoS Blat Attack Prevention window Summary window 229 DoS Smurf Attack Prevention Table NN DREEEEM Preso Rx Rate Khit sec Frame Comis fl Show DoS Attack Prevention Settings Figure 10 56 DoS Smurf Attack Prevention window Summary window TCP Null Scan Enabled Drop Ex Rate Kbit sec Frame Counts show Dos Attack Prevention Settings Figure 10 57 DoS TCP Null Scan Prevention window Summary window TCP Xmascan Enabled Drop Rx Rate Khit sec 73 Frame Counts Show DoS Attack Prevention Settings Figure 10 58 DoS TCP Xmascan Prevention window Summary window 230 DoS TCP SYNFIN Prevention Table Dine 560060 CO presi Rx Rate Khbit sec A show Dos Attack Prevention Settings Figure 10 59 DoS TCP SYNFIN Prevention window Summary window DoS TCP SYN SrePort less 1024 Prevention Table _ eet ne TCD SYN SrcPort less 1024 mm Piori Rx Rate Khit sec Frame Counts Show Dos Attack Prevention Settings Figure 10
406. zed to suit the needs of the networks and the preferences of the network administrator Use the SNMP V3 menus to select the SNMP version used for specific tasks The DES 3028 28P 28G 52 52P supports the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP versions 1 2c and 3 The administrator can specify the SNMP version used to monitor and control the Switch The three versions of SNMP vary in the level of security provided between the management station and the network device 2d SNMP settings are configured using the menus located on the SNMP V3 folder of the web manager Workstations on the network that are allowed SNMP privileged access to the Switch can be restricted with the Trusted Host IP Management window in the Security folder of the web manager SNMP Traps Settings The following window is used to enable and disable trap settings for the SNMP function on the Switch To view this window for configuration click Administration gt SNMP Manager gt SNMP Trap Settings Tssoe RES Authenticate Traps State Enabled v Apply Figure 6 30 SNMP Trap Settings window To enable or disable the Traps State and or the Authenticate Traps State use the corresponding pull down menu to change and click Apply SNMP User Table This window displays all of the SNMP User s currently configured on the Switch To view this window click Administration SNMP Manager gt SNMP User Table Add Total Entries
407. zing the SSH authentication After the maximum number of attempts has been exceeded the Switch will be disconnected and the user must reconnect to the owitch to attempt another login The number of maximum attempts may be set between 2 and 20 The default setting is 2 Session Rekeying Using the pull down menu uses this field to set the time period that the Switch will change the security shell encryptions The available options are Never 10 min 30 min and 60 min The default setting is Never SSH Authentication Mode and Algorithm Settings The SSH Algorithm window allows the configuration of the desired types of SSH algorithms used for authentication Password 1 Enabled encryption There are four categories of lt A algorithms listed and specific algorithms of Publickey Enabled each may be enabled or disabled by using MAA ETIT Enabled their corresponding pull down menus All s algorithms are enabled by default To open the following window click Security gt ADES CRC Enabled BB SSH gt SSH Authentication Mode and i Algorithm Settings Blow fish CEC Enabled AES128 CBC Enabled v AES192 CBC Enabled AES256 CBC Enabled Enabled Cast128 CBC Enabled Twofish128 Enabled immu Enabled v Twofish256 Enabled
Download Pdf Manuals
Related Search